

vp 

a, 


i 



WITH 

BY FREDERICK A.OBER 4s* 






OqpghtN 0 

COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 



✓ 


» 


I 






* / 













. 















































































The blades clashed— and then Captain Pinzon’s sword flew through the 
air, leaving the worthy man standing, perplexed and seemingly ashamed, 
but weaponless. — Page 29. Frontispiece. — A Voyage with Columbus. 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS 

% 


A STORY OF TWO BOYS WHO SAILED WITH 
THE GREAT ADMIRAL IN 1492 




By FREDERICK A. OBER 

H 



With Six Page Illustrations by J. Watson Davis 

NEW YORK: 

A. L. BURT COMPANY, PUBLISHERS. 


the library of 

CONGRESS, 

Two Copies Received 

AUG i ^03 

Copyright Entry 

KVw. / b- H\ O 3 

CLASS ^ )0<Ci No. 

f-rru 

■:o?gY p.__ 



Copyright, 1903, 

By A. L. BURT COMPANY. 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 
By Frederick A. Ober. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. The Port of Palos 1 

II. Two Heads Better than One 11 

III. An Interview with Columbus 21 

IV. The Boys Talk it all Over 33 

V. On the Eve of Departure 44 

VI. All Aboard for America 56 

VII. Adrift upon the Unknown Sea 70 

VIII. Almost a Mutiny 81 

IX. At Last, the Land in Sight 92 

X. The First Europeans in the New World 103 

XI. New Scenes and an Adventure Ashore 114 

XII. Sailing in Search of Cipango 127 

XIII. Cuba and the Grand Khan of Cathay 135 

XIV. The Discovery of Haiti, or Hispaniola 151 

XV. How the Flagship was Wrecked 165 

XVI. An Indian King to the Rescue 177 

XVII. How Columbus Astonished the Natives 187 

XVIII. The Treasure Brought by the Indians 198 

XIX. The Boys Help Build a Fort 209 

XX. On the River of Golden Sands 220 

iii 


IV 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER PAGE 

XXI. A “ monster of the deep ” 232 

XXII. First Fight with the Caribs 244 

XXIII. Looking for Amazon Island 255 

XXIV. The Tempestuous Homeward Voyage 266 

XXV. A Hostile Reception in the Azores 277 

XXVI. Columbus at the Court of Portugal 288 

XXVII. The “ Nifia ” beats the “ Pinta” into Port 299 

XXVIII. The Boy of Palos wins Royal Favor 310 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS 


CHAPTER I. 

THE PORT OF PALOS. 

One morning in the latter part of May, 1492, the 
port of Palos in Spain was greatly perturbed. 
Nearly all its male inhabitants and many, too, of 
its women and girls, were gathered in front of its 
ancient church of Saint George to hear the reading 
of a royal proclamation. And this proclamation, 
from the sovereigns of Spain to their subjects resi- 
dent in Palos, came as a sentence of doom to some 
and distressed them all, for the little puello was 
called upon to furnish seamen enough to man at 
least two caravels for an unknown voyage of dis- 
covery. At some time in the past the port of Palos 
had incurred the displeasure of Ferdinand and Isa- 
bella, the “most Christian sovereigns of Castile 
and Leon,” and had been condemned by royal 

council to serve the Crown for a year with two 

1 


2 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

armed caravels. The seafaring men of the port 
had known this for a long time and had sullenly ac- 
quiesced, backed as was the decree by all the armed 
forces of the kingdom, if need be; but they had 
hoped, after this lapse of years, that they might es- 
cape the penalty. But when the royal notary read 
the order in the porch of the church, on that morn- 
ing in May, they knew that all their hopes were in 
vain. The fiat had been pronounced, and instead 
of sending them on a short voyage to the coast of 
Africa or along the Mediterranean shores, to fight their 
ancient enemies the Moors, from whom they might 
gain great plunder, the sovereigns ordered them to 
make ready for a venture into unknown seas, where 
man had never sailed before, and from which the 
chances were they would never return. They were 
to receive wages, to be sure, but only those gener- 
ally paid to men on service in armed vessels, and 
with no prospect of plunder or glory. Instead of 
sailing under some one of Spain’s great admirals, 
whose name would have given luster to the expedi- 
tion, they were to go forth at the orders of a beg- 
garly adventurer, whose very name was unknown, 
even to the town authorities, some of whom had 
served the sovereigns for years and had kissed their 
hands at court. 


THE PORT OF PALOS. 


3 


Little wonder, then, that there was protest loud 
and deep, and that the men of Palos were incensed 
at this adventurer, Columbus, who stood calmly by 
while the notary read the proclamation and who 
was surrounded by the regidors and alcaldes of Palos 
and Moguer, together with other high functionaries 
of the twin towns. On one side of Columbus, as if 
to give him the sanction of his holy office, stood 
Friar Juan Perez, of the neighboring monastery of 
La Kabida, and on the other sturdy Captain Pinzon 
of Moguer, under whom many Palos men had made 
voyages coastwise, and who was regarded with re- 
spect for his many sterling qualities. Had Colum- 
bus not been so well supported by these men in au- 
thority, the chances are that he would have been 
mobbed at once and his adventures ended then and 
there ; but as it was, the entire population rebelled 
at the order, not only such of the common people 
from whom the drafts of sailors would be made, 
but even the town authorities, who were com- 
manded to furnish the caravels as well as to arm 
and provision them for the voyage. They were 
promised payment at full values for all they should 
supply the Crown and all penalties of whatever sort 
against the port were to be remitted and canceled ; 
but even these inducements were not sufficient, for 


4 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


the owners of vessels were convinced that if they 
furnished the caravels they would never return ; and 
as to the sailors, they were horrified, veteran salts 
as they were, at the very idea of sailing into the 
wilderness of waters. Captain Martin Alonzo Pin- 
zon himself, though he now gave Columbus the 
moral support of his presence, had often told them 
tales of the monsters to be encountered in the ocean 
to the westward of the Azores and Canary Isles, 
which this adventurer, Columbus, purposed to 
cleave with his keels : — of the mermaids and mer- 
men, the chimeras, the creeping leviathans, the 
winged dragons that guarded the coasts of the lands 
beyond the ocean sea ; and above all of the terrific 
storms that swept the waters, amid which no craft, 
however large, could live. 

There were few strangers in the crowd assembled 
before the church, save the court officials who had 
accompanied Columbus, for Palos was an obscure 
place rarely visited by outsiders, and the sovereigns 
had expected such complete compliance with their 
demands that they had not sent any soldiers to guard 
their messengers; so that those not native to the 
region were very conspicuous and were marked in- 
dividuals. Among the few not known to the resi- 
dents of Palos and Moguer who mingled with the 


THE PORT OF PALOS. 


5 


people at the church was a boy of about seventeen, 
whose dress proclaimed him wealthier than the 
average Spaniard, and whose countenance had a 
foreign cast. He was tall and slight of stature, but 
well knit and muscular, with a high-bred intelligent 
face lighted by eyes in which lurked the light of 
authority. He moved amongst the throng with an 
easy grace of carriage which gave assurance that he 
was accustomed to have others give way before him 
when in public ; and yet he seemed anxious to avoid 
observation as much as possible. Had the Palos 
people been less engaged with their own affairs, 
just then, they might have noted this youth as a 
possible spy upon their movements ; for they were 
by nature suspicious and prone to assault any 
stranger who visited their town without some obvi- 
ous errand as an excuse. As it was, the young 
stranger did not escape observation, for more than 
one malevolent glance was cast at him as he 
walked about, and mental notes were made to look 
him up when the flurry was over. Aside from his 
air of general superiority, there was something in 
his costume which marked him as one accustomed 
to higher society, for it was rich and very evidently 
of the kind never worn save by those in attendance 
at courts. If he were a royal spy or allied with 


6 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


royalty in any way he made a great mistake in 
wearing that doublet of rich velvet with slashed 
sleeves, the silken hose with jeweled garter clasps, 
the plumed hat, and the embroidered belt with a 
jaunty rapier carried at his side. He had not evi- 
dently counted upon such disparity between his 
costume and that of his new neighbors at Palos, 
or he would not have come among them so attired. 
He seemed to know no one there, and that again 
was a suspicious circumstance, in the eyes of the 
Paloese, who at once set him down — such as observed 
him at all — as a friend, doubtless, of the cause of 
their troubles, Columbus, and entitled to scant 
mercy should he be caught alone and could be set 
upon unawares. 

At first sullen and resentful, the crowd finally 
burst into open denunciation of the proclamation 
and the men who had been instrumental in having 
it read to them. Having heard it, they would be 
bound to obey, unless they could evade its provi- 
sions by deserting their households and escaping to 
some other part of the land where they would not 
be known. Few of them were so desperate as to 
follow such an inclination, and knowing their pre- 
dicament they were like caged wolves, in their fury. 
They looked about for some one upon whom they 


THE PORT OF PALOS. 


7 


could wreak their rage, and in their anger fell upon 
one another, until at last the crowd was split up 
into little groups waging verbal battles which, if 
actual weapons had been used, would have quickly- 
decimated the community. The enraged men dared 
not attack Columbus, surrounded as he was with 
the prestige of power bestowed by the sovereigns, 
and so he was allowed to draw off in the direction 
of the monastery, whither he went attended by the 
friar and Captain Pinzon. Then it was that some 
of the people took note of the young stranger, who 
was left quite conspicuous by the withdrawal of the 
functionaries, and one of them, a burly mariner 
with a low-browed, bewhiskered visage, a squat 
shape and broad, bent shoulders, singled him out 
for conversation. 

“ And you, Sefior Como se llama (Mr. What’s 
your name)” said the squat sailor addressing the 
youth, “ perad venture you are a friend of the low- 
born foreigner who has brought all this trouble to 
Palos ? ” 

“I have never had speech with him, if you mean 
Senor Don Colon, ’ ’ answered the boy courteously ; 
< t but he appears the gentleman, and I am a friend 
of all who behave themselves.” 

<< Oho, si ? So you do not know that this usurper 


8 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


is not entitled to be addressed as Don, eh ? He 
is no gentleman, fine sir ; he bought that title, cheap 
as it is, when he signed the capitulation with our 
king and queen, over in Granada, three months ago ! 

4 Senor Don Colon,’ forsooth! Why, he is a base- 
born cur, and a foreign cur, at that. 5 5 

4 4 But what of it ? ” asked the youth, somewhat 
impatiently. 44 1 am not the sponsor of Senor 
Columbus. Go have your quarrel out with him ; it 
is no affair of mine. ’ ’ 

4 4 Then I will make it your affair, ’ ’ shouted the 
sailor, drawing a back-handed slap across the boy’s 
cheek and sending him staggering against a by- 
stander. He recovered himself quickly and his hand 
went to his side where hung the jaunty rapier, 
which was whipped from its sheath in an instant. 
Seeing this movement, quick as it was, the sailor 
drew his knife from the back of his belt and made 
at the youth before any one could interfere. In 
sooth, there seemed no one there willing to inter- 
fere, for a fight, paltry as this one promised to be, 
was what above all else the crowd was spoiling for. 
A woman or two murmured shame, seeing the boy 
on the defensive, and opposed to the sailor, grown 
man that he was ; but the protests were unheeded, 
all the men and boys standing about giving a quiet 


THE PORT OF PALOS. 


9 


acquiescence. They were a brutal lot, those men 
and boys of Palos, and if they ever had any ideas of 
chivalry and fair play they had nearly lost them in the 
general oppression to which they had been subjected 
for years. So there was no real remonstrance of- 
fered when the sailor threw himself upon the 
boy with his knife. The latter was alone, utterly 
unsupported, and he knew he had no friend in 
sight. 

But, if the fight had been left to those two, it 
was soon shown he needed no assistance, this strip- 
ling of seventeen then opposed to a stalwart antag- 
onist. As the man threw himself upon him he 
made a deft motion with his rapier and turned the 
knife-blade upward so quickly that the blow failed 
in its aim and the man’s arm shot over his shoulder. 
It was drawn back again, however, and another 
lunge was made at the boy’s breast. This too was 
parried with a skill that showed long training in 
the manual of arms and itself told of the youth’s 
rank in society, — or at least that he was not of the 
commonalty. His eyes flashed, his cheeks were 
pale his lips compressed ; but he uttered no sound, 
being well aware that this was a duel to the death, 
in which he was engaged, unless he could disable 
or disarm his opponent, and do it quickly, too, 


10 


A VOYAGE WITH COLtTMBtJS. 


At the third attack he pricked the sailor’s arm so 
sharply that he winced, and then by an upward 
stroke knocked the knife from his hand. It fell 
amongst the encircling crowd which, as soon as it 
was aware the sailor was disarmed, raised a shout 
of rage, mingled now and then with a note of ap- 
proval. The sentiment of fair play had not entirely 
disappeared from among the people of Palos, but 
it had so nearly died out that few dared to give ex- 
pression to their approval of it. They had hoped 
to see a fight to the finish, and when the sailor, in- 
stead of advancing upon his opponent, whom he 
could have crushed by the mere weight of his body, 
halted and then retreated before the gleaming rapier, 
there went up a growl of disappointment. He was 
still in a rage, for his eyes gleamed with hate ; but 
he was discreet, and so fell back before that shin- 
ing blade. 


CHAPTER II. 


TWO HEADS BETTER THAN ONE. 

There seemed then a disposition to allow the 
youth to go free, for he had fought his antagonist 
well, and certainly deserved his liberty ; but in the 
heat of the moment one of the sailor’s companions 
threw a stone which struck him in the forehead and 
brought him to the ground, insensible. He had 
already got his back to a wall and was standing at 
bay in an attitude of defiance, still without saying a 
word but seeming to dare the whole assemblage, 
with his rapier held menacingly before him and a 
look of desperation in his eyes. But this untoward 
event changed at once the prospect of affairs and 
he was immediately at the mercy of his enemies, 
and if they had quickly availed themselves of the 
opportunity the story of his ending would have been 
short, indeed. At this juncture, however, he re- 
ceived succor from an unexpected source, and was 

rescued for the time being by a youth younger than 
11 


12 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

himself. It happened that the wall against which 
he had so sturdily set his back had an opening in it, 
a sort of half door, half window, only a foot or so 
from the ground, and in that opening stood a boy 
of Palos who at least had the sentiment of mercy 
in his breast. He threw open the wooden shutter 
that had closed the window and reaching out drew 
the young man inside, before the brutal crowd had 
time to recover from their astonishment and then 
shut the barrier in their faces. 

Of course there at once arose a great clamor, and 
those nearest the window threw themselves against 
it, led by the baffled sailor who had lost his knife. 
Like all the houses of Palos, however, this one into 
which the youth had been so unceremoniously drawn 
was massively constructed, with walls of stone and 
mortar two feet thick, and there was no other open- 
ing visible. By the time the attacking party had 
swarmed around the house and discovered the door- 
way, which faced in a different direction, the boy 
inside had dragged his captive into an upper room, 
through a narrow and tortuous passageway and 
barred the door by shooting across it the great iron 
bolts with which it was provided. And while the 
excitement was at its height, most fortunately, the 
king’s herald once more appeared at the church 


TWO HEADS BETTER THAN ONE. 


13 


porch and by a loud blast of his trumpet imperi- 
ously summoned the people to another conference. 

Knowing that there was no escape possible from 
the house, and if from the house, none from the 
town itself, and that they could wreak their venge- 
ance at their leisure, the men and boys sullenly 
withdrew to the church, leaving the boys for fu- 
ture attention. 

Inside the dwelling, meanwhile, no time was be- 
ing lost by the rescuer in attempting to bring his 
captive to consciousness, and before the noise had 
wholly died away the latter sat up and looked about 
him. He was dazed and weak, but was soon able 
to stand erect, though for a moment sorely per- 
plexed at finding himself alone in a darkened room 
with a single companion and no foes to fight. He 
still clutched his weapon of defense, which at first 
he seemed disposed to make use of with effect, and 
backed against the wall of the room, while his 
captor looked on perplexed. 

“ You may put by the espada, senor, for 
there is no one else here than myself, and I am un- 
armed,” said the boy. 

< < But where is the man who attacked me, and 
where am I ? ” asked the stranger. 4 ‘The last I 
remember he was in retreat, and then happened 


14 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


something that took away my senses. Am I safe 
from the crowd? ” 

“ For the present, senor, yes; but not for long, 
unless you are willing to follow me to quarters more 
secure. Can you walk? ” 

“Oh, yes, I am only a little faint, but my legs 
can carry me.” 

“ Bien (well). I will take you a short journey 
underground. Know, then, that this house is con- 
nected by a subterranean passage with the old mon- 
astery of La Rabida, which stands on the bluff 
above the river, and where lives a good friend of 
mine, Friar Juan Perez, who will without doubt 
succor you and see that you get away from the 
place before the people return to the attack. Still, 
there is no time to lose. Descend with me quickly, 
soon as I throw back these bolts. How fortunate it 
was that I happened to be in the old house and looking 
through the cracks in the shutter, when that stone 
felled you to the ground. Just by chance it was, 
too, and gracias a Dios (thanks be to God), I am 
a coward and fear being drawn into a fight, else I 
should not have retreated to this place of security. ’ 5 

“ Thanks to God, indeed, my dear friend, for you 
have saved my life! Still, I cannot think you a 
coward, since you must have risked your own life, 


TWO HEADS BETTER THAN ONE. 15 

in a sense, to rescue me from the people. Were 
you not afraid, when you exposed yourself at the 
window and drew me into safety ? ” 

i ‘ Oh, as to that — I had no time to be afraid. I 
could not but have done as I did. It was nothing, 
senor; though I did tremble, surely. You are so 
heavy, you know, and my muscles all but failed to 
lift your weight. But I think the dear God helped 
me, for it was done before the people knew what 
was going on.” 

This conversation was carried on while the two 
were groping in the passageway which they had en- 
tered from the cellar of the house, and which of 
course was dark and damp. The boy of Palos car- 
ried the stump of a candle, by the dim light of 
which they placed their feet ; though there was no 
danger of their going astray, the passage was so nar- 
row and so low. This subterraneo , as the boy 
called it, was made, he said, when the monks owned 
both the monastery and the greater portion of 
Palos, and since they had confined themselves, of 
late years, to the monastery, it had fallen into dis- 
use. He had discovered it while investigating the 
cellar of the old house, one day, and had kept the 
secret of its existence to himself. He doubted if 
any one else in Palos knew of it ; and if any one did 


16 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


it would not matter, because by the time the en- 
trance was found he and his friend would be safe 
with the good friar. Just as the candle end sput- 
tered and gave out there was a glimmer of daylight 
ahead, and carefully parting some vines that grew 
over the exit the boy led the way into a walled en- 
closure. 

“This is the old cemetery of the monks,” he 
whispered, as they emerged into daylight. “ It has 
not been used for many years, for there is another 
burial-place over on the hill, and so it is never 
visited. See, beneath these mounds sleep the good 
fathers who alone knew of the subterraneo , so the 
secret is safe with them — and with us. How, be- 
fore taking you before the friar I am going to lead 
the way to the mirador (the balcony-tower) where 
we may rest ourselves . 5 ’ 

They entered an abandoned corridor by means of 
a break in the half-ruined wall and thence ascended 
a winding stairway which ended at a balcony pro- 
jecting from the seaward-facing tower of the mon- 
astery, outspread from which was a view of several 
rivers and the distant sea. The stranger uttered an 
exclamation of pleasure when he looked upon this 
view and sank contentedly down upon a stone bench 
against the wall in the shade. As the boy sat 


TWO HEADS BETTER THAN ONE. 17 

clown beside him he placed an arm around his 
shoulders and looking into his face, said with emo- 
tion : “I have you to thank for saving my life, for 
bringing me out of darkness into this blessed sun- 
light. What, now, can I do for you? Know you 
that I can well afford to give you almost anything 
you desire, for though I am now alone and seem- 
ingly friendless, I have rich and powerful connec- 
tions in my home province. More than this I can- 
not now tell you ; but riches, even honors, I can 
sometimes bestow, my brother. ’ ’ 

44 Oh,” said the boy, with his cheek reddening 
and looking down at his bare feet, 44 I desire noth- 
ing at all. What less could I have done ? I too am 
alone, and unlike you I have few if any friends ; 
but my wants are few, since I never had much at 
any time. If you care to give me your friendship, 
that is all I ask. ’ ’ 

4 4 That you have, surely, and shall have, all my 
life,” answered the stranger, drawing the boy 
against his shoulder in a close embrace. 4 4 If indeed 
you are all alone, wh}' not join your fortunes with 
mine and go with me from this place when I leave, 
seeking something better? ” 

The boy’s eyes lightened up with a happy smile 

and he said quickly : 4 4 That I will, if you will take 
2 


18 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


me, for I am an orphan and have no ties that bind 
me to Palos. I would like to see the world.” 

“And you shall; leave that to me. You can 
return to Palos, later, can you not, and secure what 
belongs to you there, or arrange to leave it in safe 
hands ? ” 

The boy laughed heartily. “Yes, I can return 
to Palos ; but, senor, I have nothing there at all. 
Only what you see me wear — that is all I possess. 
I shall be a sorry companion for you, I fear.” 

“Is that true ? ” asked the youth, joining in the 
laugh. “Well, in that case there will be the less 
to leave behind, and the more to provide. It 
pleases me to know that you have so little, since you 
care so little for it, for now I know what I can do. ’ 5 

Little, in truth, the boy had, to all appearances, 
for his scanty garments, though clean and neat, 
were worn and even ragged. They consisted of 
merely a shirt, a short jacket and trousers reaching 
to the knees, below which his stout freckled legs 
were much in evidence, while his feet, as already 
mentioned, were bare. But his merry face belied 
the belief that he was poor, being an index to that 
richest of possessions, a contented mind. It was 
round and red-cheeked, with laughing blue eyes, a 
tip-tilted nose and wide mouth with white even 


TWO HEADS BETTER THAN ONE. 19 

teeth, and was surmounted by a shock of yellow 
hair, which, being covered by no cap or hat, was 
tanned, as well as his skin. He was sixteen years 
old, or just a year younger than his friend, and for 
the five years past had been practically a waif, 
without a home or friendly relatives. 

After he had told his short story, ending up with 
the statement that his name was Pablo Santos, his 
friend related his — or as much as he chose to tell, — 
evidently reserving much that would have been 
very interesting, and giving merely scanty facts as 
to his name and life. 

4 4 My name is Adolfo , 5 ’ he said, 4 4 and — well, you 
may call me Sanchez, for the other part. Yes, 
that will do as well as any name, for though I am 
not ashamed of anything I ever did, yet for reasons 
sufficient to myself, I would rather not reveal my 
patronymic, my family name. Sometime I will 
tell you, sometime I shall hope to make you ac- 
quainted with my home; but now — now I must 
continue incognito. I have not run away from my 
home and friends, but on the contrary am here with 
their full approval. In short, friend Pablo, I am 
here for the purpose, which perhaps you may have 
already divined, of going with Don Cristobal Colon 
on his voyage of discovery ! 5 5 


20 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


‘ < Does he know it? ” interrupted Pablo. ‘ £ And 
will you take me, too ? ” he added eagerly. “ Oh, 
I too have wished to go with that great man on 
that voyage which my friends fear so much ; but I 
am afraid he would not take me, a boy, when men 
only are wanted.” 

4 ‘No, he does not know it,” answered Adolfo; 
but all the same, he is going to take me, if I have 
to raise heaven and earth to compel him ; and if 
you care to go, he must take you, too ; so that is 
settled.” 

“ Is it?” exclaimed Pablo joyfully. “ Oh, it 
must be, because, do you know, the good God has led 
us along until the way seems paved for it. How ? 
Why, if the signs mean anything, that is. Don’t 
you know, that great man, Columbus, is right here 
in this very building, and that he is even now a 
guest of good Juan Perez, the prior of La Rabida, 
who interceded with Isabella our queen and pro- 
cured the order upon Palos which my neighbors 
resent so much? And, Juan Perez is my friend; 
at least he always treats me well and knows I am 
an honest youth. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ If this be true, ’ ’ said Adolfo happily, < < we 
are indeed most fortunate. Let us lose no time in 
seeking the Prior and Don Colon,” 


CHAPTER III. 


AN INTERVIEW WITH COLUMBUS. 

The boys descended the winding stairway of 
stone, Pablo in the lead, until they arrived again 
at the great corridor which ran around the inner 
court of the monastery. This corridor was sur- 
rounded on three sides by cloister cells where the 
monks slept by night and meditated by day, and 
on the fourth side was the great refectory or 
dining hall where they ate their simple meals. To 
this refectory Pablo led the way, pausing as he 
heard voices within and timidly knocked on the 
massive oaken door. So earnestly were the people 
within conversing that they did not hear the faint 
sound and continued without interruption. They 
were evidently discussing the possibility of provid- 
ing the necessary vessels for the voyage, for the boys 
heard Captain Pinzon’s voice ring out:— “The 
third caravel? I tell you, I will provide that, 
since by our sovereign’s commands you are fur- 
nished with the others. I have just the vessel for 
21 


22 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


the voyage, a little boat called the 4 Nina,’ ; — small 
to he sure, but trim and snug and able to weather 
any gale ; she shall make the third one of the fleet, 
and my brother, Vicente Yanez, will go along as 
her captain, while I, with your permission, will 
command the ‘ Santa Maria, ’ which, as the largest 
of the fleet, should be the flag-ship.” 

There was a murmured remonstrance at this an- 
nouncement, evidently from Columbus, the boys 
catching only a fragment of it, the voice was so 
low ; but they gathered that he himself had counted 
upon furnishing the third vessel of the fleet, and 
did not wish to be forestalled. At the same time, 
he expressed his gratitude to Captain Pinzon for so 
promptly coming to the rescue, being unaware 
whither to look for such a vessel as he desired. 

The real truth, as afterward revealed by legal 
inquiry, was, that Columbus at that time had no 
means whatever with which to provide the third 
caravel, and was inexpressibly relieved by Captain 
Pinzon ’s offer. When the king and queen had said 
they would furnish two vessels for the voyage, 
in their conference at Granada, his pride and am- 
bition had prompted him to offer the third, al- 
though well he knew he had not a maravedi to 
spare for such a venture. 


AN INTERVIEW WITH COLUMBUS. 23 

“Well, let that go,” rejoined Captain Pinzon, 
in answer to his murmured protest. 4 4 1 will send 
the little 4 Nina,’ armed and equipped, manned 
with men of my own choosing and captained by my 
brother, and we can settle afterward for the ex- 
pense.” 

44 Yes, yes, that is well,” said the voice of Friar 
Perez, addressing Columbus. 44 Captain Pinzon is 
well able to do all he promises, and moreover he is 
the greatest navigator and most powerful landowner 
in these parts. I congratulate you, Se or Don 
Colon, upon acquiring such a stout ally and friend 
at the outset. You remember, that he said he 
would aid you, when we had our consultation here, 
before I sent you on the last journey to court ; and 
sooth, I knew he would make good his words. 
The next thing we have to provide for is the man- 
ning of the other vessels ; for verily, my people of 
Palos are averse to volunteering for the voyage. 
If some one, or some few, of them would volunteer, 
I feel assured the rest would follow, like a flock of 
sheep after their leader, jumping over a wall. But 
where to get those first few, — that is the question.” 

At this juncture Pablo knocked again at the 
oaken door, and there being for the instant a pause 
in the conversation, Friar Perez heard the sound 


24 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


and called out “Come in.” As the boys timidly 
entered the gaze of the trio was centered on them 
and they were indeed abashed to find themselves in 
the presence of the men. But Juan Perez knew 
Pablo, having often employed him on errands be- 
tween the monastery and the town, and being a 
kindly-dispositioned person at once relieved his em- 
barrassment by saying: “ Oho, little man, so } r ou 
have come to join us in consultation on matters of 
weight to the world ? Well, you are just in time 
to give us good advice, my friend. What is thy 
business, chiquito , (little one), tell me without de- 
lay.” 

“Good father,” faltered Pablo, “we were pass- 
ing through the corridor and could not but overhear 
that you were in need of men for the voyage that 
Senor Don Colon has in mind, and we, — that is, I 
— no, we, I mean — have come to offer our services 
as sailors.” 

Pablo stood up stoutly before the great men and 
looked in their faces with direct and honest gaze, 
while his companion beside him, equally in earnest 
but less ill at ease, also met their expressions of as- 
tonishment without flinching. 

‘ 4 Hold ! ’ ’ cried the Friar. 4 4 So that is it, eh ? 
You would go with Don Colon on his mighty voyage 


AN INTERVIEW WITH COLUMBUS. 2$ 

across the ocean sea? del! But I admire your 
courage, little men. Mira (behold), Almirante 
Colon, the volunteers I alluded to. Heaven has 
provided them ready at hand. Can you longer 
doubt the will of Providence as to your undertak- 
ing ? They are small, to be sure , — muy chiquito ; — 
but their hearts are valiant, not a doubt of that! ” 

4 4 Es verdad , — it is true, 5 ’ assented Columbus, with 
an amused smile playing about his mouth. 4 4 But I 
wish their bodies were in proportion to their hearts. 
What we want is men, grown men, every one an 
able bodied mariner ; and even then there will be 
no room to spare.” 

4 4 Pouf ! 5 ’ exclaimed Captain Pinzon with a snort 
of disdain. 4 4 Take those children along with us 
on such a voyage? The idea is preposterous. I 
tell you, every man must be a giant ; children and 
pigmies, women and babies — all, must stay at home. 
We have no use for them.” 

44 Seftor Cajpitan ,” said Adolfo, now speaking for 
the first time, 4 4 1 must beg to differ with you. 
While it is true you will have no use for babes or 
children, still I would remind you that we are not 
to be classed with either. If we go we shall ex- 
pect, each, to do a man’s work, and this we pledge 
ourselves to perform.” 


26 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


“Nonsense,” burst in the choleric Captain. 

£ 4 Do you imagine I have passed forty years of my 
life at sea for nothing? I know a man when I see 
him, and I also know a boy big with pride. Go 
home, my boy, and tell thy mother she has let thee 
loose too soon from her side. We respect thy de- 
sires ; but what we want is men, full grown and 
able.” 

4 4 It may be true , 5 ’ rejoined Adolfo courteously, 

4 4 that I am not a man full grown ; but time will 
remedy that defect, if defect it be. Only the re- 
spect I entertain for my elders, for the holy of- 
fice that the Pere Marchena represents in his per- 
son, and for the achievements of yourself and Don 
Colon, prevents me from offering to prove myself 
a man in deeds, if not in stature, if so be it is your 
will.” 

44 What? Do you mean that you would put thy 
valor to the test of the sword? ” cried the Captain, 
with a loud laugh ; while Columbus and the Prior 
could not but smile at the absurdity of the proposal. 
The youth nodded, not at all abashed by the at- 
tempt to make him the butt of ridicule, while Pablo 
looked his admiration. 44 I do not wish to seem 
presumptuous or bold,” said Adolfo; 44 but I will 
meet with the sword any man you may bring 


AN INTERVIEW WITH COLUMBUS. 27 

against me, provided yon will allow my success or 
failure to disarm him to decide our going on the 
voyage, ’ 9 

“ Any man, say you? Why, as to that matter, 
I have the name of being fairly good with the 
blade ; but, faith, I would not like to harm thee, 
lad ; and it would be no credit to me to disarm thee. 
Still, as you have got the maggot of pride in thy 
brain, it may be as well to extract it now and in 
this manner, perad venture it might grow. 44 Good 
father,” said the Captain addressing the Prior, 

4 4 hast thou a pair of 4 Toledos ’ in the monastery. 
Not over large, remember, but a pair of medium 
weight and length, for if so I would have it out 
with this youth, now and here, for if we do not 
rid ourselves of him he may be pestering us for- 
ever; and if he should perchance disarm me — 
though the mere thought is an absurdity — he will 
be worthy to go along. ’ ’ 

Both the Prior and Columbus ventured remon- 
strance ; but the captain was seriously set upon the 
test, promising that he would not harm the boy, 
only disarm him and put down his pride; so the 
Prior sent out a servant for a pair of blades he wot 
of, hanging in the porter’s lodge. 

4 4 It becomes not one of my calling to have in his 


28 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


possession such weapons,” the good Prior ex- 
plained ; ‘ 4 but they were left here by an old soldier 
who died in our hospital, years agone, and have 
continued here ever since. But do not harm the 
boy, my worthy Captain, for of a truth he hath a 
good face and his valor is unquestionably great. ’ ’ 

“Not I, indeed,” answered the Captain; “for I 
too love a gallant soul, unafraid to put his mettle to 
the test, and already have half a mind to let him 
go, from the mere fact that he is willing to with- 
stand me.” 

“ Then, Senor Capitan, I entreat you to allow of 
it, without giving yourself unnecessary humilia- 
tion, ’ ’ said Adolfo ; ‘ ‘ for surely I do not desire this 
thing. Call it pride, or what you will ; but I made 
the proffer only in order that we might be sure of 
consent, for my friend and I desire above all things 
to accompany you on the voyage.” 

“ And that you shall, both of you, if you disarm 
me twice out of thrice,” rejoined Pinzon, passing 
the youth a sword and warning him to be on guard. 
Adolfo took the blade, bent it nearly double to as- 
sure himself as to its temper, and then assumed the 
position of defense. The refectory was large and 
in one corner of it there was sufficient space for 
their play, while the spectators gathered at one 


AN INTERVIEW WITH COLUMBUS. 29 

side, apparently more agitated than the two con- 
testants. 

“ It ill becomes me to witness such an encounter, ’ ’ 
protested the Prior with a sorrowful air, yet with a 
twinkle in his eye that told of some latent longing 
for a bout now and then with other things than 
with the “ world, the flesh, and the devil.” “But 
no bloodshed, Captain mine, remember, not even a 
pin prick ; for such a thing cannot be within these 
walls, you know.” 

6 £ Have no fear, I will not harm a hair of his 
head,” exclaimed the Captain. “How, lad, have 
at thee ! Stand well on guard, for I intend to take 
thy sword, right now . 5 5 The doughty Captain ad- 
vanced upon the youth, who, standing easily bal- 
anced, with legs well apart, met the impact con- 
fidently. The blades clashed, struck fire in fact, 
and then — Captain Pinzon’s sword flew through the 
air and landed on a far side of the room, leaving the 
worthy man standing perplexed and seemingly 
ashamed, but weaponless. 

“ Faith, but I don’t see how he did it,” he ex- 
claimed, ruefully. “But, certes, he cannot do it 
again; that was a mere accident. Hand me the 
blade, Pablo. How, boy, this bout shall settle thee, 


30 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


and I’m not so sure I shall not prick thee in the 
arm a bit, just for revenge, my lad. ’ ’ 

Adolfo said nothing, but smiled reassuringly into 
Pablo’s anxious eyes, and again assumed the de- 
fensive, this time repeating the performance with 
equal celerity and effectiveness. The Captain’s 
44 Toledo ” whizzed through the air and sought the 
same part of the room as before, as if drawn there 
by a magnet; but the Captain stood transfixed 
with surprise. 4 4 Again ! again ! ” he shouted. 

4 4 Pablo bring me the blade again. I cannot believe 
this youngster has it in him to defeat me at the 
sword play, old as I am. Diablo ! but my muscles 
must be stiff. Perhaps another bout will relax 
them, so another we must have, my friends.” 

But both the Prior and Columbus protested 
against proceeding further. 4 4 He has done it, my 
Captain,” quoth the Prior. 44 He has won his 
right to go with thee and Don Colon. How stand 
by thy word and let well enough alone. ’ ’ 

44 Yes, worthy sir,” added Columbus; 4 4 no 
doubt his skill was the result of some sleight of 
hand with which you are not familiar ; but he has 
proved himself, and without boasting, so forsooth 
he shall, with your consent, he and his companion, 
sail with us across the ocean sea. ’ ’ 


AN INTERVIEW WITH COLUMBUS. 


31 


The Captain grumbled heartily at first, and de- 
clared himself outwitted and overborne ; but in the 
end his generous disposition asserted itself and he 
advanced with outstretched hand. 4 ‘ Thou art a 
valiant lad and a skilful, too ; so let it go at that. 
But, tell me, was it not by a trick that the thing 
was done ? Tell me, truly, now. ’ ’ 

“Yes, Senor Capitan, it was, and by a trick 
taught me by — well, by an ancient retainer of a 
noble family, who if his name were mentioned 
would be recognized as one of the first of swords- 
men in Portugal — I mean in Spain,” he quickly 
corrected, and seemed confused that he had let 
slip the word. 

“Ha, in Portugal, say you ? ” asked Columbus, 
eyeing the youth with a sudden suspicion born of 
the thought that perchance he might have come 
from King John’s court and so betray the fact of 
the projected voyage to Spain’s greatest rival. 4 ‘ His 
name, kind sir ? ” 

“ I meant in Spain,” answered Adolfo, return- 
ing the glance without quailing; “but his name I 
cannot at present give you.” 

“ Faith, I have a mind to recall the promise given 
you,” said Columbus, “for we want no people with 
us who cannot give a clear record of their past, and 


32 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


it seems that yours, brief as it must have been, is 
veiled in mystery.” 

“ As you wish it, great sir,” rejoined Adolfo. 
“ But you will not recall your promise, and you 
will find that though my past is not an open book, 
yet I shall serve you faithfully. ’ ’ 

“ Perhaps; we shall see,” said Columbus, still 
with suspicion in his looks and tone ; for the great 
man, as history has clearly shown, was not great 
enough to rise above suspicions of his fellows. 


CHAPTER IV. 

THE BOYS TALK IT ALL OVER. 

While Columbus was questioning Adolf o as to his 
credentials, the prior of the monastery, J uan Perez 
Marchena, was having a little chat aside with Pablo, 
who confided to the friar all he knew of his com- 
panion. He told him about the fight at Palos and 
gave the details as to the rescue without making 
his own share in the adventure more prominent 
than was actually necessary, but portraying his 
friend’s acts in lively colors. He hesitated when 
it came to telling how they got to the monastery, for 
he rightly inferred that the friar would not like it 
known that there was a secret passage from the town. 
However, it all came out, and the worthy Prior was 
very vexed, indeed, not with Pablo for discovering 
the passage, but that the knowledge of it should be- 
come the property of any one outside the monastery 
and the order to which he belonged. But he forgave 
the boy the use he made of it, on his promise that 

neither he nor Adolfo would impart the informa- 
3 33 


34 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


tion to any one else, and was warm in his expres- 
sion of admiration for the deeds of both. “You 
did well, you two,” he said at the end of their con- 
versation, “and as you have escaped the fury of 
the people over there, the only thing you can do 
now is to remain in the monastery without show- 
ing yourselves, until the time comes for the depart- 
ure. You say that no one saw you, probably, to 
recognize you ; and in that case you might venture 
outside the walls, now and then ; but your friend 
must lie concealed. Now you may go, for we still 
have an important consultation in order and scant 
time for arranging the many things that press pre- 
liminary to the voyage. It may be that we shall 
have to send for aid from the royal troops ; but I 
trust all may be arranged without resorting to ex- 
treme measures, especially as we have enlisted Cap- 
tain Pinzon in the cause, and he is truly a tower of 
strength.” 

As the two youths left the refectory the Prior 
warmly pressed Adolfo’s hand and told him to 
make himself at home in the monastery until even- 
ing, when he would assign him a room ; but under 
no circumstances to show his face outside the walls, 
nor even where it could be seen by anybody not an 
inmate of La Kabida. 


THE BOYS TALK IT ALL OVER. 


35 


Thus it was these two were given the freedom of 
the monastery, and became members of the Prior’s 
family, while the work went on that resulted in the 
discovery of America. They sought the mirador 
again and made this balcony projecting from the 
tower their place of rendezvous, whence they could 
watch all that was going on outside while them- 
selves unseen, or, at least, unobserved. The out- 
look from the mirador commanded the now historic 
Rio Tinto and the Domingo Rubio, down which 
sailed the caravels of Columbus when finally made 
ready for sea. Beyond the confluence of the rivers 
gleamed the waves breaking upon the bar of Saltes, 
which was the point of final departure for America, 
when at last all was finished preparatory to sailing 
forth upon that ocean journey which made history 
for Spain and sent the name of Columbus down to 
posterity crowned by the halo of his great achieve- 
ments. 

At the time of which this is written, however, it 
must be borne in mind, Christopher Columbus, hero 
of history, was a comparatively unknown personage, 
and to the people of Palos he really appeared, as 
the sailors said, a foreign adventurer dependent 
upon the bounty of King Ferdinand and Queen Isa- 
bella. It mattered not to the Spaniards that he 


36 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


himself felt sure of bestowing upon Spain a country 
at that time undiscovered, hardly surmised to exist, 
— half a continent, in fact ; for his brain alone con- 
tained the scheme and in his heart only lived the 
faith that it would be achieved. There were a few, 
to be sure, like Friar Marchena, who had interested 
Queen Isabella in the scheme, so that she had 
promised to pledge her jewels, if need be, to carry 
it out; and also Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon, 
but for whom it might never have been success- 
ful. 

When the boys found themselves alone in the 
mirador, they fell to talking over this man Colum- 
bus, and his visionary scheme. Pablo then dis- 
covered that his new friend had more information 
concerning both the man and his plans than he him- 
self had over dreamod of. He, Pablo, had received 
no schooling since he was ten years of age, and had 
never heard of Columbus before the day the proc- 
lamation was read in Palos. Then he thought, 
with all his townspeople, that he was merely an 
unscrupulous adventurer who had inveigled their 
sovereigns into his schemes and brought trouble to 
their quiet little town. He might have been as 
ready as any of them to cast a stone at him, if an 
outbreak had occurred, and this much he frankly 


THE BOYS TALK IT ALL OVER. 3 7 

admitted to Adolfo, who smiled wisely and shook 
his head. 

4 4 That shows what savages you and your people 
are, ’ ’ he said. 4 4 This man, Columbus, comes to you 
with a great project and asks your assistance, and your 
only answer is to throw a stone at him ! Why, my 
friend, do you know, this voyage he has in mind is 
going to make not only himself, but your little, 
miserable pueblo, famous forever. The time will 
come when travelers will come here from the utter- 
most parts of the earth to see the place from which 
he sailed and to have pointed out to them the spots 
hallowed by association with his name. Yes, I be- 
lieve it, truly, — ” as Pablo doubtingly shook his 
head. 4 4 But I can only say so, for of course I can- 
not prove it. I will tell you, though, the story of 
his life as I have learned it, and then you may think 
of him what you will. He is not over well disposed 
toward me, thinking I am a spy, perhaps, come to 
watch his movements. And between us, friend 
Pablo, he is not far wrong. I can trust you, for 
though you are a little savage and ignorant as a 
child, yet you are honest and true and would never 
betray a friend. But I shall not trust even you too 
much, for as the saying is, you know, the very 
walls have ears, and monastery walls in particular. 


38 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


I have not the slightest doubt that at this very mo- 
ment there is a hooded friar on the top step of the 
stairway leading hither, drinking in every word I 
say. Dart out suddenly, Pablo, and see if I am 
not correct.’ ’ 

This last was said in a whisper, and acting on 
the suggestion Pablo quickly ran out through the 
doorway, where he came up against a brown-frocked 
and rope-girdled friar, who turned back without a 
word and shuffled silently down the stairs. 

“Just as I thought,” laughed Adolfo. “ There 
is no harm in his listening, however, so long as we 
say nothing worth carrying away, and you may be 
sure I shall be careful as to that. But here, you 
ought to be enlightened as to what and who Don 
Colon really is, and as there is nothing committal in 
the little I know of him I will proceed to impart it. 
First of all, he is a foreigner, as you have heard 
him called ; though that is nothing against him, as 
you might infer from what those ignorantes over at 
Palos said of him. He is not a Spaniard, but an 
Italian and was born in Genoa. Just when he con- 
ceived the idea of discovering some far country by 
sailing westward into the ocean, I don’t know; but 
it is nothing new, for the famed Toscanelli taught 
that many years ago ; and there be some who say 


THE BOYS TALK IT ALL OVER. 39 

Columbus corresponded with him and has merely 
imbibed his ideas. Toscanelli was a Florentine, but 
Columbus was living in Lisbon when he wrote to 
him, and he also married his wife in Portugal ; but 
she is now dead. After wandering about for some 
years Columbus suddenly appeared in Spain, and in 
some manner obtained an introduction to the court. 
It did not avail him much, however, for he hung 
upon its skirts for years, following the King and 
Queen from camp to camp and from place to place, 
as they pursued their enemies, the Moors, until 
finally he broke with them while they were engaged 
in the siege of Granada. He has been accused of 
being mean and lacking in spirit, owing to his con- 
tinued attendance upon the court, when it was 
plainly evident to all that he was by no means ac- 
ceptable to our sovereigns, and was an object of 
derision to the courtiers as well as the wise men of 
the kingdom.” 

“ But he has not a mean appearance,” interposed 
Pablo. “ He is tall and stately, and his smile hath 
something in it that is winning, despite his stern 
and forbidding aspect. He seemeth to me a great 
man, greater than ever I have yet looked upon. 
But then, I am poor and ignorant, perhaps my 
opinion is at fault . 5 5 


40 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


“ That it is not, friend Pablo; for once, if for no 
more, thou art right. Senor Don Colon is great, 
one of the earth’s noblest men ; but at present he 
is under the cloud of adversity, from such as which 
few natures however noble emerge without some 
taint of moroseness. But to our story: Finally, 
having hung about the court for years, Columbus 
pursuing the sovereigns from Cordova to Salamanca 
(where he had a memorable interview with the wise 
men of the kingdom summoned for the purpose), 
thence to Cordova again, to Seville, and to Baza, 
where he witnessed the surrender of that mighty 
stronghold, and yet again going with them to and 
through the siege of Malaga, he at last held an in- 
terview with Queen Isabella at Santa Fe, near the 
city of Granada. Nothing daunted by the rebuffs 
he had received, he held out for such a great por- 
tion of the prospective rewards he expected in the 
new world he was to discover, that your beloved 
Queen became disgusted and dismissed him from 
her presence. Then indeed Columbus was con- 
vinced that nothing remained for him in Spain, 
after so many years, nearly ten in all, devoted to 
his purpose of securing aid for a single voyage of 
discovery. But he was not discouraged, and though 
he left the court and set out for the coast intending 


THE BOYS TALK IT ALL OVER. 41 

to leave Spain forever, it was with the resolve to re- 
visit Portugal and make another effort to enlist the 
favor of the king of that country, who is a scholar, 
unlike King Ferdinand of Spain, and much given 
to explorations. It so chanced that Columbus had 
a brother-in-law living in Huelva, that town we 
can see shining white across the bay, and there he 
hoped to find a vessel in which to take passage for 
Portugal. Palos and La Rabida lay right in his 
way, and late one afternoon, after having walked 
all the way from Granada, a distance of nearly one 
hundred miles, Columbus tarried at the gate of this 
monastery to ask for bread and water for his son, 
who was with him. The porter gave him the re- 
freshments asked for, and it happened that while 
he halted at the gate the prior, Marchena, our own 
good friend, Juan Perez, looked out and saw the 
distinguished-looking stranger standing there. 
Struck by his dignified appearance, even though he 
was covered with the red dust of the country and 
very much fatigued, Juan Perez invited him to 
enter and to pass the night at the monastery. En- 
gaging him in conversation Juan Perez discovered 
in Columbus a man of infinite intelligence and was 
impressed with his great and novel views. Learn- 
ing that he was about leaving the country for the 


42 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


purpose of offering his services to another king, he 
begged him to tarry yet awhile as his guest in order 
that he might make one last appeal to the Spanish 
sovereigns. Juan Perez sent, that very night, for 
a learned doctor of Palos, Garcia Fernandez, who 
was versed in geography, and for Captain Martin 
Alonzo Pinzon (the same with whom I had my little 
bout), and together they held a consultation here, 
the result of which was that Juan Perez dispatched 
a messenger to the court, imploring the Queen to 
have yet another talk with Columbus. 

After fourteen days the messenger, stout Pilot 
Rodriguez, who had made many voyages and knew 
whereof he spake, returned from Granada with a 
command for Juan Perez to appear at court and ex- 
plain to the Queen more fully what was desired. 
Without losing any time, forsooth, Juan Perez 
called for his great white mule and departed at mid- 
night for Granada (or rather, Santa Fe) where he 
was at once admitted to audience with the Queen. 
Juan Perez was once the Queen’s confessor, and his 
influence with her was so great, his pleadings of the 
cause of Columbus so eloquent, that the Queen at 
once ordered the Genoese back to court, and sent 
him twenty thousand maravedis for expenses. So 
Columbus hastened back again, in much better 


THE BOYS TALK IT ALL OYER. 


43 


plight than he had left, being well mounted on a 
fine mule instead of on foot, and suitably garbed for 
his reappearance at court. His little boy was left 
here while he was away ; and in fact one might say 
that this very monastery of La Rabida, where we 
now rest in peace, was the turning point in Don 
Colon’s career.” 


CHAPTER Y. 


ON THE EVE OF DEPARTURE. 

“ Well, there is not much more to tell, Pablo, 
and you can almost guess the rest, for the coming of 
Columbus to Palos with that proclamation showed 
that he was successful. But he didn’t get all he 
desired, though in sooth he was most insistent upon 
what he thought should be his rights. He declared 
he must be forever after addressed as ‘ £ Don, ’ ’ 
which you know is a title few men out of the no- 
bility are privileged to bear, and moreover he was to 
be the Lord High Admiral of the Ocean Sea, he and 
his descendants after him. He had a stiff fight with 
the Queen, telling her to her face that he was going 
to add to her kingdom more lands and countries 
than she already possessed, and not abating one 
particle of his high pretensions. In fact, as the 
Queen saw fit to demur a little at his demands, he 
at one time went out and got on his mule again and 

set forth for the coast, and if a messenger had not 
44 


ON THE EVE OF DEPARTURE. 45 

overtaken him at the Bridge of Pines, several miles 
from Santa Fe, he might have been away by this 
time and Spain be robbed of its coming glory. 

“ But finally all was decided, pretty much as he 
wanted it, with the exception of the third caravel, 
which the King and Queen refused to furnish. 
Then Columbus declared that he would find that 
and fit it out ; though to tell the truth, he relied 
upon our good friend, Captain Martin Alonzo, for 
every maravedi which will go into it, as well as for 
the vessel itself. The fact that the Queen had to 
send him the money for his return journey to 
Granada tells the story of his poverty ; and yet his 
pride was so great that you would have thought, 
seeing him parading about the royal camp before 
Granada, that he already owned the half of the 
world, with a mortgage on the other half. That 
was when I saw him first, though I afterwards 
caught a glimpse of him in Granada, after the 
Moors had surrendered their last stronghold, the 
great and glorious Alhambra, to the King and 
Queen.” 

“What, Adolfo? were you there, you your- 
self?” asked Pablo. 

“Yes, I may as well tell you now ; but you must 
not repeat it, and moreover I walked alone from 


46 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


Granada to Palos, after the capitulation was signed 
between Columbus and the sovereigns, knowing 
that the vessels were to be furnished by this port 
and wishing to be on hand.” 

“ Then, — then,” added Pablo doubtfully, “you 
must have had some secret information of the plans, 
Adolfo. It looks to me as though you had some 
friends at court, for we common people knew noth- 
ing of the matter until the appearance of Don 
Colon with the royal notary, when we were sum- 
moned to the church of Saint George.” 

“ That is true, my little heathen. I did have 
some information from court; but not from the 
court of Spain. But hush, I am liable to get into 
trouble if I reveal more to thee. Let it go, that I 
had the information ; that I acted on it, came to 
Palos and La Rabida, and with but one determina- 
tion, which was to go on the voyage with this 
man. 

“Now you have had the story in brief, my little 
ignorcmte , and you see now how wrong, not to say 
wicked, you and your friends were to resist the 
command of your King and Queen, to repel the 
offer of Don Colon to win you fame and glory, — 
and all for the mere going with him on a journey of 
a few months’ duration. Neither you nor your 


ON THE EVE OF DEPARTURE. 47 

friends in Palos knew anything of the great plans 
concealed behind that royal proclamation, yet you 
and they were ready to mob this wonderful man at 
sight. Keally , you should feel ashamed. ’ ’ 

“And I do,” confessed poor Pablo, hiding his 
honest face behind Adolfo’s shoulder; but he 
added, after a pause, “ I don’t believe the men of 
Palos can see the scheme in this light, and if any of 
them go it will be only through force applied by 
the alcalde or the King’s regidors.” 

4 4 That may be so ; but we shall soon see, for 
Don Colon is not one to wait very long, now that 
his plans, deferred for years, have ripened. He is 
determined to discover that country which he says 
lies beyond the vast ocean sea, and in my heart I 
believe he will do so. He is not a fighting man, 
but he values his great idea more than life itself, 
and will stop at no sacrifice in carrying it on. He 
wants to live to prove his scheme correct, though 
for the mere fact of living he cares not a straw ; but 
if any man gets in his way he will ride right over 
him, such is his power of will and belief in his des- 
tiny. His head is held high among the stars, but 
his feet are of brass and are heavy upon the sons of 
earth ; let them beware, say I. ’ ’ 

That Adolfo’s idea of Columbus was the correct 


4S 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


one, was shown in the energy and fierce zest with 
which the explorer pushed forward preparations for 
the voyage. Delayed and thwarted at every turn, 
first by the men who owned the caravels, then by 
the common sailors who were drafted for the voy- 
age, finally by the merchants who were to pro- 
vision the vessels, and the caulkers who refused 
to make them water-tight, yet Columbus overcame 
every objection and beat down every obstacle in his 
path. He was ably assisted, to be sure, by the 
three brothers Pinzon, Martin Alonzo, Francisco, 
and Yicenfe Yanez, the bold navigators who re- 
sided at Moguer (and whose ancestral dwelling, by 
the way, still stands intact in that town). But for 
them, in fact, he might have had to appeal to the 
Spanish sovereigns for armed soldiery to enforce his 
demands ; but with their aid, at last, every difficulty 
was surmounted ; though it was nearly ten weeks 
after the reading of the proclamation before the 
caravels took water and drifted down the Bio 
Tinto to their moorings in front of La Babida. 

That, indeed, was a memorable day, not only for 
Columbus, but for the two boys whose acquaintance 
we have made. They sat, as usual, one morning, in 
the mirador, engaged in putting the final touches to 
their simple outfit for the voyage. The Admiral 


ON THE EVE OF DEPARTURE. 49 

had restricted them to a common sailor’s canvas 
bag of clothing and blankets, though Adolfo had 
urged that inasmuch as they were only half the size 
of the able-bodied mariners and hence would occupy 
only half as much room, they should be entitled to 
twice the space for luggage. But Columbus had 
put his foot down heavily upon that ingenious 
scheme, and so, as Adolfo had money in plenty, 
Pablo had been busy in searching out the richest 
apparel and the best sort of small arms, as well as 
trinkets for traffic, that the town contained. It had 
been decided unwise for Adolfo to show himself 
outside the monastery until the time set for depart- 
ure, and nobody besides the inmates knew of his ex- 
istence. There had been much speculation in Palos 
as to his mysterious disappearance ; but as the brief 
glimpse some of the sailors had caught of Pablo, 
when he drew his friend inside the building, was 
not sufficient to identify him with the stranger, the 
people were entirely in the dark. 

In picturing the vessels composing the fleet of 
Columbus, with which he set sail on a voyage of 
several thousand miles across a body of water 
which no navigator was then known to have at- 
tempted, it must be borne in mind that the craft 
were very small indeed. The largest of the trio, 
4 


50 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


the 44 Santa Maria,” which was chosen by Columbus 
as the flag- ship of the fleet, was only one hundred 
tons burden, but sixty- three feet over all, twenty 
feet beam and ten feet draft. She would be 
considered a small craft for a coasting vessel, to- 
day, and few sailors would have cared to venture 
in her on a voyage across the Atlantic ; though as 
' to that matter the great ocean has been crossed in 
recent years in much smaller vessels, even in open 
boats. But the two other vessels, the 44 Pinta ” and 
the 4 4 Nina , 5 ’ were smaller yet, and what we of to-day 
would call merely river craft, being open boats of 
large size without real decks, but with a cabin in 
the stern of each and a forecastle in the bow for 
the crews. They had short masts and square sails ; 
though the 4 4 Nina 5 ’ had at first lateen sails, which 
were changed to the former shape early in the voyage, 
as being easier to manage. One of them is said to 
have had banks of oars, being in fact a sort of gal- 
ley, such as the Pomans and the Barbary corsairs 
formerly used, with from two to six galley slaves at 
each oar. Upon a high forecastle at the prow were 
carmounted the guns of the vessel manned by the 
fighting crews, and in a castle at the poop the cap- 
tain or admiral, with other officers, lived. The 
term Caravel is derived from the Spanish carabela y 


ON THE EYE OF DEPARTURE. 51 

meaning literally a galley or small vessel carrying 
sails. But at their best these craft were very un- 
comfortable in a storm and in a rough sea there was 
no protection amidships for the crews. 

Never having sailed in any larger craft, how- 
ever, the men who were at last impressed into serv- 
ice on this voyage were not anxious on account of 
their size, or rather lack of size ; but were fearful 
because they were to venture forth upon an entirely 
unknown sea which was shrouded in mystery and 
probably filled with terrible creatures awaiting their 
advent merely to devour them. 

But at last, thanks to the unremitting labors of 
Columbus and the Pinzons, assisted by the good 
friar and Doctor Fernandez, the craft, such as they 
were, lay at the confluence of the Bio Tinto and the 
Domingo Bubio, moored to the wharf right beneath 
the hill on which stood the monastery of La Babida. 
From their aerie, in the monastery mirador, the 
boys could look down upon them as they lay there 
and could watch every movement of the men as they 
fitted up the vessels and carried aboard the muni- 
tions and provisions. They longed to take a hand 
in the work of preparation, but were forbidden by 
the Prior to show themselves until all was ready, in 
order that there might be no undue excitement at 


52 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


the sight of Adolfo. So they waited at the mon- 
astery, chafing with impatience and wondering what 
their reception would be when they finally appeared. 
More than once Columbus had appeared to be wav- 
ering in his mind as to the advisability of taking 
them along, and indeed had several times intimated 
to Pablo and Adolfo that he would much rather they 
remained at home. Although they saw but little of 
him, in the press of preparation, standing in such 
awe of him that they never sought his presence and 
only caught an occasional glimpse at meal times, his 
attitude at such times was not reassuring. He did 
seem to have a liking for Pablo, and on one rare 
occasion even smiled on him ; but for Adolfo he 
had at first an aversion he took no pains to conceal. 
As it turned out, later in the voyage, when they 
were off the coast of Hispaniola, it would have been 
better for poor Pablo had Columbus turned him the 
cold shoulder, also, for it was through his expression 
of confidence in him that was the means, indirectly, 
of wrecking the ‘ ‘ Santa Maria, ’ ’ the largest vessel of 
the fleet. But of this in due course. We will not 
anticipate events, but follow after the boys as they 
sailed, taking their adventures as they met them 
and sharing in them also, as much as possible. It 
was no pleasure trip they had embarked on, as they 


ON THE EVE OF DEPARTURE. 


53 


found soon after getting aboard the ‘ 4 Santa Maria, ’ ’ 
into which they were smuggled after dark, the 
night previous to the day of departure. 

It was the night of the second of August, 1492, 
and the boys remembered always the gathering in 
the monastery of the great men of Palos and 
Moguer, together with the officers of the fleet and 
the dignitaries sent along by the King and Queen 
to look after their affairs. Besides Columbus, the 
Prior, Doctor Fernandez and the three Pinzons, 
there were the three pilots, men of mark if not of 
rank ; Don Diego de Arana the chief alguazil, Bo- 
derigo Sanchez the inspector-general of the arma- 
ment, and Boderigo de Escobar the royal notary, 
who was sent, much against his will, to make an 
official report of all happenings. Prior Marchena 
had a great feast spread in the refectory and the 
long tables groaned with a burden of viands such 
only as fruitful Andalusia could provide, with wines 
from the famed vineyards of Palos and dainties from 
Seville and Cordova. Attentive monks in cowl and 
sandals waited on the guests, and naught was spared 
to make the feast attractive; but despite the al- 
lurements of the festive board, an air of gloom 
pervaded the refectory and little was said more 
than the actual business called for. 


54 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


The boys sat in a corner and looked on while 
their superiors ate and drank, occasionally enliven- 
ing the gloom with a remark or two, and they were 
unnoticed until near the end, when one of the 
King’s officials chanced to catch Adolfo’s eye. He 
started, as if alarmed, and then resumed attention 
to his plate, but a moment later dropped a remark 
to Captain Pinzon, who chanced to sit at his left. 
What he said the boys could not hear, but that it 
was something that referred to them or at least to 
one of them, was apparent by the Captain’s turn- 
ing as he answered and looking in their direction. 
This official excused himself a little later and went 
out, being absent several minutes. It will be no 
betrayal of confidence to state that he sought his 
esquire, who had a steed saddled at the door, and 
by him sent a message to Moguer, to the King’s 
procurator there, telling him that the youth he 
desired to find was at the monastery and to hasten 
if he would catch him alive and unawares. 

After the feast was over, much to the relief of 
the guests, all present wended their way to the 
chapel, and those who were going on the voyage 
confessed themselves to the Prior and remained till 
midnight engaged in prayer. It was a solemn oc- 
casion, made more impressive by the lamentations 


ON THE EVE OF DEPARTURE. 


55 


of the many people assembled outside the monas- 
tery, who had come to say farewell to dear rela- 
tives and friends whom they never expected to wel- 
come back from the voyage into the mysterious 
unknown. 


CHAPTER Y 1 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 

In the gray dawn of the third of August, 1492, 
the vessels of Columbus drew out of the little har- 
bor in which they had been moored and sought the 
waters of the open sea. One hundred and twenty 
persons were aboard of them, including ninety 
mariners or common sailors, the pilots, royal offi- 
cials sent by the court, the officers of the fleet and 
several private adventurers. 

The shouts of the sailors as they hove up the an- 
chors and warped the vessels out into the stream, 
were answered by sorrowful voices on land, from 
the people assembled on the hill-slope of the mon- 
astery, which was black with them. Below them, 
on the shore, stood faithful Prior Marchena, hold- 
ing aloft a large banner emblazoned with the Cross, 
and murmuring prayers for the voyagers’ safe re- 
turn. The 4 4 Santa Maria ’ ’ was the first to loosen 
out her sails and glide into salt water, followed by the 

4 4 Pinta ’ ’ and the 4 4 Nina ’ ’ in the order named. The 
56 










ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 


57 


flagship was well out from the land and her two little 
sisters following closely after, when a great commo- 
tion was observed ashore, the multitude on the hill- 
side parting right and left to allow the passage 
through their ranks of a single horseman, who rode 
furiously to the shore and halted at the water’s 
edge, holding aloft what appeared to be a roll of 
papers. By his impatient manner and imperious 
gestures the mariners implied that he had a message 
of importance to communicate ; but it was against 
the Admiral’s orders for any boat to turn back, and 
as he was well ahead in the flag-ship, the captains 
of the lesser craft did not dare wait or send a boat 
ashore. Seeing that the fleet would not wait for 
him, the messenger on horseback rode up and down 
the beach shouting wildly and gesticulating franti- 
cally, and if the truth be told, invoking maledic- 
tions in the King’s name upon the vessels and their 
crews. At last he found a single sailor who had 
been left behind in the embarkation, a poor fisher- 
man, just coming in from toiling all night at his 
nets, and he impressed him by a large offer of 
gold, to row him out to the “Nina,” which was not 
yet far from shore. 

Recognizing his importunity the captain of the 
“ Kina” threw his sails aback and held the vessel 


58 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


in the wind awhile the row-boat approached. 
As it drew alongside the King’s procurator from 
Moguer — for such he was — threw aboard the 
roll of manuscripts he held and told the captain 
to give them to the Admiral. 4 4 He will 
see what they charge him with,” shouted the 
procurator, 44 and as he touches at Gomera in the 
Canary Isles, he will be able to send the youth 
ashore who has surreptitiously gained a passage 
with him. I have done my duty, now let Admiral 
Don Columbus do his, or suffer the consequences of 
the King’s wrath when he returns! A tierra! 
(to the shore!) ” he commanded his boatman, and 
turning about, the twain made for the beach where 
the procurator mounted his horse and rode furiously 
up the hill, while the vessels still remained in sight. 

There was much speculation aboard the vessels as 
to what the roll contained, and the sailors were 
prone to view this overhauling of the fleet in the 
King’s name as a sinister circumstance. Then 
again, the setting sail on a Friday, — for the third 
of August, 1492, fell upon that day of unlucky 
omen — made all the superstitious sailors exceedingly 
uneasy, so that there were grumblings andrepinings 
loud and deep, ere they crossed the bar of Saltes. 
The passage through the narrow channel between 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 


59 


the foaming breakers of the bar absorbed all the 
captains’ attention, and it was not until the vessels 
were well out in the open sea and sailing swiftly 
with a fresh breeze after them, that the commander 
of the “ Nina ” signaled the flagship that he had a 
message for the Admiral. The 4 ‘Santa Maria’ ’ slowed 
up until the “Nina ” drew near and sent a boat out 
with two sailors in it, one of whom passed the 
King’s message up to the officer of the deck, who 
sent it by the hands of a page to the Admiral. 
Then the little boat returned to the ‘ ‘ Nina ’ ’ and the 
voyage was resumed. 

Meanwhile, the Admiral took the parchment from 
the hands of the page — who happened, by the way, 
to be Adolfo himself — and retired to the privacy of 
his cabin, where he broke open the seals and read 
the message. Soon after he emerged, and calling 
Adolfo to him said in severe tones: “ Seriorito, 
(Master), how is this ? I have a message from Court 
commanding me to send you back to shore. It tells 
me that you have obtained access to official secrets 
that should never be divulged ; that you are in ef- 
fect an enemy to the Crown ; but also that your 
position, by birth and royal connections, precludes 
your punishment. It is now impossible for me to 
put back to shore, because if I did so half my sailors 


60 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


would desert me ; but it is my intention to touch in 
at Gomera of the Canary Isles, and there you must 
be ready to land and take the first passage back to 
Spain ; or perhaps you would prefer to go direct to 
Lisbon in Portugal ? 5 ’ 

44 Your Excellency,” answered Adolfo, unabashed 
by the implied accusation in the King’s message, 
44 I have committed no crime.” 

“No, I trow not,” rejoined Columbus, scanning 
the papers he held in his hands. 4 4 1 see no actual 
accusation ; only I infer that it were for the better- 
ment of state policy that you should return. ’ ’ 

44 That may be, your Excellency ; of that you are 
the best, perhaps the only judge. I say nothing 
which will commit me to yoiir Excellency , as to my 
birth or connections ; but rest assured that while 
they are high enough to protect me from insult, they 
are also such as to make it desirable for you to re- 
tain me in your service. ’ ’ 

4 4 Aha! ” muttered the Admiral, stroking his 
beard. 44 You think I might desire to have a way 
left open by which I might retreat to Portugal, per- 
adventure King Ferdinand play me false ? Is that 
it?” 

4 4 As your Excellency chooses,” replied Adolfo 
demurely. 44 It is always well to have at least two 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 


61 


strings to one’s bow, you know ; and I may add 
that should you need influence at the court of 
Portugal, I may be in a position to give it to you, 
youth though I be. ” 

4 4 A prince is always full-grown when born, ’ ’ said 
Columbus respectfully, making a gesture of homage, 
then looking about stealthily to see if it were ob- 
served. 4 4 But you must see that you place me in an 
embarrassing position, Infante,* — a position in which 
I must either treat you rudely or divest myself of 
you altogether. Truth to tell, I would that we 
both were sailing in the service of your king and 
royal sire ; but circumstances have so ordered it that 
Spain hath the outfitting of this expedition and will 
probably reap all the glory.” 

44 Yes, Admiral, it was my father’s mistake (since 
you have penetrated my disguise and recognize me 
as what I am) and I must own to being the son of 
Portugal’s king. It was my royal sire’s mistake 
that he dismissed you from his court with scant cere- 
mony and allowed you to go to Spain with your 
great message. But, believe me, he regretted it 
soon after and would have recalled you, when too 
late. ’ ’ 

* Infante a title applied to the princes in Spain and Portugal, 
but not to the heir-apparent. 


62 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


“ And so, now that he has discovered that mis- 
take, he sends his son with me to ascertain how the 
King of Spain will profit by it? Is that the act of 
an august sovereign, think you, Infante? ” 

“ Not that, exactly,” answered Adolfo. “I 
came here of my own accord from a desire to be- 
come a sailor under the eye of your Excellency. 
My father had nothing to do with this adventure — 
believe me — and he thinks I am now on a tour of 
the courts of Europe. Since this be so, cannot you 
keep my secret and also keep me, at the same 
time? ” 

Columbus eyed the youth earnestly for a full 
minute, then answered: “I take great risk in 
allowing a prince of Portugal to accompany me on 
this first voyage across the ocean sea. You know 
how King Ferdinand, not to say his august mate, 
Queen Isabella, will view this circumstance. They 
will not hold me guiltless in the matter. The only 
way it can be done is for me to treat you like one 
of the commonalty ; and it irks me, Infante, to do 
that. ’ ’ 

“ Have no fears on that score, Excellency. So 
long as I may go with you, treat me as you will. 
Only let me go. And, your Excellency, another 
favor: I would like to have with me the boy, 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 


63 


Pablo, who is now in the 4 4 Pinta, ’ ’ in order that I may 
protect him from any possible harm. For he has 
befriended me in a way that a great service only 
can requite. Allow us to go with you, and to be 
together, and you may treat me well or ill. But 
go I must, and go I will, your Excellency.” 

44 Ah well,” said Columbus with a sigh, yet with 
a smile at the youth’s audacity playing around his 
bearded lips, “I suppose you must go. But, let 
me warn you now, when we touch in at Gomera 
you are not to be in sight, remember. I must 
search for you, to put you off, and make great ado 
about your returning to Spain ; but so it is under- 
stood that if you would proceed with us you must 
lie perdu when we are at Gomera. As for the boy : 
when next the Pinta approaches near enough for us 
to communicate, you shall have him aboard the 
4 Santa Maria. ’ ’ ’ 

4 4 Thanks, your Excellency. Keep my secret, and 
keep faith with me, thus we shall understand each 
other full well and the end will be prosperous, I 
trow. On the return voyage, peradventure we 
have one and it be possible for you to do so, I trust 
you may find it advisable to touch in at Lisbon, or 
some other port of Portugal, at least long enough 
for me to get ashore ; for it would well accord with 


64 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


the plans of your king to have me as a hostage, 
especially with the knowledge that I shall possess 
after the voyage is over.” 

“That it would,” rejoined Columbus, with a 
knowing smile. “ And, my Prince, it would not 
be for my own interests to embroil two neighboring 
kingdoms in war on such a pretext, when it might 
be well avoided. I make no promises ; but if it be 
possible, I will do as thou desirest. But, I make 
no promises, remember . 5 ’ 

“Nay, I understand. Promises to princes and 
diplomats are made only to be broken. I desire 
none ; but at the same time shall look forward to a 
leap ashore at some port in my native land, your 
Excellency. Meanwhile, I waive all my rights 
while aboard your flag-ship, and if you retain me as 
your page will work well and faithfully serve you . 5 ’ 

“Yes, you shall be nominally my page, and that 
will afford me a pretext for retaining you near my 
person and giving you quarters in the castle, where 
you will be more comfortable than with the com- 
mon men. Also, the boy, Pablo, shall share them 
with you, if you so desire. ’ 5 Adolfo bowed and 
withdrew, leaving the Admiral to his observa- 
tions. 

For a while Columbus stood on the castle top 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 65 

gazing out at sea and sweeping the horizon with 
anxious ken. He was disturbed by the knowledge 
that he had aboard his vessel, and subject to his 
orders, a scion of the house of Portugal, Spain’s 
great rival in the race for exploration and the ac- 
quisition of new lands. The complications that 
might arise were likely to defeat his own schemes 
of conquest, unless the subject were handled care- 
fully. He could not see his way either to dismiss 
the youth from the fleet or carry him along to share 
the knowledge that might be obtained of his dis- 
coveries. He was loyal to the sovereigns who had 
sent him forth with this equipment, even though 
they had ventured but a paltry portion of their vast 
treasure in its outfitting, the entire cost of which, 
including the entire armament, was less than thirty 
thousand dollars. They had kept him waiting for 
years without reward, to be sure, and at the last 
had only yielded through fear that some other rulers 
might profit from the Admiral’s knowledge. But 
here was Columbus, now, with a Prince of Portu- 
gal on board his very flag-ship, a son of Ferdinand 
and Isabella’s hated rival in the race for honors to 
be obtained by his discoveries. Problems enough, 
in sooth, had Columbus to solve, without another 
intruding ; and he knew not how he should extri- 

5 


66 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

cate himself from the meshes of the net that seemed 
to involve him. 

That Columbus was honestly loyal to his sover- 
eigns may be learned from the journal he began on 
the voyage, in which he states his intentions of 
making great discoveries and converting all the 
heathen of those countries to the holy faith believed 
in by their majesties. He makes no mention in this 
journal of the young prince he then had with him 
on his ship ; but that was not to be expected. His 
presence there was ascertained from another diary 
of events than that kept by Admiral Columbus. 

Meanwhile, at last afloat, on the great salt sea, 
the vessels sailed serenely along without mishap, 
until the third day, when the master of the ‘ ‘ Pinta, ’ ’ 
Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon, signaled the flag- 
ship that her rudder was unhung and that he must 
repair it before he could continue the voyage. It 
was more than suspected that the owners of the 
‘ ‘ Pinta ’ 5 had caused this mishap by damaging the 
rudder before departure from port, in order that the 
vessel might be returned and condemned, as they 
did not want her to go on the voyage. But Cap- 
tain Pinzon thwarted their plans by securing the 
rudder with ropes and in a manner steering until 
the fleet arrived off Gomera in the Canaries. Co- 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 


67 


lumbus made that port for repairs, and in the end 
had to stay there nearly three weeks, the “Pinta” 
being greatly damaged and leaky, while the lateen 
sails of the “Nina” had to be changed for square 
ones, and other things done to the caravels which 
caused the long detention. 

After arriving at Gomera, Columbus made a great 
hue and cry about young Adolfo, for whom he pre- 
tended to search all the vessels, in order that he 
might be sent back to Spain, as the King had 
ordered; but needless to say, he was not found 
until after the port had been left astern and the 
final voyage begun that ended only in America. 
The Spanish scouts reported three Portuguese cara- 
vels hovering off Gomera, at one time, probably 
sent by the King of Portugal for the purpose of 
capturing Columbus or intercepting his fleet, but 
which had departed without doing either, probably 
deterred by the strength of his armament. When 
the Admiral heard of their presence off the coast he 
was sorely tempted to send out and have young 
Adolfo placed aboard one of those caravels, and 
thus get rid of him, once and for all ; but he could 
not do so without exposing himself to danger of 
capture, and so decided to let him go along. 

What with the extensive repairs that had to be 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


made to the different vessels, and the delay caused 
by the information that the Portuguese vessels were 
prowling about the coast, it was the sixth of Sep- 
tember, or five weeks after leaving Spain, before 
Columbus finally set out on the actual voyage into 
unploughed waters. Though he left Gomera on the 
sixth of September, however, it was on the following 
Sunday, the ninth, that his vessels first lost sight of 
land. A calm delayed the vessels three days in 
sight of land, as though reluctant to let these mari- 
ners aboard of them go off into the unknown region 
of mysteries ; and to make it worse, it was near the 
island of Ferro they were detained, where the Portu- 
guese caravels had been seen by the scouts. On Sun- 
day, however, a brisk breeze sprang up, which soon 
carried the fleet away into the ocean, and by sun- 
set, when the last heights of Ferro disappeared, the 
westward voyage to America had begun in earnest. 

Coincidently with the disappearance of land, the 
presence of Adolfo was made manifest in the cabin 
of the castle, accompanied by his chosen companion, 
the ever-smiling Pablo. Whether these two had re- 
mained hidden aboard the ‘ c Santa Maria, ’ ’ secluded 
in the lockers of the cabin, or had been ashore dur- 
ing the greater part of the stay at Gomera, never 
was fully explained to the Admiral. In point 


ALL ABOARD FOR AMERICA. 69 

of fact, he did not seem over anxious to know just 
where they had been, and no allusion was made to 
the circumstance afterward. It was a long-standing 
regret, with him, however, that he had not been 
able to dispose of Adolfo by sending him aboard 
the Portuguese caravels, when they so opportunely 
hovered around the horizon of the voyage while he 
was detained at Gomera. 


CHAPTER VII. 


ADRIFT UPON THE UNKNOWN SEA. 

While the vessels lay becalmed within sight of 
the Canaries, Columbus held frequent consultations 
with his captains, and he particularly impressed 
upon them the fact that in case of separation each 
one was to steer directly westward, sailing night 
and day till seven hundred leagues should have been 
covered, when they were to lie-to and look for land. 
The correctness of the Admiral’s guess as to the ex- 
istence of land at that distance from the Canaries 
was shown by the discovery of land-tokens, such as 
a branch with berries on it, a piece of carved wood, 
and birds flying over the sea. But, in point of fact, 
the Spaniards had to sail much more than seven 
hundred leagues before land was actually discovered. 
When that number had been sailed, indeed, Colum- 
bus, who was the only scientific navigator aboard 
the fleet, deceived his men by making the distance 
out only five hundred and eighty leagues. His 
only nautical instruments were a compass, a primitive 

affair called the astrolabe, by which he determined 

70 


ADRIFT UPON THE UNKNOWN SEA. 

his latitude, and an hour-glass ; hut the captains of 
the other two vessels had not even these rude af- 
fairs, and so the whole fleet depended upon Colum- 
bus for their observations. It is no wonder, then, 
that after days and nights had passed without any 
land appearing, and the fleet had continued sailing 
westward, ever westward, without the wind shift- 
ing at all and with no prospect of a termination to 
the voyage, the sailors began to murmur loudly 
and were in a state of unrest. 

Perhaps there were not half a dozen persons in 
that fleet who had unbounded faith in Columbus. 
Nay, if it comes to that, there were not more than 
two, and these two the boys who shared his cabin 
and watched him day by day. The Pinzons, being 
navigators of repute and accustomed to long coast- 
ing voyages, yet had rarely if ever been out of sight 
of land for more than a few hours at a time ; and 
even their faith in the Admiral began to waver 
after the first week on the broad bosom of the 
ocean. Experienced as they were, they knew 
pretty well, as the days went by, that their ves- 
sels had made a greater distance than that given 
them from time to time by the Admiral, and when 
about a third of the voyage had been accomplished 
and they were more than two hundred leagues 


f 2 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

from Ferro, they found a cause for fear that threw 
them all into trepidation. It was the variation of 
the compass needle, which instead of pointing 
steadily at the north star, as it had done hitherto 
every night, departed from that point until at last 
even the pilots noticed it and communicated their 
alarm to the sailors. 

The boys had noticed the increasing anxiety in 
the Admiral’s countenance, as he scanned the com- 
pass frequently, then looked intently at the starry 
heavens for hours, turning from one to the other 
without seeming to find a solution of the vexing 
problem which for the first time in the history of 
navigation was now presented. But when the 
pilots of the “ Pinta ” and the “ Nina ” came aboard 
to demand a reason for this apparent variation of the 
compass, Columbus was ready with a most plausi- 
ble explanation. He told them that it was only an 
apparent variation and not a real one, since the 
needle probably pointed to, a fixed and invisible 
point, instead (as they thought) to the north star 
itself ; and though he had reasoned out this theory 
himself and it was little more than a guess, it for a 
time allayed the sailors’ fears and the voyage went 
serenely on. 

A more propitious season for that voyage could 


ADRIFT UPON THE UNKNOWN SEA. ' 73 

not have been selected, for the weather throughout 
was simply perfect. If a storm had come up there 
is no doubt that Columbus would have had a mu- 
tiny on his hands at once ; but as the seas were for 
the most part smooth and the air soft and warm, 
with only occasional showers for a change, nothing 
more delightful in this respect could have been de- 
sired. But the crews got tired of this monotonous 
sailing on and on, through the bright days and star- 
lit nights, and the very fact that they had almost 
nothing at all to do, not being obliged even to shift 
the sails for days at a time, became very irksome to 
them all. Although they knew well enough that 
weeks must elapse before any signs of land should 
be seen, yet from the first they were constantly on 
the lookout for some indication of the promised 
country to which they had set sail. Within a week 
after leaving Gomera, two land birds, a heron and 
a wagtail, came aboard one of the vessels, and the 
sailors felt sure they were already approaching the 
shores of that new continent Columbus had told 
them of. But long days and even weeks were des- 
tined to elapse before they should look upon the 
land itself, and their hopes would rise and sink a 
hundred times before their expectations would be 
gratified. 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


74 

One day, after about half the entire distance had 
been sailed, as Adolfo was leaning over the side of 
the ship, he saw a mass of seaweed drifting by with 
a live crab on it, and calling the Admiral’s atten- 
tion to this fact the latter was inclined to argue 
from it the vicinity of land. 4 4 And yet, ’ ’ he said, 
44 we have come only three hundred leagues, so it 
cannot be, according to my reckoning. Still, as it 
may please the sailors to believe the fiction, I must 
allow them this measure of relief. ’ ’ 

4 4 But look, ’ ’ said Pablo, who stood near, 4 4 there 
is a great white bird, of the kind that I have seen 
flying near our shores at home, and which always 
comes to land at night to rest, as it never sleeps on 
the sea.” 

44 True,” said Columbus, 44 it will serve as a land 
bird for our purpose, anyway ; tell the sailors, call 
their attention to it. ’ ’ At this moment there came a 
shout from the 44 Nina,” sailing astern not far away, 
and looking in her direction the people on the 1 4 Santa 
Maria ” saw one of her sailors holding up a tunny 
fish which he had caught. At sight of a fish which 
was supposed to live always near the coasts and on 
receiving the information of the bird and the crab, 
the crews were put in high spirits, expecting to 
make land right away. 


ADRIFT UPON THE UNKNOWN SEA. 

“ What is the reward for first sight of land? ” 
shouted Captain Pinzon from the poop of the Pinta. 

“ Ten thousand maravedis are offered by the sov- 
ereigns,” called back Columbus, so that all the 
crews of the vessels could hear him ; ‘ ‘ and I will 
add another thousand on my own account . 9 9 

“Good!” rejoined Captain Alonzo, “and I 
will be the one to win it . 9 ’ But he added under 
his breath : “I wonder where that adventurer will 
find the ten thousand maravedis that he promises so 
blithely? ISTotin his own money chest, I warrant! ” 

The crews took up the shout of “ Good ! ” — 
“ Bueno ,” — and the captains ordered all canvas 
spread, each one striving to outsail his neighbor, in 
order to be the first to view the land that the mor- 
row ought to bring in sight. It was on the twen- 
tieth of September that these portents cheered the 
crews, and, as the world now knows, fully three 
weeks were to pass before they should actually be- 
hold the land. The spirits of the men sank cor- 
respondingly, for being of the Latin race they were 
impetuous and of ardent temperament, easily 
cheered and as easily discouraged. 

Seeing the boys one day with their heads to- 
gether, sitting as they usually sat, under the lee rail 
of the castle deck, Columbus suddenly turned to 


76 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


them and asked: “Well, senoritos , what do the 
men talk about to-day, or of late? Have they dis- 
covered some new grievance ? Is there something 
new in the air ? ” 

It was not often that the great Admiral addressed 
his pages, despite the awe he really felt for Prince 
Adolfo, for he was by nature reserved, even taci- 
turn and gloomy, never companionable. He was 
kind to them, saw to it that they lacked nothing 
for their comfort ; but other than this left them to 
their own devices. In answer to his question 
Adolfo said : “Well, your Excellency, the men 
say, and there seems some reason in their saying, 
too, that it is very queer the wind should always 
blow from the east and northeast, never varying 
even a point from week’s end to week’s end. They 
are becoming alarmed, lest this wind should always 
blow from this direction, for inasmuch as it is now 
favorable for our voyage from Spain, by the same 
sign it will be contrary to us going back, if so be 
we ever shall return. And again, they say that if 
your theory be true, that the world be round and 
like a globe, then surely we are now sailing down 
the watery hill, and how in the name of all the 
saints are we ever to sail up again ? And sooth, 
there seems reason in their complaints.” 


ADRIFT UPON THE UNKNOWN SEA. ?7 

‘ ‘ My faith, so there doth seem reason in their 
wonderings,” assented the Admiral, stroking his 
beard and gazing at the horizon with a thoughtful 
air. “ I confess I myself cannot explain the con- 
tinued prevalence of this fair wind from the east, 
and which increaseth as we go the further south, 
except it be that it belongeth to these tropical parts 
and is caused by the heat arising from the sea 
which causeth an indraught of air swirled from east 
to west by the rotation of the earth. But as for 
sailing back again, be it up the watery hill or down 
it, we can easily prove it feasible by turning about 
and trying the experiment. I thank thee, Infante, 
for so frankly informing me of the men’s plaints, 
and if, without betraying anything of consequence, 
you can tell me more, at times, you will be doing 
thy servant a favor. Not that I wish to learn of 
aught that doth not concern me ; but I would like 
to anticipate the complaints of the men in order to 
allay their fears in advance. For I perceive signs 
of exceeding great unrest among them, and as it 
will be absolutely inconceivable for me to give over 
this plan of finding the new country we are in 
search of, some excuse must be made to divert the 
minds of the men and keep them in subjection.” 

^ Yes, your Excellency, I understand,” an- 


78 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


swered Adolfo. ‘ ‘ It shall be my study how to 
divert them as much as possible, and to this end I 
would call attention to those great birds approach- 
ing the ship. They resemble the birds my people 
call boobies, and if 'so they are of a surety not in- 
habitants of the vasty deep . 5 ’ The birds alluded to 
made directly for the 4 ‘ Santa Maria ’ ’ and alighted on 
one of the spars, where they remained until two of the 
sailors caught them, so tame were they, and unac- 
customed to the sight of man. These stupid fowl 
were followed by flights of song-birds, which came 
to the vessels singing in the morning and after re- 
maining till evening flew away again, still with 
music in their throats. These signs greatly cheered 
the sailors especially the advent of the song-birds, 
but the very next day they were depressed by find- 
ing the vessels almost at a standstill in the midst of 
a vast sea of weeds. As far as the eye could see, 
the surface of the water was covered with sea- 
weeds, which impeded the progress of the vessels 
so, the wind having died away to a calm, that the 
crews were terror-stricken at the idea of being 
fixed immovably in this weedy sea and finally 
perishing of starvation. 

To us of the present day this idea seems absurd, 
knowing as we do that Columbus had merely sailed 


ADRIFT UPON THE UNKNOWN SEA. 


79 


into that vast stretch of ocean on the verge of the 
tropics known as the Sargasso Sea, where, owing to 
the eddies of the ocean currents, not only thousands 
of acres of seaweeds, but drifts of all sorts are ac- 
cumulated. Still, the fear was real to the crews, 
and as days passed without their being able to 
extricate themselves, they were at last on the verge 
of despair when, most fortunately, a breeze sprang 
up that finally carried them clear of the Sargasso 
and into a comparatively open sea again. 

This episode had such an effect upon the minds 
of the men that many were ready to cast themselves 
into the sea, in sheer despair, and were only re- 
strained by their captains, who argued and entreated, 
and finally ordered some of them to be put in irons. 
It was from this state of mind that the suggestion 
sprang which was fraught with evil consequences 
to Columbus, when one of the most villainous of 
this cut-throat crew muttered to some boon com- 
panions that instead of throwing themselves into 
the sea they should cast overboard the author of all 
their woes. This suggestion met with almost uni- 
versal favor ; for it must be remembered that the 
crews were composed of the rakings and leavings of 
the port in which they were gathered, and that there 
were many desperate characters among them. The 


80 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


word was passed from one to another, until it reached 
aft on the “ Santa Maria ” and came to Pablo’s ears. 

Being one of the Palos people himself, Pablo 
had continued friendly with the crews of all the 
vessels, while Adolfo, regarded as a foreigner, was 
avoided by all, in common with Columbus. Pablo, 
then, came aft one day late in the afternoon and 
communicated to Adolfo the evil news he had 
gathered. Getting his friend in the cabin, where 
they would be secure from observation, he whispered 
fearsomely : ‘ ‘ Adolfo, the men are planning to 
throw the Admiral overboard, this very night. 
Yes, es verdad , — it is true. I not only overheard 
them planning, but one of my neighbors, that San- 
chez with the evil eye, himself told me, not think- 
ing, perhaps, that I might tell thee and the Ad- 
miral. Now, Adolfo, what shall we do? ” 

Adolfo thought a moment, then replied : ‘ < There 
is but one thing to do, friend Pablo, and that is to 
prevent the deed, at all hazards. Prevent it, either 
by telling the Admiral, or heading off the men 
when they approach to throw him overboard and 
turning the tables on them.” 


CHAPTER VIII. 


ALMOST A MUTINY. 

The mutinous disposition of the crews first mani- 
fested itself about the last week in September, but 
it did not find open expression until the night of 
the tenth of October. On the night of September 
twenty-fifth, after having sailed in company all the 
day, the sea being so smooth that the captains and 
men conversed together, and Columbus and Martin 
Alonzo even exchanged charts and observations 
across the space that separated their vessels, some- 
thing occurred that wrought every one on board the 
fleet to the highest tension. Shortly after sunset, 
as Columbus was studying the chart that Captain 
Pinzon had tossed him from the Pinta, he heard a 
shout from the latter, who, standing upon the castle 
top of his vessel, was pointing into the southwest. 
“Land, land, Senor! ” exclaimed Pinzon, excitedly. 
“ Land to the southwest. I claim the reward of- 
fered by their majesties. ’ ’ Looking in the direction 
6 81 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


82 

indicated, Columbus also thought he saw land, and 
this opinion being confirmed by that of all the men, 
he went down upon his knees and offered thanks 
to God, while Pinzon and his crew chanted the 
4 4 Gloria in excelsis Deo . 5 ’ 

The sailors swarmed into the rigging and up the 
masts, all fancying that they saw land, low-lying 
on the horizon, many miles away. Pew of the men 
slept that night, but when morning dawned the 
fancied land had disappeared, having been only a 
cloud of mist or a mirage. 

Columbus had ordered the course changed from 
due west to southwest, upon the supposed appear- 
ance of land in that direction, but when finally con- 
vinced that it was an error resumed the westerly 
course again, keeping on it till ten days later, when 
he returned to the southwest, diverted by the 
flights of land birds and yielding to the advice of 
the pilots. Had he kept on the westerly course to 
the end, the fleet would have brought up on the 
coast of Plorida, somewhere to the south of the 
present city of Saint Augustine, instead of about 
midway the Bahamas chain of islands. 

After the first of October, the Admiral was more 
open to the advice of his captains and pilots than 
formerly, because, by his secret calculations, they 


ALMOST A MUTINY. 


83 


had made the seven hundred leagues which he had 
stipulated as the probable length of the voyage. 
The distance he gave out was only five hundred and 
eighty-four, but himself knowing the deception and 
fearing that such able navigators as Captain Alonzo 
and two or three of the pilots would suspect him, he 
was more and more uneasy as the days passed on. 
But though he listened with an air of attention to the 
suggestions of his officers, that they should either 
change the course to the southwest or give up the 
voyage altogether, nothing was farther from his 
thoughts than doing either. He had reasoned out 
a scheme of discovery to be consummated by sailing 
due west from the Canaries across the Atlantic ; and 
though the distance he computed had now been ex- 
ceeded he still held to his idea. The captains now 
murmured openly, as well as the men, and nearly 
all were of the opinion that they had more than 
fulfilled their obligations to their sovereigns and 
their country by sailing so far into the open ocean, 
and that to turn back would be no disgrace, for 
already they had sailed farther than ever crews had 
voyaged before without sight of land. It may be that 
the captains heard of the threats muttered by the 
men, who were working themselves up to the final 
act in the drama when they should demand of the 


84 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


Admiral that he return to Spain at once or take 
the consequences, the consequences being that they 
would turn about and sail back without him. If 
the officers were cognizant of this plan, however, 
they did not openly encourage it, neither did they 
discourage it ; so the leaven of discontent worked in 
the minds of the sailors until they were ready to com- 
mit the desperate deed. If it had not been that the 
signs of land became more frequent every day or 
two, exciting hopes which alternated with their 
fears, there would have been no hesitation among 
the more desperate of the sailors in carrying out 
their plan the first week in October ; and the boys, 
Pablo and Adolfo, noting the increasing turmoil 
in the forecastle of the “ Santa Maria” kept close 
watch upon the Admiral, by night as well as by 
day. 

At last they could endure the strain no longer, and 
on the evening of the sixth of October, after Colum- 
bus had refused a persistent entreaty of Captain Pin- 
zon to stand more to the southward, his refusal being 
met with scowls of hate by the men, they resolved to 
broach to the Admiral his perilous position. It may 
seem strange that he had been all this time unaware 
of the intention of the men, or had not thought 
enough of the matter to set on foot an investigation j 


ALMOST A MUTINY. 


85 


but, as Pablo shrewdly put it, he was so wrapped 
up in his one great scheme as to take no notice of 
ordinary things. 

44 He lives up in Heaven — en cielo ,” — said Pablo 
to his friend, when they were consulting as to the best 
manner of approaching him in the affair, 4 4 and if 
we should tell him that these men had evil thoughts 
about him, he would not believe us.” 

4 4 That is true, ’ ’ answered Adolfo, 4 4 his head is 
always in the clouds. That is what you mean, I 
suppose, by his being up in Heaven. He is a man 
with one great and grand idea, and he has thought 
upon that idea so long that it has absorbed his whole 
being, as it were, and it guides him, directs him, 
without his being aware of what he does, I believe. 
He has no sentiment of fear, either, and we cannot 
arouse him by appealing to that. The only thing 
he fears is the prevention of his one great desire 
from being accomplished, and if we could arouse him 
by exciting some apprehension as to that, we might 
get him to protect himself. But he is so convinced 
that his mission is heaven-sent and that he is the 
one man in the world who can carry it out, that I 
doubt even if he could be approached on that side, 
either. But we will try it, ’ ’ Adolfo added with a 
sigh, 44 for he is too great and too good to be sacri- 


86 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


ficed by those cowards, whose only aims are low 
and groveling. ’ ’ 

44 Yes,” assented Pablo, 44 he is truly un horribre 
grande , — a great man, — Adolfo. Do you know, I 
have watched him hour after hour, as we have lain 
here under the lee rail, while he stood like a statue 
of Saint George, — no, like the great giant Saint 
Christopher, outlined against the sky. He is not 
much above the height of the common man, Adolfo, 
but yet he hath the appearance of one more than 
six feet tall. And his eyes : You might call them 
blue ; but when I have looked into them as he was 
cast in thought, they have seemed to me black as 
night. He is what our people call rubio, is he not ? 
— that is, a fair complexioned man, more like what 
I have heard the Germans are who live to the north 
of Spain.” 

44 Yes, yes, ’ ’ answered Adolfo rather impatiently, 
44 he is something like a German or a Saxon in ap- 
pearance, and his white beard and hair make him 
look like what I have fancied the Druids were, of 
whom I once read in a book written by a learned 
traveler. But what do we here, Pablo, discussing the 
Admiral’s appearance, while his safety, mayhap, de- 
pends upon our action ? ’ ’ 

“True,” assented Pablo humbly, 4 4 we waste 


ALMOST A MUTINY. 87 

time here ; but what shall we do, and how shall we 
break the subject to him ? ” 

4 4 There is but one way, and that is to go boldly 
to him and tell him what we have heard and what 
we fear. My heart misgives me, but I shall not 
hesitate longer, for the night is approaching.” 

4 4 God help us, Adolfo, and convince the Admiral 
that we speak the truth,” whispered Pablo, as 
hand in hand the two boys sought Columbus. The 
Admiral was standing at his usual post on the castle 
top, with an astrolabe in his hand by which he 
was taking occasional observations of the stars. So 
wrapt in thought was he that the boys had to touch 
his sleeve, and even to pull it strongly, before he 
gave them his attention. Then he turned a look 
upon them that made them tremble as intruders 
upon his privacy ; yet he was courteous, withal, and 
while evidently employing his mind in some ab- 
struse calculation, greeted them kindly, though 
briefly. 

He knew instinctively that the boys would not 
intrude without some good reason, so he patiently 
awaited their motions, looking down upon them be- 
nignly, as from some great height among the stars. 

44 Your Excellency,” began Adolfo, 44 we have 
come to warn you, to entreat you, and pray that 


88 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


you give heed to our words. There is a plot, which 
may mature this very night, to throw you into the 
sea and then turn about the ships and seek the 
homeward voyage.” 

“ Oho, so this is what my little friends have come 
to tell ? Well, Infante — I mean Don Adolfo, — it 
may be as thou hast said ; but if so what of it ? 
We are in God’s care, friends. I am His chosen 
instrument for a great achievement. Think you I 
stand in fear of mere man? ” 

“No, no, your Excellency; not that. But while 
we know you have no fear, still, should you jeo- 
pardize your plans by inattention to your personal 
security? Kemember, even the great Samson was 
overthrown by the meanest of creatures and his fall 
accomplished . 5 ’ 

“Yes, yes; but his work was done; mine is but 
just begun. ” 

“ So be it, Excellency ; yet it may be sufficiently 
furthered so that some one else might carry it out. 
you have shown the way so plainly, now, that 
others may follow, and — and may reap the reward. ’ ’ 

4 4 There speaks the suspicious Portuguese in thee, 
Infante, — I mean Adolfo. — Pardon me my frequent 
lapses, which may betray thee to my countrymen. 
But, as thou sayest, the work is already well unto 


ALMOST A MUTINY. 


89 


its accomplishment, for this very night, or at the 
furthest to-morrow, land may heave in sight and then 
the veriest landlubber aboard may know which way 
to travel. All my great schemes be brought to 
naught, so far as I am concerned, and others reap 
the victory.” 

Magnanimous as was the nature of Columbus, it had 
its one weakness, suspicion, and Adolfo’s remarks 
had evidently awakened it. 

44 Well, little friends, and how do you propose to 
avert this dire happening, provided it come to a 
crisis ? ” 

“Oh, your Excellency,” answered Adolfo, 
quickly, 4 4 take some precautions, such as hitherto 
you have ignored. Gird on a sword, to-night, when 
you mount to this post of observation, and as an 
excuse if need be for this unwonted weapon at your 
side you might give out that you would be prepared 
to go ashore, were the land to heave in sight. Lay 
out, also, some arquebuses in the great cabin, where 
they can be snatched at a moment’s warning; for I 
opine that the shooting of one or two of the muti- 
neers would be sufficient, and the rest would retire 
to the forecastle, as they are men of mean spirit, and 
cowardly, in fact . 5 ’ 

44 Not like the Portuguese, eh, friend Adolfo? 


90 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


But no matter, do not mind my raillery. Who, 
then, will fire these arquebuses, provided I lay them 
out? For in sooth I know not whom to trust, on 
this occasion, the defection is so wide-spread and 
may have tainted all my men. ’ ’ 

“ Pablo and I will serve you in this emergency,” 
said Adolfo stoutly, drawing himself up and clap- 
ping his boy friend on the shoulder. “ We both can 
fire arquebuses, having, as you may have observed 
already, practised with them at the dolphins and 
the tropic birds when the vessels were becalmed . 5 ’ 

“ So ? Thank God that I have at least two true 
friends aboard ! I think I have more, in fact ; but 
dare not venture to rely upon them in this emer- 
gency. Still, it shall be as you say. Get out the 
arquebuses, then, and have them charged ; but care- 
fully, friend Adolfo, carefully, without exciting the 
suspicions of my captain and the pilot, who may at 
any moment go into the cabin, you know. Need- 
less to say, my heart thanks you, both, dear friends, 
for your intention ; but God grant it may not have 
to be put to the test.” 

The Admiral grasped each boy by the hand, show- 
ing the first real emotion they had ever observed in 
this self-contained man whose cabin they had shared 
for weeks, without sharing his confidence or even 


ALMOST A MUTINY. 


91 


his sympathy. They crept away to the cabin, where 
they prepared the arms, as planned, charging the 
arquebuses and placing them where they could be 
grasped quickly in an emergency, and then cover- 
ing them over with a blanket. They took turns 
watching at the castle stairs, that night ; but noth- 
ing occurred to verify their suspicions, and the next 
morning, at sunrise, a gun fired on board the 4 ‘Nina ’ ’ 
gave the signal that her captain thought he had 
discovered land. 

This was a false alarm, as was soon verified ; but 
it served to divert the attention of the men that day 
and keep them on the qui vive for two days follow- 
ing, when they reverted to the discussion of their 
dastardly plans for ridding the fleet of the Admiral’s 
obnoxious presence. 


CHAPTER IX. 


AT LAST, THE LAND IN SIGHT. 

Notwithstanding the apparent pacification of the 
crew, the boys were not to be deceived, for they 
knew the treacherous, ignoble character of the men 
and felt certain that they would break out again 
when opportunity presented. They were all con- 
firmed in the belief that in any event they would 
not share the honors that this “ base-born for- 
eigner,” as they called Columbus, would win, and 
as they had done their full duty by the authori- 
ties they were more than ready to return. The 
discovering of new continents was not a matter that 
appealed to them at all, since it is only the high- 
minded that can perceive the glories to be gained by 
such adventures. The Pinzons, sharing as they did 
to some extent the sentiments of the Admiral, ex- 
erted themselves to quell the discontent and pro- 
ceed on the voyage to the bitter end; but few 

others shared their noble feelings and finally Co- 

92 


AT LAST, THE LAND IN SIGHT. 


93 


lumbus stood almost alone as against the murmuring, 
complaining crews. 

The ringleaders of the mutinous bands sought to 
have Columbus promise that if the predicted land 
did not appear within three days from the afternoon 
of the tenth of October, he would ’bout ship and 
sail back to Spain ; but though sorely tempted, feel- 
ing almost certain, from the increasing number of por- 
tents, that land was surely nigh, he would not yield 
to their importunities. “ No,” he thundered, from 
his vantage on the castle, “ I will not yield to such 
as you. Almost, we have the reward of our per- 
sistence within our grasp ; and shall I fail through 
a little longer holding to my faith ? Never ! never ! 
I will die first. Go ! And, moreover, do not broach 
the subject again, either to me or among your- 
selves. You shipped for the voyage, be it long or 
short, and for the voyage, as determined by me, 
and me alone, you shall stay. I did not come out 
here to take a pasear, — a little promenade, — but to 
discover the land where dwells the great Khan, by 
a newer and shorter route than by sailing around 
the world, and that I shall do, or shall perish in 
the attempt. ’ ’ 

The men had gathered in a body at the waist of 
the ship, where they huddled together like sheep 


94 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

without a leader ; but though they had no chosen 
spokesman there were several more forward than 
the rest who did not hesitate to raise their voices 
above the others and denounce the Admiral to his 
face. Columbus might have ordered them placed 
in irons, as an example; but he forebore, merely 
shrugging his shoulders, with an air that plainly 
showed they wearied him, and turned again to his 
occupation of searching the sky and sea. 

The men dispersed, openly shouting their plaints 
and rending the air with their threats; but the 
Admiral paid no more attention to them than if 
they had been logs of wood, and this incensed them 
more than if he had condescended to reason with 
them. Pablo and Adolfo knew that the crisis 
would come, if at all, that very night, and, so far as 
they were able, prepared for it as before, hoping, 
almost against hope, that there would be no con- 
certed attack by the whole body of sailors, but 
rather a stealthy assault by a single man or small 
detachment. In whatever shape the assault came, 
they knew the odds would be against them, and con- 
sulted together as to the advisability of taking 
some others into their confidence. They could not 
go beyond the little group that shared the great 
cabin, consisting of the master of the ship, the 


AT LAST, THE LAND IN SIGHT. 


95 


pilot, the inspector-general and the chief alguazil, 
besides Columbus himself, who did not have faith 
enough in their suspicions to aid them in any man- 
ner directly. He conceded something to their 
fears by girding on his sword, that evening, as he 
went forth after dinner to take his stand on the 
castle deck ; but more than that he would not do, 
and apparently dismissed the subject from his 
thoughts the moment he was once in open air. 

“The pilot is a trusty fellow, I’m sure,” whis- 
pered Pablo, “and I think we can count upon 
Senor Sanchez, the inspector-general ; but as to the 
alguazil I have doubts.” 

“ And so have I,” answered Adolfo. “But I 
have concluded not to call upon any of them in ad- 
vance, lest there might be a leak somewhere and 
the men be warned. If so be we get into close 
quarters we will call upon them for assistance, 
which they cannot well refuse ; but not otherwise. 
I know those common curs out there in the fore- 
castle. They will send a single man, or at most 
two men, to creep upon the Admiral in the dark, 
and themselves remain perdu. If he falls a victim 
they will stand ready to raise a great clamor and 
demand a return at once to Spain ; but if the at- 
tack is frustrated they will sneak back to their 


96 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


bunks and pretend to know nothing at all about 
it. They have no arquebuses, only their knives, 
for as they say, the knife tastes blood without mak- 
ing any sound. ’ ’ 

As darkness fell about the fleet the boys took 
their positions, one on each side the castle, each 
with an arquebuse lying near, a keen-bladed knife 
in one hand and a bludgeon in the other. Belong- 
ing to the Latin race, they were more inclined to 
use the knife than the bludgeon or the arquebuse ; 
but they were not desirous of shedding their 
brothers’ blood, nor did they wish to make a disturb- 
ance, so they agreed to use the bludgeon if op- 
portunity offered, rather than either of the other 
weapons. The night wore on until near nine 
o’clock without any sign of the enemy ; but still the 
two kept watch, feeling that the safety of the Ad- 
miral and the success of the voyage were at stake 
and depended upon their vigilance. The night was 
very pleasant, with soft sweet airs and a starlit sky. 
The sweetness of the breezes wafted to the fleet 
should have convinced the crews that they were 
near some coast, for they were laden with land 
odors and the fragrance of forests. Columbus noted 
this, and spoke of it to those near him; but the 
crews, being wrapped up in their plans for ven- 


AT LAST, THE LAND IN SIGHT. 97 

geance, did not give it heed. From their posts of 
observation the boys could see the Admiral pacing up 
and down his weary watch, now pausing to peer 
through the astrolabe he carried, now halting to 
observe the trim of a sail or listen to the slightest 
noise upon the sea. He was a conspicuous figure, 
outlined against the sails or the sky, and a shining 
mark for an assassin. To reach him, however, one 
must first climb up the gangway to the castle deck, 
and it was at the foot of this steep-set ladder, one at 
each corner, that the boys were crouched, seeing all 
that took place, but well out of sight themselves. 

About half-past nine, as Pablo lay there watching 
with eyes so wide open that they hardly winked, a 
slight noise reached his ear above the rustling of the 
ropes and the soughing of the wind, which now was 
blowing fresh. He strained himself around the coil 
of rope behind which he was hidden and saw a dark 
form approaching along the narrow passageway be- 
tween the cabin and the rail. It stealthily crawled 
along, crouching in the shadows and avoiding the 
faint gleam of the lantern in the rigging, and Pablo 
noted that in one hand the approaching individual 
carried a long-bladed knife. His heart beat fast and 
furious, and he wanted to cry out; but that, he 
knew, might frustrate their plans. He clutched the 

7 


98 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


bludgeon firmly in one hand and drew back for a 
spring as the man should get opposite, intending to 
deal him a sudden blow on the back of the head. 
It would have been murder, provided the blow were 
fatal; but though this fact was flashed upon him 
and almost seared into his soul, he was still deter- 
mined to act, just the same, believing that he had 
good cause in defense of the Admiral. 

But the boy was saved from committing the 
deed, almost by a miracle. Suddenly, just as the 
dark figure got almost opposite him, Pablo heard 
Columbus call out excitedly : “ A light ! A light ! 
Come hither and confirm my view. ’ ’ The would- 
be murderer heard the voice, also, and after hesitat- 
ing a second, turned and glided swiftly back whence 
he had come. 

It may be well believed that poor Pablo drew a 
long breath of relief at this, and quickly crossing 
himself he breathed a prayer of thanks to the Al- 
mighty for saving him that dread experience. He 
sprang up the ladder, then, closely followed by one 
Pedro Gutierrez, a gentleman of the King’s court, 
who happened to be in the cabin when the sum- 
mons came. 

“Come hither, Don Pedro,” exclaimed Colum- 
bus hurriedly, “and you, too, Pablo. Tell me, is 


AT LAST, THE LAND IN SIGHT. 99 

not that a light, faintly glimmering at a distance? 
There, just beneath the sail. Look ! look ! Ah, 
here comes Don Rodrigo (as Senor Sanchez thrust 
his head above the ladder). What think you, 
Senor, is not that a light ? ” 

“ Of a truth,” murmured Don Pedro, “it surely 
is a light,” and Pablo, though unheard, also added 
his testimony. But Don Rodrigo was too late to 
observe the gleam at a distance, though a little later 
it appeared again, wavering in a fitful fashion, as 
though it were some torch or lantern in a fisher- 
man’s boat rising and falling on the waves. While 
the night lasted all must be speculation as to the 
import of the transient gleam, but it was certain 
proof that ahead of the fleet, shrouded in the dark- 
ness, was the land of promise that Columbus had so 
long and hitherto vainly sought. Not an eye was 
closed that night aboard the ‘ ‘ Santa Maria, ’ ’ and the 
crews gathered at the rails chattering like parrots 
over what the morning was to reveal. Among the 
men so gathered there was at least one, Pablo and 
Adolfo knew, who quite recently had murder in his 
heart, and who, but for the interposition of some 
unseen power, might have frustrated the schemes 
Columbus had so long carried in his mind. The 
darkness was such that Pablo could not identify the 


L. of C. 


100 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


man who had come so near being an assassin ; but 
there were certain peculiarities in his general ap- 
pearance, he told Adolfo, when later he narrated 
his exciting experience, by which he thought he 
could detect him in the daytime. 

How slowly the hours wore away, as, all hands 
on deck, a watch was kept till daylight came. 
About two o’clock in the morning of that ever- 
memorable Friday, the twelfth of October, 1492, a 
gun on the 4 4 Pinta,” which was ahead, boomed out 
the joyful tidings. Land was first actually seen by a 
common sailor, one Rodrigo de Triana, who was on 
watch at the mast-head, and (to go ahead of our 
story a little) when he saw it he cried out : 4 4 There 
is the land ! The reward is mine.” The reward 
offered by King Ferdinand, of thirty thousand 
maravedis to him who should first descry the land, 
most certainly should have gone to this poor sailor, 
who was overjoyed at his good fortune — as he 
viewed it — and acted like a madman. But, sad to 
relate, when the fleet had returned to Spain, the re- 
ward was adjudged to Columbus for first having 
seen the light ; and to his everlasting shame, be it 
said, he not only accepted but retained it, refusing 
even to share with poor Rodrigo, who was so over- 
come by this act of injustice that he left Spain and 


AT LAST, THE LAND IN SIGHT. lol 

Went to Africa, where he turned Mohammedan and 
passed his days cursing the ingrates of his native 
land. 

The ‘ ‘ Pinta ’ ’ lay- to and awaited the other vessels, 
according to the instructions of Columbus, and when 
daylight broke, there before the collective crews lay 
the land they had sought so many weeks. The 
chronicles of the time do not state whether or not 
they were disappointed or delighted at the prospect 
outspread before them; but in the first flush of 
their enthusiasm and their joy at reaching the object 
of their labors, they overlooked the fact that the 
scene was, after all, not altogether an inspiring one. 
Beyond a line of foaming coral reefs lay the real 
shore of what seemed to be an island, covered with 
a scant vegetation and with far-extending beaches, 
ending north and south in rocky promontories. 
There was no sign, however, of the advanced civil- 
ization which Columbus had expected to discover 
here, no indication of populous cities or even towns, 
no fine architecture, no temples or palaces. So far 
as the Spaniards could discover, there were no 
houses at all in sight ; though later, after they had 
landed, they found the humble huts thatched with 
palm leaves in which the people lived. 

Even in his hour of triumph, Columbus maintained 


102 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


his serene composure, and when the men crawled on 
their knees before him, begging his pardon for their 
mutinous behavior, he freely forgave them all, re- 
minding them only of the goodness of God in hav- 
ing given them such a favorable voyage and in 
vouchsafing to them, above all other people in the 
world, the blessed privilege of being first to gaze 
upon the newly-discovered country. 

“ Would he be so magnanimous if he knew all ? ” 
whispered Pablo to Adolfo, as they hung over the 
rail, straining their eyes for a clear view of the 
shore, now unfolding before them in the morning 
mists. 

“ I think so,” answered his companion. “ The 
Admiral can be great and lofty of mind when occa- 
sion demands. He is now filled with thankfulness 
that his long-cherished scheme has come to pass, and 
would probably forgive the would-be assassin if he 
had taken him by the throat. But see, the boats 
are being lowered. We must secure permission 
from the Admiral to go ashore with the first party 
that lands.” 


CHAPTER X. 


THE FIRST EUROPEANS IN THE NEW WORLD. 

“ Yes, my sons, surely you shall go with me,” 
answered Columbus, when appealed to by Pablo and 
Adolfo for permission to accompany him ashore in the 
long boat. “ And moreover, you two shall be the 
first, after me, to press the sands of yonder mysterious 
shore. For,” he added, noting their looks of aston- 
ishment and joy, ‘ 4 you have stood by me like gal- 
lant defenders, as you are, when nearly all the 
others had deserted me. Yea, I have seen more 
than you perchance may think. Absorbed as I 
have been in my vigils, I could not have but noticed 
your unremitting care, even to the last, and your 
willingness to sacrifice your lives, if need be, in my 
defense.” 

The Admiral was in the great cabin, donning his 
rich doublet of scarlet cloth, and tightening the 
belt of his sword ; but he paused in this occupa- 
tion long enough to place a hand on the head of 
103 


104 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


either boy, as though in benediction, as he said : 

‘ £ Moreover, I am aware of the extremity to which 
you, friend Pablo, went, in my behalf, last night. 
All unseen by you, I peered over the castle rail and 
looked down upon you when you were ready to 
spring out upon that foul assassin. My sword was 
poised, even, for a swift descent, though thou 
knewest it not, my son. Just at that moment, 
glancing up, I saw the gleam of light ashore, and 
called out as I did, in order to divert the fiend 
from his intention. It was the goodness of God, 
my sons, that caused that light to appear when it 
did, — yea, even to appear at all, and a miracle.” 

‘ ‘ And did you see all that ? Did you see the 
man ? ” asked Pablo falteringly, blushing to the 
roots of his hair at the praise of the great Admiral. 

“Yea, did I. And moreover, I think I know 
him, too, so the future shall have something in store 
for at least one man aboard, from which at present 
he may think himself immune. But come, the boat is 
ready. Follow me closely, and take a seat at my 
side, one on either hand. I would have the men 
see that I, this morn, honor you two above all the 
others. It is a small matter, mayhap, but it is my 
wish.” 

The boats from the “ Pinta ” and “ Nina ” were 


THE FIRST EUROPEANS IN THE NEW WORLD. 105 

awaiting the leadership of the Admiral, in the one 
Captain Martin Alonzo Pinzon and in the other his 
brother, Yicente Yanez, commanders, respectively, 
of the vessel and the caravel. As Columbus seated 
himself, with one of the youths on either side, the men 
at the oars gave way and the boats shot forward, 
like arrows from bent bows. In one hand the Ad- 
miral grasped a drawn sword, in the other a banner- 
staff supporting the royal standard, while the two 
Pinzons, each in his own boat, held aloft the banners 
of the Greek Cross, which had at either arm the 
initial letters of the Spanish sovereigns, 44 F” and 
“Y,” Ferdinand and Isabella, the whole surmount- 
ed by crowns embroidered in gold. Seeking an in- 
let through the foam-capped reefs, the Admiral’s 
boat soon reached smooth water and neared the 
shore. 

44 Look, oh, look!” exclaimed Adolfo, as they 
gained the beach. 44 Behold those naked people, 
swarming from the woods. They are not white, 
neither are they black, but red in color, more like 
the Moors of Barbary. Great sir, are they not 
savages ? ’ ’ 

4 4 Mayhap, ’ ’ responded Columbus absently, 4 4 but 
if so they are peaceful ones, for they carry no arms 
save bows and arrows, and these they seem not dis- 


106 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


posed to use against us. Yerily it is a strange sight, 
and one for which I am altogether unprepared. I had 
expected to see the people described by the traveler, 
Marco Polo, and to land on the coast of the great 
Khan’s dominions ; but surely there is nothing here 
to indicate that we have done so. These people 
may be the fierce Tartars run to savagery ; but they 
show no sign of that, save for their being naked. 
Ah, but how sweet the air is, like that of Andalusia 
in May, and how pleasant those green groves that 
line the beach ! Father Almighty, we thank thee 
for this sight before us, for this prosperous ending to 
our voyage ! ” 

Columbus bared his head and looked up at the 
heavens, his companions doing the same, while he 
murmured a prayer of thanksgiving. 

The boat’s keel grated on the sands and was run 
up from the water, the rowers dropping their oars 
and leaping overboard to hold the craft steady while 
Columbus landed, first to press dry soil in the New 
World. The King’s officials were about to press 
forward after him, but he held them back by a wave 
of his hand, saying, “No, gentlemen, these two 
youths first of all, after me to be the next. ’ ’ 

The dignitaries looked astonished, then scowled at 
the boys as they leaped forward and stood by the 



Columbus, elevating the royal banner, waved his sword above his head 
and took possession of the country in the name of Ferdinand and Isabella, 
sovereigns of Spain.— Page 107. A Voyage with Columbus. 




THE FIRST EUROPEANS IN THE NEW WORLD. 107 

Admiral on the sands ; but they obeyed the com- 
mand, though with murmurings at the audacity of 
‘ 4 these upstart foreigners. ’ ’ After all were landed, 
Columbus gathered his retinue around him and ele- 
vating the royal banner waved his sword above his 
head and took possession of the country in the name 
of Ferdinand and Isabella, sovereigns of Spain. The 
royal notary was commanded to note this act of his, 
and to observe that he called this new land, whether 
island or continent, San Salvador. The native name 
of the island (for it has since been ascertained to be 
one of the thousand isles that compose the Bahamas 
chain in the West Indies), was Guanahani, and many 
years later, when the English came here, it received 
the name of Watlings. It lies about midway that 
vast archipelago ; but owing to the fact that Co- 
lumbus made no accurate chart of his first voyage 
(or if he made one did not leave it for posterity), 
there was for many years great doubt as to the 
actual location of San Salvador. 

Such high authority as Washington Irving con- 
cluded it must have been Cat Island in the Baha- 
mas, but that theory has long since been abandoned, 
and the majority of investigators have decided upon 
the island now called Watlings; though there is 
some doubt as to the fact. 


108 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

The writer of these adventures has followed 
closely the voyages of Columbus, having investi- 
gated almost every place he touched at during his 
career, and has specially examined the Bahama is- 
lands with a view to exactly locating the first spot 
at which Columbus landed. It is his belief that it 
was on the eastern shore of the present Watlings 
island, for this answers to the descriptions left by 
Columbus in almost every particular. There is the 
barrier reef of coral lying just off the shore, be- 
yond which the vessels ‘ ‘ lay-to ’ ’ during the night, 
and the island itself, as Columbus says of it, is very 
level, without any high hills or mountains, and with 
a large lake or lagoon in the center. The exuber- 
ant vegetation observed by Columbus, however, has 
long since disappeared, only a few palms remaining 
to remind us of what formerly covered the bare 
coral rock with a leafy canopy. 

The people, also, those red aborigines who flocked 
to the shore at the approach of the boats, and then 
fled in terror to their huts in the forests, were 
exterminated centuries ago. Columbus never re- 
visited the scene of his first landfall and landing in 
the New World, but he always remembered the 
first people he had found there, and who, after hav- 
ing overcome their affright at the approach of the 


THE FIRST EUROPEANS IN THE NEW WORLD. 109 

great- winged ships and the landing of the boats 
filled with men clad in bright-colored garments and 
steel armor, collected about him, impelled by simple 
curiosity. 

Columbus called that first island he landed on San 
Salvador, and the country to which it pertained he 
named the West Indies, because he really thought, 
as all the world now knows, that he had found an- 
other route to the Indies and the country of the 
Great Khan. 

“ I have no doubt,” he said to the officials 
gathered about him as he took possession of the 
country in the name of his king and queen, 4 4 that 
we have discovered the Eastern coast of the great 
East Indies, and hence these people now approach- 
ing us shall be called Indians. ’ ’ And Indians they 
have ever since been called, being the first red men 
and women of their kind ever looked upon by 
Europeans. 

Naked, yet unashamed, never having worn any 
clothing in their lives, the frightened Indians finally 
gathered about the wondering groups of Spaniards 
and timidly examined these strange beings who, as 
they thought, had come down from Heaven by way 
of the sea. They had never seen ships or boats 
managed by sails before, and took them for great 


110 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

birds ; for though they had a kind of boat called 
canoa , — and seen by the Spaniards for the first time 
that twelfth day of October, 1492, they were un- 
acquainted with ships with sails. 

If the Spaniards were surprised to see these peo- 
ple going about stark naked, the Indians also were 
astonished to see the new arrivals clothed in gar- 
ments. After they had prostrated themselves be- 
fore Columbus and his men in token of adoration 
and submission, some of the boldest of them ven- 
tured to touch the clothing worn by the Europeans, 
and, finding it was not part and parcel of their skins, 
they were more surprised than ever. One of the 
Indians, a shapely boy of twelve or thirteen years 
of age, laid a hand softly on Pablo’s shoulder and 
stroked his arm, then pinched it gently as if to see 
if it hurt him. Pablo, in turn, felt the Indian’s 
rounded arm and found it smooth as velvet. 

4 4 Why, ’ ’ he exclaimed, 4 4 his skin is soft as silk, 
yet firm as leather. ’ ’ 

44 That comes from his having a thicker tegument 
than we have,” answered Adolfo, 4 4 and also from 
his being out in the air all the time without any 
clothes on. I have read that the Ethiopians, who, 
you know, are black people living in the interior of 
Africa, have skins of the same texture, though black 


THE FIRST EUROPEANS IN THE NEW WORLD. HI 

as coals. ’ ’ He beckoned to the Indian, and when he 
timidly approached handed him his rapier, which, 
never having seen a weapon or utensil of iron of any 
kind before, the innocent boy took by the blade 
and cut himself slightly, much to the distress of 
the boys, but to the amusement of some of the men, 
who laughed boisterously at the aborigine’s surprise. 

It is a pity that the boys had not kept some sort 
of journal, or account of their adventures, for it 
would be interesting reading at this day ; but so far 
as we are aware they did nothing of the kind. It 
is doubtful if Pablo could either read or write, and 
Adolfo’s accomplishments in that line were not 
great. He could fence with the best of them, 
could ride a horse like a Centaur, swim, dance, sing, 
and play instruments of music like the guitar and 
violin, and speak two languages, Portuguese and 
Spanish; but in other ways his education had been 
neglected. However, the journal which Columbus 
began on the voyage was discovered a few years 
ago, and throws some light upon the incidents of 
this first landing in America. This journal he had 
inscribed to Ferdinand and Isabella, and, alluding to 
the red people he found at San Salvador, he wrote : 
u I swear to your Majesties there are no better peo- 
ple on earth, for they are gentle, and know not 


112 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

what evil is, neither killing nor stealing. I pre- 
sented some of them with red caps, strings of beads 
and other trifles, by which we got a wonderful hold 
on their affections. They -afterwards came to the 
boats of the vessels, swimming, and bringing us 
parrots, cotton thread in balls, and such, which they 
bartered for glass beads and little bells. All of 
them go naked as they came into the world ; their 
forms are graceful, their features good, their hair as 
coarse as that of a horse’s tail. They are dark of 
complexion, like the Canary islanders, and paint 
themselves in various colors. They have no iron, 
their spears consisting of staffs tipped with fishes’ 
teeth, and they have no boats larger than their 
little skiffs, which they call canoas , but which are 
wonderfully built, some large enough to contain 
forty men, and they paddle them about with great 
dexterity, making great speed ; and if a canoa cap- 
sizes they all swim about it and bail it out with 
dishes made from calabashes or small gourds. ’ ’ 

After the visitors and the Indians had become 
well acquainted, Columbus gave his men permission 
to scatter over the sands and stretch their legs, and 
then ensued a period of such relaxation as only those 
who have taken a voyage like theirs’ , lasting longer 
than a month, can appreciate. Wandering along 


THE FIRST EUROPEANS IN THE NEW WORLD. 11£ 


the beach and penetrating the forest in search of 
adventure, the two boys walked arm in arm, visit- 
ing many an Indian hut of palm, and gazing in won- 
der at the strange inhabitants, who welcomed them 
warmly, setting out native or cassava bread and 
bananas for them to eat. They found these red 
people to be as nearly destitute as it was possible 
for them to be and live ; but they all seemed happy, 
always wearing smiles on their faces and taking no 
thought for the future, either near or remote. Be- 
ing so poor and ignorant, they were a great disap- 
pointment to Columbus, whose hopes of finding a 
great and highly civilized nation were dashed by 
the discovery of these savages at the outset. 

8 


CHAPTER XI. 

NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. 

44 Did you find any of the red people having or- 
naments of gold, my sons?” asked Columbus, as 
the boys made their way back to the boats and 
met him coming up the beach. 

4 4 Ho, Senor, ’ ’ answered Pablo. 4 4 1 think they 
must be the poorest people in the world, even poorer 
than the meanest man in Palos, for they live in 
wretched huts made of leaves, and sleep on the 
ground, or in cotton nets which they swing between 
two posts.” 

44 But their household vessels, are they not of 
some kind of metal, or gold, perchance ? 5 ’ urged 
Columbus, a shade of disappointment coming over 
his face. “Methinks I saw some small golden 
ornaments in the noses of a few of the men who 
came to the boats.” 

44 Yes, now I think of it,” answered Adolfo, 

44 in one of the huts was a very fierce-looking man 

114 


NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. 115 

who had great pieces of something bright and shin- 
ing hanging from his nose and ears. But he seemed 
to be a prisoner, being tied to stakes driven into 
the ground, and when we came near he growled 
like a bear or a wolf and we were afraid and ran 
away.” 

“Aha, that was gold those nose and ear orna- 
ments were made of, and it is gold I am seeking, 
my sons, as well as a nearer way to the country 
of Cipango, which the famous Marco Polo says 
lies somewhere hereabouts, unless I much mistake 
his meaning. Lead me to him at once, for I would 
see this man with gold in nose and ears. ’ ’ 

Following the boys up the beach and into the 
forest, Columbus accompanied them to one of the 
huts, a little larger than the rest, and set somewhat 
apart. Like them, it was circular in shape and 
made of poles set into the ground and tied together 
at the top by means of withes, and covered over 
with palm leaves. The only aperture, which served 
as a doorway, was in one side and the gloom within 
was deep. As they approached the hut Adolfo 
drew his rapier and advanced boldly, closely fol- 
lowed by Pablo and the Admiral ; but they quickly 
halted when greeted by a low, rumbling roar, like 
the howl of some wild beast in a rage, or the dis- 


116 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

tant mutterings of thunder. Eight before them, 
in a corner of the hut, they saw the outlines of a 
human form, crouched as if for a spring, and fell 
back a little until their eyesight became accustomed 
to the gloom. The creature continued to roar men- 
acingly and strain upon his fastenings until it 
seemed as if they must break ; but feeling confident 
that with three against one they could hold their 
own, at least, the invaders stood their ground. 

“ What a savage-looking thing,” said Columbus. 
‘ ‘ I never looked upon his like before. He is differ- 
ent from these people we have seen outside, and 
perchance may have been captured in some island to 
the south. But truly, he hath golden ornaments, 
as you have said, and I must ascertain if they be 
true metal or base. Oh that we could speak the 
language of these red men and find out from them 
what all this means! Ah, here comes one of the 
natives of the land, perhaps he can enlighten us.” 

A young Indian peered timorously into the hut, 
and seeing the strangers there made signs for them 
to come out, expressing by his countenance the 
greatest fear imaginable. Taking him by the 
shoulder, the Admiral pointed to his own ears and 
nose, indicating as well as possible that he wished 
to know the meaning of the ornaments, so called, 


NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. H? 

pendant from the captive’s ears and nose. It was a 
long time before the astonished Indian could under- 
stand him, and the two had to go into the hut and 
close up to the prisoner before he made out the 
Admiral’s meaning. It was with great fear, and 
trembling in every limb, that the young man ap- 
proached the captive, and when he did so seemed 
ready to fly at his slightest movement. 

Finally, his dull comprehension seemed to grasp 
the meaning of the Admiral’s questioning, and he 
pointed to the south, at the same time talking volu- 
bly in his native language. To make sure, Colum- 
bus approached a little nearer to the prisoner, in 
order to place his hand upon the coveted ornaments, 
and seeing this the young man ran out of the hut 
with a cry of terror, looking back to see if the cap- 
tive had broken loose. All this time the thing on 
the ground continued its growlings and mutterings, 
digging into the soil with long, claw -like fingers and 
stretching out its hands as if desirous of getting a 
grip on the Admiral’s throat. But the thongs held 
securely, though every moment they seemed on the 
point of bursting ; and finding that he was not pur- 
sued the young Indian came back. He took Colum- 
bus by the arm and tried to lead him from the hut, 
and finding it was no use to reason with him further 


118 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


while he was in such terror, they all retreated out- 
side and sat down beneath a palm tree growing 
near the doorway. Then the trembling Indian with 
expressive gestures informed the strangers that the 
creature inside was a prisoner of war, who had come 
from a place far distant for the purpose of murder- 
ing the natives of San Salvador. From what they 
could gather of his meaning, they learned that the 
prisoner was a man-eater, for the Indian took hold 
of the Admiral’s arm and pretended to bite a piece 
out of it, and also went through the same perform- 
ance with one of his legs. At the same time he 
uttered the word, “ Caraib, Caraib,” and shuddered, 
rolling his eyes and making it very plain that the 
Caraib, whatever it was, must be a very bad speci- 
men indeed. 

But where did he come from ? That was what 
concerned Columbus more than the prisoner’s char- 
acter, and where did he get the gold ? The Indian 
was slow at understanding the meaning of this in- 
quiry, but at last a light dawned in his face, and he 
made a gesture for his new friends to remain where 
they were and ran swiftly to another hut, probably 
his own, entering which he remained . a moment, 
then came out with something bright and shining 
in his hand. He held it aloft, as if to ask if that 


NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. 119 

was what Columbus wanted, and the Admiral nod- 
ded his head with satisfaction, as, taking the thing 
in his hand he found it was really gold, yellow, 
glistening gold. Spreading out his hands, Colum- 
bus asked in the sign language, “ Here ? ” meaning 
was it found in that country, and the Indian an- 
swered quickly “No,” by shaking his head, and, 
pointing to the south, described seven half circles 
with his arms, beginning at the east and dropping 
toward the west. That meant, as was soon proved 
by having him repeat the performance, that the 
gold was found in a country seven days’ journey to 
the south. The Indian was now quick to appre- 
hend the meaning of the stranger’s questions, and 
signalling for the three to follow him he ran to the 
shore where a canoe was moored, got into it and, 
taking up the paddle, described the same half cir- 
cles again, from east to west, indicating very plainly 
that he meant by each of those semicircles a jour- 
ney in his canoe from the rising to the setting of 
the sun. That was quite satisfactory, and paved 
the way for getting together a vocabulary of the 
Indian language, for, pointing to the canoe, Colum- 
bus made the young native understand that he de- 
sired to know what it was called. “ Canoa ,” an- 
swered the Indian with a smile, and pointing to 


120 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

his hut he said : 4 4 Bohio ; 5 ’ and thus the beginning 
was made for an aboriginal vocabulary. The third 
word was that which signified gold, and this was 
44 turey ,” which Columbus repeated over and over 
again, rolling the word like a sweet morsel under 
his tongue. 

4 4 1 am too old to begin the acquisition of another 
language, my sons,” he said to the boys, “so I 
shall depend upon you to do it for me. If we can 
keep this young Indian with us, and keep at him 
persistently, I am sure we shall gather words enough 
to serve us. So what do you say, my children, to 
setting yourselves to the work ? I have authority 
to pay out certain sums of money for interpreters, 
and if you will serve in that capacity you shall re- 
ceive the royal stipend. What say you ? ’ ’ 

4 4 1 would gladly learn the Indian language for 
the mere pleasure of it,” quickly answered Adolfo, 
44 and to receive compensation is to be doubly paid, 
not to speak of the delight of serving you and our 
royal masters. ’ ’ But Pablo shook his head doubt- 
fully. 44 1 am afraid I cannot learn much, any- 
way, for I never could,” he replied sadly, 4 4 master 
my own language, never having been much at 
school. ’ ’ 

44 Well, no matter,” answered Columbus kindly. 


NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. 121 

“ The more one learns the more easily the rest is 
acquired. I know that Don Adolfo cannot get 
along without you, so you shall be his assistant. ” 

Pablo flushed with pleasure and drew himself up 
with a new dignity born of the confidence the Ad- 
miral had placed in him, while Adolfo said that he 
was sure his friend would be of great assistance and 
it was true ; as Columbus had said, he could not do 
without him. 

It was more difficult to secure the assistance of 
the third party to this contract for the acquisition 
of a new language, — that is, of the young Indian, — 
because as yet they had so few words in common. 
But by dint of great persistence Adolfo made him 
understand what was wanted, and he fairly leaped 
for joy when it finally dawned upon him that he 
was needed for the voyage. He made known to 
his friends that he had no ties from which he could 
not quickly separate himself, and later, when the 
trio got to understand each other better, he told 
them that his father, mother and nearly all his rela- 
tives had been carried off by a pestilence. But a 
shade of sadness came over his face when he became 
convinced that he would have to leave the island 
and sail off in the great “ canoa with wings,” for he 
seemed to recollect that there was at least one tie 


122 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


he had overlooked. Dropping his arms at his side 
with a gesture of despair, he looked earnestly at his 
new friends a moment, then, signing them to await 
his return, ran swiftly to a little hut that stood near 
the beach within a thicket of palmettos. A few 
minutes later he came walking down the strand 
leading by the hand a little girl of perhaps six or 
seven years, a graceful brown-skinned creature with 
long black hair and big black eyes. She was greatly 
afraid of the strangers and hung behind her brother — 
for so it seemed he was ; — but uttered no cry, though 
quite evidently terror-stricken. Pointing to the 
little maiden, then at the hut and the vessels, at the 
same time shaking his head, the Indian boy made 
it very evident that he could not go away and leave 
this pretty creature behind. She was all he had in 
the world, he explained in his sign language, and 
was wholly dependent upon him, so he could not 
leave her alone. Columbus hesitated a little, then 
ordered Pablo to go to the boat and fetch some 
glass beads and hawksbells ( cascdbelas ) which he 
would find there. Pablo did as requested and when 
the Admiral held up these bright and glistening 
baubles the little maiden’s curiosity quite overcame 
her terror and she held out her hands. Giving the 
string of beads to Pablo, Columbus commanded him 


NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. 123 

to place them about her neck, at which the girl was 
almost stupefied with happiness. Never before had 
she owned an ornament of any sort, nor even an ar- 
ticle of dress, save a simple girdle of woven leaves, 
worn about her slender waist ; nor were her larger 
sisters more favored than she. 

The wondering Indians gathered around and were 
about beginning to barter what they owned for the 
Spanish baubles, when there was a sudden outcry in 
the direction of the huts that caused most of them to 
disperse and go in search of the noise. They had 
not long to wait, however, for soon there appeared 
a grim apparition in the person of the Caraib hither- 
to held prisoner in the hut, who had finally burst 
his bonds and was now at large. When the natives 
of the island saw this they uttered loud cries of fear 
and fled in every direction, for they were peace-lov- 
ing and timid people who never went to war unless 
forced to do so and rarely lifted their hands against 
any others of their race. 

The ragingbeast of a Caraib dashed into the midst 
of the throng on the beach, biting and snarling, 
and grasping viciously at every man, woman and 
child he came near, throwing some to the ground 
and making as though he would tear them limb 
from limb. He seemed not to see the white people 


124 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


gathered nearest to the water, but made his way 
thither as though desirous of securing one of the 
canoes and in it make his escape from the island. 
But he soon had some braver people than the mild 
Indians of Guanahani to withstand, for as he 
hewed his way through the throng he finally came 
to the group of Spaniards, standing there, amazed, 
with Columbus in their midst. The Europeans had 
no thought of running away, and if they had they 
lacked the time to do so, for the Caraib lost no time 
in making for the water’s edge, except as he stopped 
to bite and rend his captives, now and then. He 
appeared like a great gorilla ; though of course the 
gorilla was at that time unknown to white men ; and 
his strength was prodigious. Marching on toward 
the water, he carried along with him a girl and a 
boy, one in either hand, probably for the purpose 
of feasting on their flesh after he had embarked in 
the canoe ; and his attention was so taken with his 
captives that he did not see the Europeans until close 
upon them. Then he found his way barred by 
Adolfo, who with his sword, standing there before 
the Caraib giant, might have reminded one of the 
Biblical story of young David and Goliath. And 
he was no more afraid than was David when he 
stood before the Philistine with his sling charged 


NEW SCENES AND AN ADVENTURE ASHORE. 125 

with its smooth round stone; though in truth he 
had little time to consider whether to be afraid or 
not. The Caraib howled with rage when he saw 
his path thus crossed, and dropping his captives he 
darted upon Adolfo without delay. The latter 
made a thrust at the Indian, but this time his skill 
was parried by brute force and the blade was turned 
downward by the onset of the Caraib, who seemed to 
care no more for sword-thrusts than for pin pricks. 
It might have gone hard with Adolfo if some of the 
Spaniards had not rushed to his rescue, for the 
Caraib not only bore down his sword, but fell 
full upon him, carrying him to the sands. As 
quick as this was done, however, the Spaniards 
were as nimble as the Indian, and throwing them- 
selves upon him, pinned him down, while some of 
the sailors brought ropes and tied his hands and feet. 

Adolfo extricated himself from beneath his burly 
adversary and was standing by, coolly bending his 
sword to try its temper, when Columbus came up 
and commended him for his bravery. 

6 4 Sooth, it was nothing, ’ ’ said Adolfo. 4 4 Indeed, 
I am ashamed that I missed the brute when he 
made for me. It is the first time, I believe, that 
my good blade ever played me false. ’ ’ 

“ Well,” rejoined the Admiral, 44 1 am glad the 


126 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


poor fellow was not wounded, for it would have 
been an inauspicious omen for the future voyage. 
But what shall we do with him, now ? Faith, I 
am perplexed. I think, however, that the best 
thing is to leave him here where we found him, but 
bound with iron chains instead of the slender withes 
the Indians used. ’ ’ 

So the Caraib was taken back to the hut from 
which he escaped, howling and yelling like mad, 
and after strong stakes were driven into the soil, he 
was chained to them in such a manner that he could 
not by any means get loose. 

The natives of the island viewed this affair with 
great alarm, and seemed rather inclined to beg Co- 
lumbus to take the Caraib away with him than to 
have him again in their midst. But when they saw 
the iron-linked chains around his wrists and ankles, 
they were reassured, and recovering their equanim- 
ity they resumed their bartering for trinkets. They 
all hastened to their huts, soon reappearing with 
great balls of cotton thread, tame parrots and cakes 
of cassava bread, which they held up to view, chat- 
tering excitedly amongst themselves ; and to humor 
them Columbus gave each one a few beads and 
hawksbells, giving double portions to such as were 
willing to part with their nose ornaments of gold. 


CHAPTEK Xn. 


SAILING IN SEARCH OF CIPANGO. 

Sunday, October 14, 1492, Columbus wrote in his 
Journal : 

“ At dawn I ordered the boats of the ship and 
of the caravels to be got ready, and went along the 
island ; for I was afraid of a reef of rocks that sur- 
rounds it, although within it there is depth and 
ample harbor for all the vessels of Christendom ; but 
the entrance is very narrow. . . .After observing 
that harbor, I afterwards returned to the ship and 
set sail, and saw so many islands that I could not 
decide which one to visit first. 5 ’ 

There were islands enough, but all very much of 
the same character, low-lying and almost barren, in- 
habited by the same kind of people Columbus had 
found at San Salvador. The Admiral believed these 
islands to constitute a fringe along the coast of the 
continent, merely, and that beyond them lay the 
wonderful Cipango, described by Marco Polo the 


128 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

Venetian traveler as being situated in the China Sea 
opposite Cathay. He still believed he had reached the 
eastern coast of Asia, or was drawing near it, so it was 
with high hopes that he set sail from San Salvador 
in search of Cipango. All the natives had told him, 
as well as they were able, that the country of gold 
lay to the south ; so southward he sailed, calling at 
various islands in the Bahamas on the way, but not 
tarrying long, as he was impatient to discover 
Cipango the golden. 

Barren as they were of vegetation and opulent 
cities, the islands were extremely inviting, and in 
his Journal Columbus writes of one at which he an- 
chored on the second night out from San Salvador : 

‘ ‘ I tarried here because I saw this cape so green 
and beautiful, as are all the things and lands of 
these islands, so that I do not know which to visit first, 
nor do my eyes grow tired of looking at such beauti- 
ful verdure, so different from our own. Here are 
some large lagoons, and around them are trees so 
large that it is a marvel, while the grass is as green 
as in Andalusia in April. And the songs of the 
little birds are such that it seems as if a man could 
never leave here, while the odors came so good and 
sweet from flowers and trees that it was the sweet- 
est thing in the world.” 


SAILING IN SEARCH OF CIPANGO. 129 

This island he called Isabella, and going ashore 
in the morning to fill their water casks at a spring 
which gushed out from the roots of a gigantic 
banyan tree, the sailors saw a strange animal like 
a young alligator, nestling in the branches of a 
mangrove near the beach. They recoiled in alarm, 
but the young Indian, who, with Pablo and Adolfo, 
had accompanied them, signaled for silence and, 
armed only with his rude bow and arrows, advanced 
upon the creature boldly. It was an iguana, an 
animal entirely harmless unless attacked ; but the 
Spaniards had never seen one before and were afraid 
of it. The Indian youth advanced cautiously, holding 
his bow ready bent and an arrow at the string, and 
when he got within a few rods of the iguana he be- 
gan to whistle softly. The iguana, which at first 
had raised its crested head menacingly, stretched 
itself out along the branch, like a cat before a fire, 
and seemingly went to sleep. Then the Indian, 
having soothed it by sweet sounds, crept up silent- 
ly and seized it by the throat. Quick as a flash 
the iguana recovered its senses and lashed out fierce- 
ly with its long, whip-like tail ; but it was unable 
to make its captor loose his grasp, and soon quieted 
down. Taking it to the group of wondering sailors 
at the spring, the boy asked one of them for a 


130 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


knife, with which, when it was handed him, he cut 
the creature’s throat. It looked so much like a 
serpent, as it lay writhing on the ground, that even 
then the sailors could hardly be prevailed upon to 
touch it ; but the boy assured them by signs that it 
was very good to eat, and when its struggles had 
ceased he quickly skinned it, preserving the tail, 
which was about three feet long, to present to the 
Admiral as a dainty tidbit for his dinner. Having 
filled their water casks, the sailors returned aboard 
the vessels, and at midnight, says Columbus in his 
diary, ‘ 4 1 weighed anchor from this island of Isa- 
bella, in order to go to ‘ Cuba ’ which these people 
tell me is very large, with much trade, and yielding 
gold and spices. By their signs I understand it to 
be the island of Cipango, of which marvelous things 
are related, and which, on the globes and maps I 
have seen, is in this region. And they tell me I 
should sail, to reach it, west-southwest, as I now 
am sailing.” 

So the days passed by, the fleet sailing from one 
island to another, until, the last week of October, 
the coast of Cuba appeared in sight, a little more 
than two weeks after the first discovery of land in 
the Bahamas. During this portion of the voyage 
Pablo, Adolfo and the young Indians, were nearly 


SAILING IN SEARCH OF CIPANGO. 131 

always together, and by the time Cuba was sighted 
they had acquired a great deal of each other’s lan- 
guage; so that they could converse quite freely. 
The child especially had been quick to learn, being 
at the age when words are most readily acquired, 
and could lisp in Spanish prettily. She and her 
brother had been furnished with clothing by the 
Admiral’s commands, and though at first they were 
plainly uncomfortable in their unwonted costumes, 
they bore it all with patience for the sake of pleas- 
ing their new friends. They were cleanly in their 
habits, bathing frequently, or whenever opportu- 
nity offered, and soon learned the habits of civilized 
people, at least so far as practised by the Spanish 
sailors. Having overcome their shyness, both boy 
and girl were great favorites on board the 4 4 Santa 
Maria,” where they were assigned quarters in a 
corner of the castle cabin. The child was particu- 
larly devoted to Pablo, whom she followed like a 
dog, hardly allowing him out of her sight while day- 
light lasted. Her affection was reciprocated, so far 
as bashful Pablo dared show preference ; while her 
brother, who was nearer Adolfo’s age, chose the 
latter for his companion. So they got on very 
well together, and a friendly rivalry existing as to 
which one should acquire the most new words in a 


132 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


given time, it was not long before they were de- 
pended upon almost solely by the Admiral as inter- 
preters. 

Being of an acquisitive disposition, Pablo and 
Adolfo enjoyed keenly the opportunity the voyage 
afforded for making acquaintance with so many 
things hitherto unknown to white men. They may 
not have appreciated the opportunity to the full, 
but within their awakening intelligences they felt 
the supreme privilege that was theirs to be some- 
thing beyond price. For example, they were the 
first boys in the world to take the great voyage 
across the Atlantic; they were with Columbus 
when he first noted the variation of the compass ; 
were among the first to view the wonderful Sar- 
gasso Sea ; first after the Admiral to land on the 
newly discovered shore, and the first, also, to get 
acquainted with the Indians. They now promised 
to be the first who should acquire the aboriginal 
language, and went to work at it with a determin- 
ation that was in itself a presage of success. 
Among the new things they had observed, aside 
from the land and the Indians, were the wild par- 
rots, which flew overhead in great flocks, from 
island to island ; the huts of the natives, so primi- 
tive in construction, as well as their domestic uten- 


SAILING IN SEARCH OF CIPANGO. 


133 


sils made of shells and calabashes, the rude weapons 
of wood tipped with bones and fishes’ teeth, the 
spear and arrow heads of flint and stone. They 
wondered at the canoes and hammocks (called 
hamacas) used by the natives, and after they found 
how comfortable the latter were to sleep in they got 
the Indian boy to make them duplicates of his own 
hammock, woven out of cotton twine. The most 
wonderful thing that came under their notice, how- 
ever, was seen one day when they were crossing 
the broad channel between Isabella island and 
Cuba. In mid-channel a small canoe hove in sight, 
containing a single Indian, an old man, who seemed 
to be afire, as his head was surrounded by a wreath 
of smoke. 

“ Oh, look ! look ! ” exclaimed Pablo, who was 
gazing in his direction. “ See the smoke coming 
out of that Indian’s mouth. He is on fire ! 
Hasten and let us throw some water over him ! ” 

His exclamations caught the attention of his 
young Indian friend, who was standing near, and 
seeing what it was that had excited Pablo he looked 
anxiously at the man in the canoe and then burst 
into a laugh. “Ho, no,” he said. “Ho fuego 
(fire) ; tcibaco ! ” He then reached into a little 
wallet of iguana skin which he wore around his neck 


134 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


and drew forth some dried leaves which he deftly 
made into a roll, and striking a flame from two 
dried sticks which he rubbed rapidly together, he 
lighted this primitive cigar, and for the first time 
in their lives the Spaniards saw the operation of 
smoking illustrated by an object lesson. The 
youth puffed his roll with seeming satisfaction for 
a moment or so, then handed it to Adolfo and 
Pablo for trial ; but both refused it, recoiling from 
it with some alarm. The little girl was next of- 
fered the cigar, of which she took a few whiffs, 
as a matter of course, greatly to the delight of 
Columbus and the officers of the ‘ ‘ Santa Maria, ’ 5 
now gathered around to observe the strange pro- 
ceeding. The Spaniards may have had bad habits 
enough already ; but from that day dates one per- 
nicious habit which has continued to the present, 
for, attracted by the novelty of the thing and the 
seeming enjoyment the Indians took in smoking 
tobacco, they were not long in adopting it as their 
own. It is a fact that the island near, and on which 
the Indians were first seen smoking tobacco, is still 
the most famous producer of the ‘ 4 weed , 5 ’ for Cuba 
has furnished it to the world almost ever since it 
was discovered. 


CHAPTER XIII. 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. 

On the third day after leaving Isabella the out- 
lines of a large and mountainous island rose upon 
the horizon, reminding Columbus in its general ap- 
pearance of Sicily in the Mediterranean, which he 
had visited. Such a long stretch of coast was de- 
veloped as the fleet approached it, on the morning 
of the twenty-eighth of October, and such were the 
vast contours of the inland mountains, that the Ad- 
miral mistook it for a continent ; and that belief, 
in fact, he held till his death, never having circum- 
navigated Cuba. 

The mouth of a beautiful river appearing beyond 
an inlet in one of the coral reefs, the ‘ ‘ Santa Maria 5 ’ 
was headed into it, followed by the caravels, and 
an anchorage made in water of crystal clearness be- 
neath the shade of enormous trees. The air was pure 
and soft, the sun shone brilliantly and all nature 

was dressed in green, so that the feelings of the 
135 


136 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

sailors were wrought to a pitch of gladness. In 
common with the rest of the company, the three 
boys were on the qui vive for new things to be ob- 
served, and engaged in friendly rivalry as to who 
should find the first and strangest sight. Adolfo 
cried out, suddenly, as they came to anchor in the 
stream : 4 4 Oh, your excellency (addressing Colum- 
bus, who stood near) there are battalions of soldiers 
dressed in scarlet uniform. See, inland on the edge 
of that great savanna. They are standing still, not 
one of them has moved since I observed them. I 
wonder if they are watching us and if they will 
attack the boats ? ’ 5 

The Admiral looked in the direction indicated 
and then said : 4 4 It is just as I thought. This is 
the country of the Grand Khan, and those must be 
his soldiers, drawn up in dress parade. God be 
thanked for bringing us, at last, to a land of civili- 
zation and culture, where we shall find a refined 
people, and perhaps gold in great abundance. ’ ’ 

But his enthusiasm was short-lived, for when the 
young Indian’s attention had been drawn to the 
supposed soldiers he made it quite clear to his dis- 
appointed friends that they were nothing of the sort. 
Placing his hands on his breast, and then on the 
shoulders of each one of the company about him in 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. 137 

succession, he shook his head negatively, as if to 
say: “No people, no.” Then he asked the Ad- 
miral to allow one of the sailors to fire off an arque- 
buse, — or he indicated as much by signs, and to 
please him Columbus did so. At the report of the 
arquebuse, which reverberated through the surround- 
ing forest with a thunderous sound, the “soldiers” 
sprang into the air, at least a hundred strong, and 
flew heavily away, toward the reef -lined shore 
south of the river. The things in ‘ ‘ scarlet uni- 
form ” were, in fact, nothing but flamingoes, great 
birds which still have their haunts along the coast 
of Cuba and breed in the Bahamas. The face of 
the Admiral, as the brilliant host sped athwart the 
horizon, making a gorgeous streak across the sky, 
was a study, for it expressed both astonishment and 
disappointment mingled, but with the latter predom- 
inating. For another of his theories had been 
shown, temporarily at least, to be a fallacy. There 
were no more signs of civilization here, in fact, 
than in the islands he had so recently left be- 
hind. 

But at the report of the arquebuse several canoes 
darted out from the umbrageous border of the stream 
above the fleet, filled with Indians who had evi- 
dently been watching the strangers from their re- 


138 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

treat. One of the small boats was already afloat, 
and sending it after the fleeing canoes one of them 
was overhauled and towed back to the “ Santa 
Maria, ’ ’ where its occupants were quickly taken 
aboard the vessel, half dead with affright. 

“ Get our friend, the young Indian, to ask them 
where lives the Grand Khan,” said Columbus to 
Adolfo, “and also learn, if possible, in which direc- 
tion lies Cipango, land of gold and precious spices . 5 ’ 
The Cubans were plied with questions, both by 
the Indian from San Salvador and Adolfo, as- 
sisted by Pablo, and the gist of their replies was 
that the Grand Khan lived to the south, pointing 
ashore and toward the mountains, where also was a 
land abounding in gold. Having ascertained what 
he wanted to learn, Columbus ordered the Indians 
dismissed with presents, retaining one of them to 
act as guide to the dominions of the Grand Khan, 
which he understood to be quite near and easily 
reached by an inland expedition. Ho time was lost 
in equipping this expedition, and the boys desiring 
to accompany it, Columbus allowed them all to go, 
not only on account of their desire, but because they 
were more proficient in the Indian language than 
any others aboard the fleet. 

When it was explained to the captured Indian 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. I39 

that he would be required to lead the party to the 
country or capital of the Grand Khan, he shook his 
head dubiously, but when “ turey ” was mentioned — 
that being the native name for gold, — he brightened 
up and looked more hopeful. His fear of the 
strangers was allayed by conversation with the Ba- 
hama Indian, who told him of the kindness and 
pacific purposes of the Admiral, and also of the 
great power of the fleet, with its boats with wings 
that could go anywhere upon the water, and the 
guns that sent out messages of death with voices of 
thunder. The Cuban looked his admiration and 
respect, and approaching Columbus knelt at his feet, 
kissing the hem of his cloak, then taking one of his 
feet in his hands placed it on his head, in token of 
submission. 

The exploring party, the first that ever pene- 
trated the forests of the Hew World, was ready to 
start that afternoon, but as the captive Cuban made 
it appear that the best point of departure would be 
from a river farther down the coast, the departure 
was delayed until that river should be reached. 
Sailing out of the first harbor they had made on 
the north coast of Cuba, the Spaniards coasted the 
shore until a deep and magnificent bay was reached, 
large enough to float a modern navy and bordered 


140 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


with beautiful palms. Into the center of this bay 
flowed a large river, from the mouth of which the 
expedition set out, after being rowed up stream as 
far as the small boats could proceed. While the 
party was absent, Columbus had the vessels careened 
on the beach so that their sides and bottoms could 
be scraped and such repairs made as they needed. 

The little party consisted of the three boys, the 
native of Cuba who had been retained for the pur- 
pose, and two Spaniards, one of whom was a con- 
verted Jew who could speak Hebrew, Chaldaic and 
Arabic, one of which languages the Grand Khan 
would surely understand. 

This place of departure of the first expedition in 
America was the beautiful bay of ISTipe, which may 
be found on any map of Cuba and which yet exists 
almost in the primeval state as discovered by Col- 
umbus, in 1492. The party set out on the morning 
of the first day of November, and all its members 
were in a state of joyful expectation. Besides 
provisions for several days, they carried rich pres- 
ents and a letter from the sovereigns of Spain, 
which were to pave the way for a treaty of com- 
merce and amity between them and the Oriental 
monarch they expected to discover in the interior of 
Cuba. Before leaving, Columbus had taken Adolfo 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. 141 

aside and explained to him the object and great im- 
portance of the mission, and added that he made 
him commander of the expedition as a mark of his 
confidence and an assurance of esteem in which he 
held his father, the king of Portugal. All this was 
said aside, for fear that some one of the company 
might overhear it, as no one aboard except the Ad- 
miral, and possibly Pablo, knew of Adolfo’s iden- 
tity as a prince of the royal family of Portugal. 
Pablo had only surmised it, but as his friend had 
always discouraged any approach to the subject, 
when he had tried to allay his curiosity, he was by 
no means certain. The two were friends, and the 
best of friends, Adolfo would say on such occasions, 
but he would prefer that the question of his rank 
and birth should for the present remain a mystery. 
Pablo had always assented to this, of course, but 
he had determined that if the opportunity ever 
offered, he would solve the mystery, if only for 
his own satisfaction. 

Clad in his crimson doublet, a hat with a plume 
on his head, and his rapier at his side, Adolfo made 
a gallant-looking leader of the little party that left 
the boat, that morning of the first of November, 
1492, and entered the great and mysterious forest 
on the river bank, A certain sadness tinged the 


142 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

feelings of all when it came to say farewell, and it 
was in silence and under a cloud of oppression, con- 
trasting with their feelings, as they had left the 
fleet. This, however, soon wore off as the beauties 
of the great forest opened to their senses, and be- 
fore noon arrived they had recovered their spirits. 
Immense trees rose above them, tangled vines and 
lianas stretched across their path, while overhead 
sang many birds new to the Europeans and clad in 
brilliant plumage. Odors of strange plants filled 
the air, the heat was tempered by the deep shade, 
and, while the trail was merely a narrow trace 
through the forest, it was passable and plain. 

They camped, that night, in the forest, by the 
side of a small stream, and their Cuban guide, as- 
sisted by the Bahama Indian, made a little hut of 
palm leaves which they called an ajoujpa , this 
being the Caraib word for such a kind of shelter. 
As they were all very tired, Adolfo and his friends 
sought the hammocks the Indians had stretched be- 
tween two trees and stakes, almost as soon as they 
had eaten their supper. The night was cool and 
the darkness relieved only by the brilliant light of 
the Guouyos , or fire-beetles, which gave out 
gleams of phosphorescent fire. Having caught a 
glimpse of the fire-beetles, Pablo’s curiosity was 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. 143 

excited so that he could not sleep, and after all the 
others were deep in slumber he left his hammock 
and went outside the hut to catch some of the 
gleaming insect-lamps. In order not to make a 
noise he crept carefully to the glen beneath a great 
tree on the bank of a stream, where he had noticed 
numbers of the cucuyos playing, and soon was busy 
making captures. 

He had no thought of danger, for the Indians had 
told him, as well as they were able, that the forest 
contained no creatures harmful to man. But they 
had forgotten to mention one of the greatest dan- 
gers to travelers in the forest, because, probably, 
they had no idea that it would be encountered. As 
Pablo was absorbed in his pastime, chasing the fire- 
beetles through the ferns and grasses, unmindful of 
the darkness, or the tangled vegetation that every 
now and then tripped him up, he suddenly encoun- 
tered the one thing that he should have been warned 
against. He was darting through a thicket near 
the trunk of a great, liana-hung tree, when he felt 
something catch across his throat. It was cold and 
slimy, and caused a singularly creeping feeling in 
the parts with which it came in contact. But 
Pablo, all unconscious of the forest terror, and 
thinking the thing was merely a liana, or long bush- 


144 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

rope, that had become entangled in his path, put 
up his hand to draw it to one side. Then he sud- 
denly became aware that the thing was living, for 
the coil about his throat quickly contracted until he 
was nearly choked. He had just time and strength 
enough to cry out in terror as loud as his voice 
could carry, when the cold, creeping coil con- 
stricted his throat so forcibly that he could hardly 
draw his breath. Then he felt other coils about 
his body, his legs and arms, and knew that he had 
fallen into the grasp of some forest monster of 
which he had never heard. In the darkness, illu- 
mined as it was only by the fitful gleams of the fire- 
beetles, poor Pablo was completely at the mercy of 
this monster, for his strength was failing, his breath 
coming and going in gasps, his whole frame felt 
benumbed, and he knew his end was near. An d 
all this time, as the cruel coils slowly but surely 
tightened about the hapless boy, no sound was 
uttered by the monster that was exerting this force 
to strangle out the life of its helpless victim. 
Pablo felt that his time had come, and breathing a 
prayer to his Maker he -sank into insensibility. 

Theory uttered by the boy had reached the hut, 
outside which lay the Indians who were sleeping 
with the proverbial alertness of their race. The 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. 145 

Indian boy from the Bahamas, was on his feet as 
soon as he heard the cry, and listening intently for 
its repetition. Hearing no other noise, he caught a 
few cucuyos and threw them into the hut, where 
they gave out light enough for him to see that one 
of the boys was absent. Catching a few more of 
the fire-beetles, he used them as torches to illumine 
the ground and thus was able to scan the trail taken 
by Pablo in his wanderings. He followed this trail 
through the thickets until he came to the glen where 
Pablo had caught his first cucuyos , and then 
traced him further by the trail of crushed twigs and 
ferns he had left behind. Suddenly he caught sight 
of the boy, suspended from a branch of a big tree 
by what appeared to be a liana loop more than 
three inches in thickness. But the Indian knew at 
sight that was no liana-loop, but the body of a 
gigantic boa constrictor , and at once darted back to 
the hut for help. Arrived there, he awoke Adolfo, 
who seized his sword and followed the Indian boy 
without a word, when he learned that Pablo was 
absent and in danger. 

The Bahama boy led the way and they soon came 
to the spot where hung poor Pablo, motionless and 
apparently lifeless, in the dreadful loop of the boa 
constrictor. The Indian had found and taken a cut- 


146 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

lass belonging to one of the party, and motioning 
Adolfo to watch for the great boa’s head and if 
possible sever it by a cut across the neck, he him- 
self crept up cautiously and feeling for the loop in 
the darkness, sank the cutlass-blade deep in the 
quivering flesh of the serpent. This of course 
caused it to relax its hold on Pablo, who after being 
involved in the serpent’s terrible writhings, slipped 
from its grasp and fell to the ground. As he 
did so the boa darted out its head and fixing 
its sparkling eyes upon Adolfo made a thrust at 
him with mouth wide open and white fangs gleam- 
ing. It was a conspicuous mark in the darkness, 
with the diamond-glittering eyes and ivory-white 
fangs, so Adolfo cut- across the neck with his sword 
and severed it completely. That finished his snake- 
ship, so Adolfo thought, and he then turned his at- 
tention to Pablo, who lay where he fell, and from 
whom the breath of life seemed to have fled 
entirely. 

Aided by the Indian, Adolfo lifted his friend, and 
together they carried him to the hut, where water 
was dashed into his face and his arms moved up and 
down to induce breathing, if possible. It was a 
long time, Adolfo thought in his anxiety, before 
Pablo finally drew a fluttering breath, then followed 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. 147 

it by another stronger ; but at last he seemed alto- 
gether recovered, and though faint and bruised 
found himself little the worse for his encounter, ex- 
cept for the horror of it. The two boys embraced 
each other without a word, and though they said 
nothing, in their hearts they were thankful that the 
misadventure had had no worse ending. Both the 
Indians signified by signs that Pablo had experi- 
enced something from which few people ever es- 
caped, for the great boa constrictor of the Cuban 
forests was the one thing they feared above all 
others. 

In the morning, early, after sitting up the re- 
mainder of the night, unable to sleep as they were 
from the excitement, the boys went out to view the 
serpent that had caused so much trouble, and found 
the monster still with life in its body, though un- 
able to move. It was soon despatched for good, 
and found to measure fourteen feet in length. The 
Indians skinned it for Pablo, who desired to pre- 
serve some memento of his wonderful escape, and 
this trophy was taken back to the vessels on the 
homeward journey. 

On the second day the party marched from morn- 
ing until the sun had passed the meridian, all the 
way through the dense forest, and an hour or so 


m 


A VOYAGE WITH COLtfMBtfS. 


after noon reached the borders of a clearing in 
which stood about a hundred huts of the kind seen 
by the Spaniards in the Bahamas. At sight of 
them the Cuban Indian leaped into the air and said ; 
“ Cacique, cacique, ’ ? — which the Bahaman inter- 
preted as meaning “ chief” or king, and told the 
boys that was the settlement they were seeking. 
They must have looked extremely disappointed, for 
he added there was no larger village in the land, 
as this cacique was the most powerful monarch ever 
known. But the “ great cacique” was naked, like 
all the rest of the Indians encountered, and his 
‘ ‘ palace ’ ’ was merely a hut a little larger than the 
others; though the chief was very courtly and 
ceremonious, giving his guests stools to sit on, while 
he and his men squatted around upon their haunches 
on the ground. The linguist of the party tried 
him in four languages, Spanish, Hebrew, Chaldaic, 
and Arabic, but not one of them did the cacique 
understand, so they had to fall back upon the young 
Lucayan from the Bahamas, who expatiated in 
flowery speech upon the great fleet awaiting them 
at the coast and the importance of the embassy sent 
over to America by the sovereigns of a far country. 
At least, that is what it is thought he said ; but the 
truth will probably never be known, for the only 


CUBA AND THE GRAND KHAN OF CATHAY. I49 

people who understood the Lucayan were the Cuban 
Indians. They were greatly impressed, however, 
with the speech, and promised to pay tribute to the 
distant king if there was anything there that he 
desired; but sad to relate, the resources of the 
country were very limited, consisting of a few veg- 
etables, among which was the potato, then seen by 
Europeans for the first time, and the fruits of the 
tropics. These fruits the chief set out before his 
guests, giving them also delicious water to drink 
from the cocoanut, and then sent for dried leaves 
of the tobacco, which his servants rolled into cig- 
arettes enclosed in corn husks and passed around, 
accompanied by firebrands to light them with. 

Noting that the natives seemed to derive great 
comfort from inhaling the smoke of the tabaco , 
Adolfo thought he too would try a whiff of the 
‘ ‘ weed ’ ’ and signed for an attendant to bring him 
one of the little rolls, which he lighted and smoked 
up to the end, Pablo looking on, meanwhile, with 
admiration in his eyes, but not daring to venture 
the experiment. Suddenly, Adolfo turned very 
pale and looked distressed, much to Pablo’s concern, 
who thought he might have been poisoned. .And 
when his friend darted out of the hut he followed 
closely after him, finding him in great agony and 


150 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


unable for a while to reply to his questions as to 
his sudden indisposition. The Lucayan assured him 
that the distress would soon be over and was not 
lasting; and sure enough, in a short while Adolfo 
recovered sufficiently to confirm this statement ; but 
he could not be induced to take another whiff of 
tobacco on that trip. 

To be brief, the things discovered on that ex- 
pedition were not of great importance, for the 
strangest articles seen were some queer stools made 
of wood in the shape of an iguana or alligator, with 
tails turned up and eyes of gold. The precious 
metal was not found in any quantity, but the na- 
tives told them it was abundant in Bohio , a country 
four days’ journey to the south, and with this in- 
formation the travelers returned to the coast and to 
the fieet. 


CHAPTER XIV. 


THE DISCOVERY OF HAITI, OR HISPANIOLA. 

The Indian cacique and his people had great 
fields of maize or Indian corn, peppers, yucca and 
tobacco; but of gold and precious spices the 
travelers found few traces in Cuba. There is gold 
in the island, and since it was settled, some twenty 
years after its discovery, Cuba has also been success- 
fully mined for copper and magnetic iron ore. But 
it was gold that Columbus desired, gold in large 
quantities, for the impression the sight of it would 
make upon his sovereigns and its effect on his own 
fortunes. Gold was the watchword, the key-note, 
of this first voyage to the New World, and also of 
all subsequent expeditions fitted .out by the Span- 
iards. In pursuit of it the cruel Spaniards murdered 
thousands, some historians say millions, of innocent 
aborigines, and committed barbarities that made 
their name a byword for cruelty through succeeding 

centuries. Though Columbus never returned to the 
151 


152 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


scene of his first exploits in the Bahamas, many 
conquistador es, or conquerors, followed in his 
wake, and in a comparatively short time the islands 
were depopulated, owing to the fact that the Lucayans 
were kidnapped and taken to Haiti to wear their 
lives out in the mines. 

A story is told of a shrewd old cacique in Cuba 
who, some twenty years after Columbus was there, 
was hounded by the Spaniards for the gold that was 
supposed to be in his country. He had learned 
from the Indians of Haiti, or Hispaniola, of the 
cruelties committed by the foreigners in their search 
for gold, and so he called his people together and 
harangued them on the necessity for concealing 
every evidence of the precious metal in their section. 
4 4 The Spaniards, ’ ’ he told them, 4 4 do all their 
fiendish deeds for the sake of a great lord whom 
they serve, and whom I will show you. And this 
is that lord, ’ 5 he exclaimed, holding up a handful of 
gold. 44 Our scouts tell me they are now coming 
here to seek him, therefore let us dance before him 
and make sacrifice, in order that he may be pro- 
pitiated ; then cast him from you, and by no means 
have a grain of this gold in your possession, for 
even if it were inside you, the men of blood would 
find it out and cut you open for the sake of it,” 


THE DISCOVERY OF HAITI, OR HISPANIOLA. 153 

» 

The cacique prophesied truly, for it was not long 
before he and his people were massacred, for the 
sake of the gold they were supposed to conceal, and 
the chieftain himself was burned at the stake. 
Columbus may not have committed such atrocities 
as those who came after him; but he “set the 
pace” for the cruel adventurers to follow, and soon 
they had all but exterminated the natives of every 
island in the West Indies. 

There are no Indians of pure blood in Cuba now, 
for they were killed out many, many years ago, by 
means of atrocities as great as those perpetrated by 
the Spaniards in modern times, during the war of 
independence waged by Cubans, and which was 
only brought to an end by the intervention of the 
United States, in 1898. During four hundred years 
the Spaniards held possession of this island dis- 
covered by Columbus in 1492, but they exter- 
minated the million or more of natives who once 
owned it, in the first fifty years of their rule. 

If you should visit the port of Baracoa to-day 
you would find it at the foot of a most beautiful 
mountain called by the Indians Yunque , or the 
Anvil, from its curious shape. This mountain 
seemed so attractive that Adolfo and Pablo begged 
for permission to explore it, or rather the forests 


154 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


around its sides, which he reluctantly accorded, with 
many a caution not to get into trouble. So they 
set forth, performing the first part of the journey in 
a canoe up a lovely stream o’erhung with tropical 
trees and vines spangled with brilliant flowers. 
Parrots chattered in the tree-tops and alligators 
sunned themselves on the banks; but the boys 
stopped for none of these things, being intent upon 
visiting the anvil-shaped mountain. But their in- 
tention was never carried out, for soon after land- 
ing they encountered a herd of those small but pug- 
nacious animals called peccaries, which as you know 
are a sort of wild hog peculiar to the tropical for- 
ests of South America and the West Indies. They 
might have avoided them, as the peccaries were 
peacefully feeding beneath some great oak trees 
with wide-spreading branches; but Adolfo, who 
carried an arquebuse, thought it would be a good 
thing to get some wild pork as a change of diet 
aboard ship, and so singling out the leader of the 
herd, a big “ tusker” of vicious aspect, he fired. 
The old peccary promptly fell over on the ground 
to all appearances lifeless, but the remainder of the 
herd, instead of turning tail and running away, as 
the boys fully expected they would do, after a mo- 
ment’s hesitation, in which they seemed more 


THE DISCOVERY OF HAITI, OR HISPANIOLA. 155 

surprised than afraid, all charged in the direction 
of the young huntsmen. 

Fortunately for them, Juan the Lucayan, or 
Bahaman, was with them, and he shouted out 
“ Climb a tree ! climb a tree ! ” setting them the 
example by leaping into the branches of the nearest 
oak and swinging himself well above the ground. 
The boys did not quite understand Juan’s language, 
but they did his motions, and made all haste to fol- 
low after his example. They grasped the limbs of 
a low-spreading oak tree and swung themselves up 
into it as promptly as they could ; but not before 
the new leader of the herd had reached the spot 
and with his tusks ripped up the sole of Adolfo’s 
right boot. It was a narrow escape ; but after they 
were securely perched in the tree out of reach of 
the pigs, they knew not what to do, as Juan the 
Lucayan told them the peccaries would keep watch 
there until driven away by hunger, perhaps for 
several days. So long as his ammunition lasted, 
Adolfo loaded and fired off the arquebuse, until 
the ground was strewn with the slain peccaries; 
but this seemed to have no effect upon the surviv- 
ors, who were apparently all the more determined 
to stay there until their enemies were compelled to 
descend. It was well for the boys that the noise 


156 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


of the shooting reached the vessels and aroused the 
suspicions of the Admiral, who promptly sent out 
half a dozen arquebusiers to the rescue. Approach- 
ing cautiously, the veterans put the herd to flight, 
after a general discharge of their firearms, and re- 
leased the boys. They were laughed at bj^the Ad- 
miral for their adventure ; but on the whole did not 
regret it, as for several days after they and all the 
rest of the fleet’s company enjoyed the unwonted 
luxury of sweet and toothsome meat at their meals, 
afforded by the pigs they and the arquebusiers had 
shot. 

Although again disappointed in his search for 
some signs of a civilized empire, Columbus did not 
give it up for many years, making in all four voy- 
ages to America for the purpose. When, therefore, 
his envoys brought back to the fleet their reports of 
a land of gold to the southward, vouched for by the 
cacique and confirmed by other Indians, he set sail 
in that direction. First, though, he had to sail 
along the north coast of Cuba, in order to get 
around it, and on the way he discovered more mag- 
nificent harbors, like that of Baracoa, for instance, 
of which he was so enamored that he could not 
write enough in its praise. He makes particular 
mention of a great, table-topped mountain at this 


THE DISCOVERY OF HAITI, OR HISPANIOLA. 157 

» 

port, which is a noted landmark for sailors on the 
north coast of Cuba, and is still known by its native 
name of Yunque. 

Up to the time of leaving the bay of Baracoa, 
which is near the east end of Cuba, the vessels of 
the fleet had held together; but after rounding 
Cape Maysi, its extreme eastern end, the ‘ ‘ Pinta , 5 5 
commanded by Martin Alonzo Pinzon, sailed off on 
its own account. As she was about to disappear in 
the distance Columbus set the signal for return ; but 
as the vessel was the best sailer in the fleet, and as 
her commander seemed to desire a free hand at ex- 
ploring all by himself, she was soon lost to sight. 
This defection left Columbus with only the £ ‘ Santa 
Maria” and the little caravel the u Mna,” with 
which to continue the search for Bohio, land of 
gold. 

The departure of Captain Pinzon was a disagree- 
able surprise to Columbus, though the former’s in- 
tention was not unknown to Adolfo, to whom Mar- 
tin Alonzo had confided it the day before. “Here 
am I,” he had complained to Adolfo, when the two 
were ashore together at Baracoa, “ here am I, a 
veteran voyager of experience, holding the highest 
rank in the merchant maritime of my country, com- 
pelled to obey the command and follow the whims 


158 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBGB. 


of a foreign adventurer who merely got the favor 
of our sovereigns by chance. He has been now for 
more than five weeks searching for gold and spices, 
when he should have made all sail for the south- 
ern countries. I for one am not going to stand it 
longer, and you may tell him so if you like. ’ ’ 

Adolfo tried to soothe the wounded vanity of the 
veteran sea-dog, but being himself aware of the high 
services he had already rendered in fitting out the 
expedition and in navigating the ocean, as well as 
the inferior talents of the Admiral in this direction, 
he could say but little. He did urge the disgruntled 
Captain to stand by the fleet, holding up to him the 
danger he would run of incurring the King’s dis- 
pleasure and its effect upon his fortunes on their re- 
turn to Spain. And in fact, it turned out as Adolfo 
had predicted, for, though Captain Martin Alonzo’s 
services had been more important to the success of 
the voyage than those of any other, on the return 
to Palos he was not only ignored, but openly slighted 
by Columbus and the King ; soon after, it is said, 
dying of a broken heart. Adolfo did not consider 
it his duty to inform Columbus of the proposed de- 
parture of Captain Pinzon, reasoning that he might 
thereby incur the ill-will of the sailors, without 
rendering any adequate service to the Admiral. So 


t 


Me discovery of Haiti, or hIspaniola. 159 

* 

he merely confided his secret to Pablo, who agreed 
with him that no good would come of making it 
known to others. 

It was with great trepidation that the crews of 
the two small vessels took departure from Cape 
Maysi and steered boldly out into the channel 
which separates Cuba and the island of Haiti. 
They did not know then, what was later revealed, 
that this stretch of open water was a channel, but 
feared it might be part of the open ocean. But 
they had not sailed many hours before the dim out- 
lines of another mountainous land were traced on 
the horizon, rising higher and higher, and develop- 
ing a grandeur not yet seen in the islands already 
visited. As the blue clouds resolved themselves 
into lofty mountains, their slopes clothed in vivid 
green, and near approach showed golden-sanded 
bays between high headlands and with palm trees 
fringing the shores, the natives of Cuba, who had 
been brought along by Columbus, leaped up and 
down, shouting 6 4 JBohio, 99 and “ Bdbeque” these 
being the names by which they knew the island. 
The Indians later found living there called it 
Ha-i-ti , or the lofty country, from the many moun- 
tains it contained, and Columbus named it His- 
paniola. 


160 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

After taking refuge from a storm under the lee 
of an island which Columbus called Tortuga, from 
its shape, resembling as he fancied a great sea tur- 
tle, and which was later a rendezvous for the famed 
buccaneers, the “ Santa Maria ” and “Nina ” stood 
across the narrow channel for the greater island. 
They first entered a fine, natural harbor, completely 
land-locked, named by the Admiral San Nicolas, 
and by which name it is still known. Then sailing 
along the coast they came to a harbor so beautiful 
that Columbus bestowed upon it, or rather upon 
the valley running down to it, the appellation 
of Val de Paraiso , or Yale of Paradise. It 
was on the sixth of December that the land of 
Babeque was sighted, but nearly a week passed be- 
fore the Spaniards discovered any inhabitants, as 
they had probably fled to the mountains on the ar- 
rival of the vessels off their shores. Signal smokes 
by day and fires by night, proclaimed their pres- 
ence in the mountains, and Columbus sent in a party 
from Yal de Paraiso (which is supposed to have 
been the valley at the mouth of which the present 
city of Port de Paix is situated), and by this means 
some natives were captured. Owing to the fact 
that the three boys were now fairly proficient in 
the Indian language, they were sent on this short 


THE DISCOVERY OF HAITI, OR HISPANIOLA. 161 

expedition, as they were also in Cuba, for the same 
reason. Along with them went little Julia, as the 
Indian child was called who was taken at San Sal- 
vador, and she was instrumental in putting them in 
communication with the natives. She was now 
clad in a bright-colored dress, which though scanty 
was sufficient to cover her nakedness, and had 
around her neck a large string of glass beads, of 
which she was very proud indeed. Marching along 
in advance of the men and boys who composed the 
little party, she was observed by an Indian woman 
concealed in the woods, and who was attracted by 
her gaudy garments and bright ornaments. The 
woman’s vanity was the means of causing her cap- 
ture, for coming out from her place of concealment 
to observe the strange things worn by the little 
maiden, she was staring at them as if transfixed 
when the others of the party came up and sur- 
rounded her. At first she was terrified beyond 
measure and resisted strongly. As she was quite 
naked and as slippery as an eel, it was a difficult 
matter for her captors to hold her and she might 
have escaped but for the child, who, in response to 
a suggestion from her brother, held out a string of 
beads. These caught the young woman’s eye at 
once and she eagerly accepted them as a peace off er- 
ll 


162 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

ing, at the same time asking where they came from 
and if she would receive some like them if she went 
with the strangers. The child replied that they 
were given her by a great man who had arrived in 
a big canoa from Heaven and that he had a 
ship-load of just such beautiful presents for those 
who were kind to him and his companions. Then 
the Indian woman went along very willingly with 
her new friends, and when she reached the ship, 
Columbus, delighted to find a native of the island 
at last, loaded her with beads and finery, in ex- 
change for which she gave him a great nugget of 
gold that hung from one of her ears. 

She was a very pretty young woman, and 
though she had never in her life before worn any 
clothes except a girdle of grass around her waist, 
she was modest and well behaved. Taking a great 
fancy to little Julia, she told her that she lived with 
her husband in a big town far inland, and that if 
she might be permitted to go there she would bring 
back with her a multitude of her friends and neigh- 
bors to trade with the fleet. In response to the 
Admiral’s questions, which were translated to her 
by the child, she said that while there was very lit- 
tle gold in her part of the island, only three days’ 
sail to the westward there lived a powerful cacique 


THE DISCOVERY OF HAITI, OR HISPANIOLA. 163 

' who had great stores of it, and as he was a rich and 
generous chieftain she knew he would gladly give 
the Spaniards all they wanted. Then she went 
away in search of her people, and true to her prom- 
ise returned two days later with a great number of 
Indians, estimated at above two thousand, who ad- 
vanced singing and dancing, and who took turns in 
carrying the woman on their shoulders, as if she 
were a queen. She was, in truth, the first of her 
people to be clad in a gown and to wear strings of 
beads around her neck, so she was looked up to by 
all the rest ; though, such was the perfect disposi- 
tion of these charming natives, they did not regard 
her with envy, but manifested every token of pleas- 
ure at her good fortune. They brought all the 
gold they could find, and such as had no gold 
brought tame parrots, cassava bread, dried fish, 
edible roots, and tropical fruits like the banana and 
pine- apple. 

The place had been well named by Columbus the 
Yale of Paradise, for its inhabitants lived in the 
state of our first parents before they were driven out 
of Eden, perfectly happy, contented, at peace with 
all mankind, and like them needed neither clothing 
nor deception to cover themselves or cloak their ac- 
tions, which were open and innocent, wholly with- 


164 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


out guile. With the coming of the Spaniards, only, 
was the Yale of Paradise invaded by the demons of 
evil, and its inhabitants made to feel the penalties 
of sin. 


CHAPTEE XY. 


HOW THE FLAG- SHIP WAS WRECKED. 

Beautiful as was the Yale of Paradise, Colum- 
bus could not stay there longer than a day and a 
night, for a message reached him here that the 
great cacique, Guacanagari, who lived farther along 
the coast, and who ruled the region of gold, was 
awaiting his coming. So he set sail, and next day 
entered a bay that is now known as Acul, where 
the prospect was as lovely as in the other place, and 
of which he wrote in his first letter to Spain, “ I 
have now been at sea twenty-three years, and have 
seen the East and the West; but in all these parts 
I have never witnessed so much of perfection as in 
this.” 

He did not stop to explore the country, for as the 
boats landed on the beach and the Admiral stepped 
ashore he found a native chief with a magnificent 
retinue already there. “ It is the little king,” said 

the Indian woman captured the day before, “ and 
165 


166 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


he comes to bring gold to the strangers.” The 
“ little king” reclined in a litter borne on the 
shoulders of his subjects, two hundred of whom 
were with him, and each one had a bit of gold to 
exchange for the wonderful objects the Spaniards 
had brought. They eagerly gave away nuggets of 
shining gold for small strings of glass beads and 
cascabels which had cost Columbus next to noth- 
ing, so that he was glad to remain in this harbor 
several days engaged in such lucrative trade. Con- 
trary winds also detained the fleet, and it was not 
until the morning of the twenty-fourth of December 
that the vessels got away. 

A messenger had arrived from the cacique, Gua- 
canagari, the evening before, who sent a present to 
Columbus, consisting of a golden mask, as gro- 
tesque as it was valuable, showing that the Indians 
had spoken truly when they said the rich mines 
were in this native king’s dominions. But th.e 
winds were light and baffling, and night fell before 
the king’s capital was sighted. Christmas Eve of 
1492 found the “ Santa Maria” and the “ Mina ” 
struggling with a light but adverse wind and a con- 
trary current ; though this latter was not suspected 
until it was too late to save the flag-ship, which 
was carried against a hidden reef. 


HOW THE FLAG-SHIP WAS WRECKED. 167 

As the night was calm and the weather pleasant, 
Columbus had yielded to fatigue and had gone be- 
low to sleep. He recommended the boys to follow 
his example, but they chose to stay on deck awhile to 
enjoy the beauty of the night, to watch the dusky 
mountains gliding slowly by and inhale the fra- 
grance of the breezes from off shore. It had been 
well for at least one of the boys if they had followed 
the Admiral’s advice, as the sequel soon will show. 
While Juan the Lucayan and his sister curled up 
beneath the rail and went to sleep, Pablo and 
Adolfo sat on the castle deck and conversed about 
the strange sights they had witnessed. Then the 
conversation drifted to other things and at last 
turned upon the Admiral. 

< 4 1 like him more and more, ’ ’ said Pablo ; ‘ ‘ but 
do you know, though he is very kind to me now, 
at first he seemed to dislike me much. The first 
week we were at sea he hardly spoke to me without 
showing his displeasure.” 

“Yes, I remember,” said Adolfo with a light 
laugh; u but if he disliked you, he appeared to 
have a stronger feeling against me. In fact, though 
he calls me “son” and treats me with great re- 
spect, he distrusts me yet, I am sure. It is because 
he thinks I am here to spy upon his movements, 


168 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


I suppose, and who can blame him for feeling dis- 
trustful? But since the night when we stood watch 
and ward on deck, — that night he was in danger, 
you remember, — he has softened towards us and I 
really think he regards us as about the only friends 
he has in the fleet . 5 ’ 

44 So it seems to me , 5 ’ answered Pablo simply ; 

4 4 and I hope the time will come when we may 
prove it, even with our lives. I would lay my life 
down at once if thereby he could be benefited. 
But what can I do, only a cabin boy, to serve the 
interests of the Admiral and my king and queen? ” 

“You can do much, you have already proved 
that,” answered Adolfo putting an arm around 
Pablo’s shoulders and drawing him nearer. But 
hist, here comes the helmsman, seemingly to speak 
with one of us. ’ ’ 

“Your pardon, masters,” said the sailor re- 
ferred to, approaching with his lumbering gait. 

4 4 But now that the Admiral has gone below and 
all the crew are asleep, it struck me, as you both 
seem so wakeful, that you might be willing to do a 
fellow a good turn and take the helm, while I, too, 
get a little rest. Faith, masters, I haven’t had a 
respite from work for more than a week, and my 
eyes are heavy with sleep. You can steer, my 


HOW THE FLAG-SHIP WAS WRECKED. 169 

boy ’ ’ said the sailor addressing Pablo directly, ‘ ‘ for 
I have seen you do it well. ’ ’ 

“Yes, I can steer, and would be glad to help you 
out,” answered Pablo, hesitatingly. u But I re- 
member the Admiral especially forbade any but the 
pilots to handle the helm . 5 ’ 

“ Oh, that was while we were at sea, no land in 
sight and the winds and waves were boisterous. 
ISTow things are different, little man, for the night 
is clear as a bell, there is little wind, and all you 
have to do is to keep her on a course even with the 
shore, which you can plainly see abeam.” 

“ Well, I will try, Antonio. Of course I can 
steer ; but I recall what the Admiral said, and if he 
knew that all the others were asleep and I only at 
the helm, he might be angry. Still, as a neighbor 
of mine, I would like to help thee, Antonio. You 
will not sleep long, will you, neighbor? ” 

“ Only a wink, just a sweet little cat-nap, to get 
the sticks out of my eyes. There you are, God 
bless you, Pablo. Keep her sails from shivering, 
that’s all you can do with this faint breeze. But if 
a wind springs up kick me at once, for I will turn 
in right here on the deck. You, Senor, ” — ad- 
dressing Adolfo— “ will help the boy keep watch, 
will you not? ” 


170 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

“ Yes, of course, my man; but let me tell you, 
I think this is highly irregular. Only, we know 
you sailors have been kept awake for weeks, and 
you as a seaman say there is positively no dan- 
ger ? ” 

“Not a bit. Heaven save us, master, do you 
think I would risk the flag-ship, here in this wild 
waste of waters, far from home, and I, too, a man 
with a family, a wife and children waiting my re- 
turn at Palos ? No, the saints forbid. The sea is 
still as a pond, and the sky without a cloud. God 
rest you, gentlemen. I’m dead for want of sleep.” 

So saying, the steersman curled up on deck at their 
feet and was asleep almost as soon as the words were 
out of his mouth. Pablo took the helm, doubt- 
ingly ; not because he had any mistrust of his abili- 
ties as a seaman, for he 4 ‘ knew all the ropes ’ ’ and 
was perfectly at home on shipboard; but on ac- 
count of the act being directly contrary to the 
Admiral’s orders. Still, his heart was soft, and if 
an hour at the helm would relieve his neighbor he 
was ready to give it and take the consequences. 

Ah, those consequences ! They changed the 
course of Pablo’s life, they changed the plans 
Columbus had conceived, and they brought disaster 
to the entire company in the little fleet ! But Pablo 


HOW THE FLAG-SHIP WAS WRECKED. 171 

was innocent, and must be held blameless for what 
happened, acting as he did from the best of motives. 
It was a pretty sight : this man in miniature cling- 
ing to the tiller, casting an eye aloft now and then 
like an old sailor, his chubby cheeks red with sup- 
pressed excitement. He enjoyed the sensation of 
being the only one in charge of the flag-ship, and his 
heart swelled with happiness, perhaps with impor- 
tance, at the thought of being able to render a serv- 
ice to the steersman and the Admiral. "When he 
reached home again he could tell his boy friends of 
the Christmas Eve, on the coast of the strange 
country, when he alone of all the crew was intrusted 
with the great responsibility of guiding the ‘ ‘ Santa 
Maria . 5 ’ 

‘ ‘ Dear old ‘ Santa Maria, ’ 5 ’ he whispered to 
Adolfo. “ She has carried us well, hasn’t she? 
She hasn’t opened a seam or broken a rope in all the 
voyage. I love her, I love her, as the only home I 
have had since my dear mother died. But, Adolfo, do 
you not think this luck of ours has been too good to 
last? This calm sea is the kind, the old sailors say, 
in which the monsters of the deep and the mer- 
maids appear. Look over the rail, Adolfo, and tell 
me if anything strange is in sight. I feel all shaky 
and queer, Adolfo. ’ ’ 


172 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


“ It is the importance of your trust, dear Pablo, ’ 9 
answered Adolfo with a nervous laugh. ‘ ‘ But 
truth to tell, I feel that way myself. Still, what 
can happen to us on the eve of Noche Buena , when 
the Christ Child first appeared on earth ? Think 
how we would be celebrating this night at home, 
dear Pablo ; and here we are, sailing through sum- 
mer seas, in a part of the world our countrymen 
never saw or heard of before. Yes, I will look 
over the rail ; but there is nothing in sight, only 
the smooth surface of the water, and the shining 
wake left by the keel. The water is a-gleam as if 
filled with fire, Pablo, and I see fishes down beneath 
the surface, darting about like blue and silver 
flames . 5 ’ 

‘ ‘ But do you see no mermaids or mermen, Adolfo ? 
This is the place we ought to see them, the Admiral 
said, not long ago. And hark, what is that noise? 
It sounds like the roaring of a lion, or some great 
monster, Adolfo.” 

“ I do hear the roaring, Pablo; but perhaps it is 
the surf beating on the shore. Still, had we not 
better wake Antonio ? I fear me, Pablo ; not for 
the monsters of the deep, but that something dire 
might happen to us for disobeying the orders of the 
Admiral.” 


HOW THE FLAG-SHIP WAS WRECKED. 173 


44 I almost think we had better wake him, Adolfo ; 
but the poor man is, as he says, dead from want of 
sleep. Ah, how my heart beats ! I never felt this 
way before. Is it fear, thinkest thou, Adolfo ? ’ ’ 

44 No, no, I do not think thee capable of fear, 
dear Pablo ; but it is the weight of the trust im- 
posed upon thee, and perhaps it may be doubt as 
to what the Admiral might think of what we are 
doing. But, really, Pablo, the noise gets louder and 
nearer. I will run to the forepeak and take a 
look ahead. Perchance the watchman, too, has 
fallen asleep, and who knows what may be ahead 
of us ? ” 

Meanwhile, the roaring had increased, and it was 
no longer directly ahead of the vessel, but seem- 
ingly on both sides. The water, too, was white 
with foam, as though torn by sudden gusts of wind. 
Adolfo came running back shouting, 4 4 Breakers ! 
Pablo, breakers ahead ! Wake Antonio. Call the 
Admiral. The waves are raging like wild wolves, 
right ahead of the ship ! ’ ’ 

A deeper voice now broke in with: 44 What is 
this ? My helmsman asleep and a boy at the helm ? 
Get up, dog,” exclaimed the Admiral, who had 
heard the tumult and hastily darted on deck, to find 
his flag-ship unmanageable, right in the midst of 


174 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


reefs on either side. “ Get up, you cur ! ” he 
shouted angrily to the helmsman, planting a kick at 
the same time that sent the poor man sprawling. 
“ This is how you obey orders, is it ? Where’s the 
captain, the crew ? What, all asleep, and only two 
boys on deck ? Saints preserve us, the ship is lost ! 
All hands on deck, the ship is sinking ! ’ ’ 

The recreant captain came hurrying up, rubbing 
his eyes, followed by the crew, all apparently half 
asleep and began fumbling with the ropes, their 
first thought being of launching a boat in which to 
escape. 

By this time the vessel was well up on the reef, 
and poor Pablo clinging with all his strength to the 
helm, was dashed this way and that, as the rudder 
’ repeatedly struck upon the rocks. The Santa Maria 
had been carried by the swift and treacherous cur- 
rents that run along the coast, right into a depres- 
sion of a reef and was forced firmly against the 
sharp-pointed coral prongs. Columbus came to 
Pablo’s assistance, but finding the rudder was no 
longer of use, there being no steering way, he 
dropped the helm and shouted, as he darted amongst 
the sleepy crew : “Get out a boat and carry an 
anchor astern ! Lively, now, our only hope is to 
ward her off the reef ! ” 


HOW THE FLAG-SHIP WAS WRECKED. If5 

The captain and a body of the crew jumped into 
the long-boat, as if to comply with the Admiral’s 
orders ; but instead of taking out the anchor, they im- 
mediately rowed off in the direction of the “Nina,” 
which was farther inshore, and left the rest of the 
ship’s company to their fate. 

4 4 Miserable whelps ! ’ ’ ejaculated Columbus, as 
he saw how they had deserted them; “they shall 
suffer for this later. There is now no escape, for 
the current has set the ship broadside to the reef and 
the water is pouring through her seams ! Here, 
men; those of you that are left ! Cut away the 
mainmast ! Get the axes out, and be quick about 
it ! Ah, Dios! There she goes careening, broad- 
side to the breakers. We are lost ! lost ! and all for 
the lack of a man to command that craven crew ! ” 


CHAPTER XVI. 


AN INDIAN KING TO THE RESCUE. 

The breakers were banging against the vessel’s 
sides, opening the seams and splintering the bul- 
wark. When the mainmast went overboard, the 
44 Santa Maria ” righted a little, but still was heeled 
over to a dangerous extent, and the Admiral was yet 
fearful for the lives of those aboard of her. In the 
misty light that hung over the sea he saw a great 
prong of coral jutting from a ledge astern, and after 
viewing it critically said, as if to himself, 4 4 Me- 
thinks if we could get a rope to that rock in the sea 
we might right her up a little. But there is no boat, 
those recreants having deserted me. ’ ’ 

Pablo and Adolfo were standing near and over- 
heard him, and the latter said : 44 Your Excellency, 
there is no boat aboard, but still a rope can be car- 
ried thither, so it seems to me.” 

44 How, lad ? ” asked Columbus quickly. 

176 



“But I can swim, too, your Excellency!” exclaimed Pablo, eagerly. 
“ Oh, Senior, allow me to make the attempt. I can swim like a fish.” — 
Page 177. A Voyage tvith Columbus. 





AN INDIAN KING TO THE RESCUE. 1?7 

“ tVell, your Excellency, I can swim, and I will 
gladly carry it.” 

“No, no,” replied the Admiral. “It would 
not do. Your life is too precious to me, son. I am 
involved in difficulties enough already, without 
being asked, when I return — if ever I do — what I 
have done with an Infante of Portugal. No, no, it 
cannot be. ” 

“But I can swim, too, your Excellency,” ex- 
claimed Pablo, eagerly. “Oh, Senor, allow me to 
make the attempt. I can swim like a fish.” 

Columbus glanced at the boy with interest, pity 
and doubt mingled in his looks. He saw that 
Pablo was anxious to atone in part for the misfor- 
tune he had inadvertently caused, and so he said : 
“ Thinkest thou so, son Pablo ? My sooth, I’ve a 
mind to let thee try it. Yet thy life is as valuable 
to me as my own, my boy.” 

“ It is only a boy’s life,” answered Pablo, “ and 
at this time you cannot spare a man from the crew. 
Give me a rope, and I will try.” 

4 4 No, Senor, let me go, ’ ’ interposed Adolfo. 4 4 1 
am older and stronger than Pablo, and I was the 
one who suggested it, too, your Excellency. ’ ’ 

4 4 Pablo will go, ’ ’ said Columbus decidedly. 4 4 It 
is only a short stretch of smooth water, and per- 


178 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


chance there be no dangers intervening. But fasten 
this line to thy waist, son, and if anything happen 
we will haul thee in again. ’ ’ 

Pablo was already stripped for the swim, and as 
soon as he had fastened the line about his waist he 
sprang to the rail and dropped into the sea. He 
swam with strong, vigorous stroke, and Columbus 
was relieved when he noted how at home he was in 
the water. 4 4 God grant he may return safely to 
the ship,” he murmured. 44 Of a truth, it was not 
his fault my gallant 4 Santa Maria ’ was lost. It was 
the fault of the captain and the helmsman, and they 
shall suffer for it ! ” 

It took but a few minutes for the boy to gain the 
ledge where the rock protruded well above the 
water, and though the sharp coral gashed his hands 
and feet severely, he balanced himself upon it while 
he drew in the line, then the rope which was 
fastened to it, and made the latter secure. He then 
cast himself into the water and began his swim back 
to the ship. But what was that dark object cleav- 
ing the water just behind the boy, — a triangular 
fin, which the watchers aboard the vessel had not 
noted previously? 4 4 It is a shark!” shouted Co- 
lumbus, 44 haste thee, Pablo, haste ! Oh for a boat, 


AN INDIAN KING TO THE RESCUE. 179 

an arquebuse, — something to arrest the progress of 
that Sea monster ! ’ ’ 

Adolfo also had seen the object pursuing the boy, 
but he uttered no sound as he divested himself of 
his clothing, seized his rapier, balanced himself on 
the rail, then plunged into the sea. He was a 
more vigorous swimmer than his friend, and a few 
moments only elapsed before they met in mid-chan- 
nel. But in that interval the shark had caught up 
with the boy and was about turning on his side, 
with mouth agape, to seize him by the leg. Pablo 
said not a word, but glancing over his shoulder he 
saw the monster at his side and quickly dove 
beneath the surface of the water. The shark was 
for the instant baffled, as it snapped viciously at the 
empty air, and before it could again catch up with 
its prey Adolfo was taking a hand in the fight. 
Keeping his head well above the water, he took in 
the scene in one swift glance, then diving suddenly 
he came up beneath the shark and drove his blade 
into its body. He tried to wrench the rapier away, 
in order to give another blow, but in its struggles 
the shark tore it from his hand and he was left 
defenseless. Half strangled from the sea water, 
Adolfo regained the surface and struck out for the 
ship, following close after Pablo, and keeping be- 


180 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


tween him and the wounded shark. He appre- 
hended no further attack from the wounded fish, 
but he knew that the blood that tinged the water 
would attract others of its kind, and that there was 
no time to be lost. 

The rail of the “ Santa Maria ” was lined with 
men, several of whom cast nooses down to the 
swimmers as they reached the vessel, and they were 
quickly withdrawn from the water. But not before 
a fresh arrival on the scene, a shark even larger 
than the first, had swam swiftly and close up to 
them, and as they were suspended in mid-air made 
a leap that only barely missed them both. 

After being pulled over the rail and laid out on 
the deck, the boys soon recovered from their adven- 
ture and were able to sit up and look around. 
Scant time was there for gratulations, as the crew 
tightened up the rope to right the vessel; but 
Columbus paused long enough to draw them with- 
in his arms in a hearty embrace, all wet and drip- 
ping as they were, and to express his admiration of 
their prowess. 

“You are heroes, both,” he said with fervor, 
“and you shall be brought before the King and 
Queen, when we return, and receive the honors due 
you for this action. As for thee, son Pablo, words 


AN INDIAN KING TO THE RESCUE. 181 

of mine cannot express my admiration. Thou wert 
in no fault by taking the helm on request, nor for 
stranding my flag-ship ; and if thou wert, thou hast 
amply atoned for all. I now absolve thee in ad- 
vance, dear boy, and lay not up in thy heart any 
feeling that thou hast been remiss.” 

Pablo beamed with pleasure, and indeed a load 
was lifted from his heart, as he said: 44 Your Ex- 
cellency is kind and just. I knew you would not 
blame me. But your thanks are due Adolfo, who 
risked his life to rescue me, Senor. But for him I 
might not have reached the ship. ’ ’ 

44 And sooth, thou wouldst not,” exclaimed 
Columbus. 44 But Adolfo has his reward, I am 
sure, in having saved thy life. ’ ’ 

44 That I have,” said the young Prince quickly. 
4 4 And, your Excellency , in so doing I was only re- 
paying a debt of the kind, for at the beginning of 
our acquaintance Pablo saved my life ; so we are 
quite even.” 

44 Ha, is that so ? Thou must tell me about it, 
later. Meanwhile, the ship is leaking like a sieve, 
and we must haste to get away, if so be that is pos- 
sible. Hist, I hear the sound of oars ! A boat is 
approaching. Yes, it is from the 4 Hina,’ and be- 
hind it come the base ingrates who deserted in my 


182 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


long-boat. What excuse will they have, what can 
they say? Yerily, nothing in extenuation of such 
conduct. But this is no time for accusations. I 
must bide my day, which will surely come after we 
have made the home voyage to Spain. Meanwhile, 
I must temporize with the scoundrels, for surely 
they are all against me and troubles are thick upon 
me now’. ’ 5 

It was about midnight when the “ Santa Maria” 
was forced upon the reef by the swift sea-currents, 
and soon after dawn she was lying a deserted hulk, 
stripped of all her rigging, anchors, — in fact, of 
everything portable, and with all her crew ashore. 
This had been accomplished so expeditiously by the 
assistance of the Indian cacique of whom Columbus 
was in search when the accident occurred, and who, 
when notified of the wreck, sent out his men to 
render all the aid that lay in their power. In the 
first boat that came to his rescue from the caravel, 
Columbus sent ashore two high dignitaries of the 
King’s household, who were along in official capacity, 
one Diego de Arana the chief judge of the arma- 
ment, and Pedro Gutierrez, the King’s butler, to 
notify the cacique of his distress and implore his aid. 
By the Admiral’s calculations, they were not far 
from Guarico, the cacique’s capital, and so it proved, 


AN INDIAN KING TO THE RESCUE. 183 

for the emissaries quickly found the king, who 
swiftly summoned his men, and soon after dawn the 
wreckage of the “Santa Maria” had been ac- 
complished. 

Spurning the offers of the repentant captain who 
had so basely fled with his men, Columbus had or- 
dered him ashore, himself standing by the ship and 
being the last to leave. Fortunately for him and 
his crew, the sea was smooth, except where the 
current broke its force upon the reefs, and no wind 
was stirring before the morning breeze came off 
from shore. Had it been otherwise, Columbus 
might have lost his life and the lives of his crew, as 
well as his ship. But the good ‘ ‘ Santa Maria ’ 5 the 
largest vessel of the little fleet, and also the stanch- 
est, was a total wreck. The Admiral finally left 
her where she stranded, and with a sad heart sought 
the shore, as the morning sun sent its first rays over 
the mountain peaks of the beautiful island. 

In the light of that Christmas morning of 1492, 
might have been seen the doleful spectacle of the 
once proud vessel, “ Santa Maria,” flag-ship of the 
fleet, and a short time before the temporary home 
of three-score sailors, lying broadside upon the coral 
reef, with the breakers pounding her to pieces, while 
the placid bay inside the reefs was alive with smaller 


184 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


craft safely making their way to shore. There 
were the two boats of the flag-ship and the caravel, 
the “ Nina,” and besides them at least a hundred 
canoes manned by Indians and laden with wreckage 
of every description. 

It might have been thought that these wild In- 
dians, who had never before looked upon a white 
man, and in whose eyes the trinkets of trade 
brought by Columbus were so precious, would have 
availed themselves of the rare opportunity for 
plundering the vessel, or at all events of carrying 
off some of the valuable wreckage. But they were 
even more honest and dependable than the white 
people themselves, for instead of stealing any of the 
articles they carried ashore, they on the contrary 
saved every object for the owners, and when Colum- 
bus set foot on the strand at Guarico he found all 
his possessions either piled up in heaps awaiting 
him, or coming in the canoes. Not an article of 
any kind was lost, save only the vessel itself, and 
even the heavy guns and anchors were taken from 
the wreck and carried ashore. 

And then the reception given the shipwrecked 
mariners by King Guacanagari, who with tears in 
his eyes welcomed the Admiral to his capital, was 
truly regal and hospitable. He sent into the island 


AN INDIAN KING TO THE RESCUE. 


185 


for everything in the way of eatables with which 
his limited cuisine was acquainted, and set his cooks 
at work to prepare a feast such as no white men 
had ever eaten in America before. Perhaps the 
readers of this story of adventures in connection 
with the first voyage would like to know just what 
the Indian king served up for the Spaniards at their 
first Christmas dinner in America, and the follow- 
ing is the menu, as nearly as it can be gleaned from 
the journal written at the time : In the first place, 
there was a hearty welcome, without which no feast 
is complete ; for Guacanagari spared no pains to make 
his guests “at home.” 

The repast was spread on the ground, to be sure, 
for the Indians were unacquainted with the use of 
tables, and for plates they used great leaves from 
the palm and other tropical trees. After his guests 
were all squatted around on the ground, Guacana- 
gari clapped his hands and a host of comely Indian 
girls appeared, each carrying a different sort of 
dish. One girl carried a dish of Indian corn, which 
Columbus had seen in Cuba, but had probably not 
tasted previously; another brought some maniocs, 
boiled and roasted, while still another set down be- 
fore the Admiral a dish called ‘ ‘ cassareep ’ ’ made 
from the manioc, and which the Spaniards called 


186 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


olla jpodrida , or all-sorts, because it contained 
many kinds of meat preserved by the juice of the 
manioc. Various kinds of meats also were served, 
such as the 4 4 utia ’ ’ or native hare, the 4 4 dumb dog, ’ ’ 
so called because it had never barked when alive. 
With their arrows the Indians had shot wild pig- 
eons and doves, parrots and iguanas, which were 
stewed in an earthen pot, the flesh of the iguana 
being considered particularly fine. For drink they 
had the fermented juice of the wild palm, as well 
as water ; and when the repast was over the In- 
dian maidens brought the Spaniards water with 
which to wash their hands, and fragrant grass to 
dry them on. Then they rolled up innumerable 
cylinders of the herb they called tabaco , which 
the Indians smoked in a peculiar pipe with two 
stems which they inserted in their nostrils, inhaling 
the smoke with evident gusto; but the Spaniards 
refused to experiment with it, having in mind 
Adolfo’s sad experience with tobacco when in Cuba. 

It was truly a great feast, and Columbus wrote 
of it in his journal that it was the most varied 
and protracted he ever enjoyed. 


CHAPTER XVII. 


HOW COLUMBUS ASTONISHED THE NATIVES. 

The stranding of the flag-ship took place just 
ten weeks after land was first sighted at San Salva- 
dor, on the night before Christmas. The Spaniards 
were landed at Guarico, Guacanagari’s capital, early 
on Christmas morning, and remained there until the 
fourth day of January, 1493, so that the day of the 
Nativity, as well as New Year’s, was celebrated 
ashore in the strange country. Neither event had 
ever been commemorated in such fashion before, 
and the adventurers were carried away by the senti- 
ment of the thing, and for a time almost forgot 
the hardships they had endured in admiring the 
many strange things they saw. The weather had 
been superb, all the while they were on the coasts 
of Cuba and Haiti, the country revealed to view 
as they coasted its shores the most beautiful they 
had ever beheld, and the people residing here, who 
came swimming out to the vessel, or paddling in 

their canoes, hollowed from logs of trees, the most 
187 


188 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

gracious and hospitable that ever welcomed sea- 
tossed mariners to the delights of a sun -kissed and 
fruitful land. 

So they had sailed carelessly along, wafted by 
favoring breezes and caressed by gentle zephyrs, 
amid such glorious scenes and with such evidences 
of bounteous nature all about them that Columbus 
himself wrote to his sovereigns that it seemed indeed 
as if they had penetrated to the very heart of the 
terrestrial paradise. Wherever they went, along 
the coast of Haiti, unclothed but courteous natives 
entreated them to stay and share with them the de- 
lights of their country, offering them all they pos- 
sessed if they would only tarry. But ahead of 
them was the conjectural land of gold, where, ac- 
cording to the savages, all the streams ran over 
golden sands ; and this auriferous lure had led them 
on to destruction. But the hospitality of the na- 
tives was not changed by the disaster ; on the con- 
trary, it was increased, if that were possible. The 
king of the country, generous Guacanagari, seeing 
that there would not be room in the one remaining 
caravel for all the sailors to return to their native 
land, offered to provide homes for such as wished 
to remain behind, even if all should decide to do so. 
He at once gave orders for his men to build huts 


HOW COLUMBUS ASTONISHED THE NATIVES. 18$ 

* _ 

enough to house them all, and so expeditiously was 
this work carried on that they were provided with 
shelter within twenty-four hours after they had 
reached the shore. 

Taking with him the three boys, Adolfo, Pablo, 
and Juan, the Lucayan from the Bahamas (who 
was always accompanied by his sister), Columbus 
made the rounds in a tour of inspection. It had so 
fallen out by now that these four were about the 
only friends the Admiral had in the whole company, 
and in them alone he reposed the most implicit 
confidence. The King’s officials grouped by them- 
selves, the captains of the caravels held apart, sulking 
and gloomy, while the common sailors, now that 
shipwreck made their return seem more remote than 
ever, viewed the Admiral with a distrust bordering 
upon open mutiny. 

< ‘ Friend Adolfo, ’ ’ said Columbus, as they walked 
together beneath the golden fronds of the palms on 
shore, ‘ ‘ this Indian king is the most hospitable 
man I ever encountered. He has not only offered 
me, as you know (being my interpreter), a resi- 
dence in his country, with all the gold and precious 
stones it contains, but has promised to help me 
build a fort, within which to house such of our men 
as cannot return with us to Spain. It will be 


190 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


impossible for us to carry all the crews in this one 
small caravel, and as the ‘ Pinta ’ has gone no one 
knows whither, we must probably leave at least 
half our number behind. Now, before we com- 
mence upon the fort which I shall build, I am going 
to give the king a feast aboard the ‘ Nina,’ in return 
for his hospitalities of yesterday. I wish also to 
impress him with the strength of our resources, 
even though we are wrecked and seemingly help- 
less, and so shall order the captain to fire off the 
lombards and arquebuses, in the midst of the feast, 
in order to ascertain what effect it will have upon 
the Indians. ’ ’ 

True to his word, when they had returned to the 
shore, Columbus ordered the captain of the caravel 
to prepare a repast for his guests, but meanwhile 
Guacanagari had another surprise in store for the 
Spaniards. He invited Columbus to a beautiful 
grove, where the ground was spread with delicious 
fruits, such as the pineapple, mammey, custard- 
apple, guava, avocado pear and sour-sop — all na- 
tives of this favored island — and after all had par- 
taken of them, the king sounded a signal by blow- 
ing a shrill whistle, and there suddenly appeared, 
as if they had sprung out of the earth, more than a 
thousand Indians, who surrounded the Spaniards 


HOW COLUMBUS ASTONISHED THE NATIVES. 191 

I * 

and began a sham battle with their spears, war- 
clubs, bows and arrows. It was a very entertain- 
ing fight they 4 4 put up ’ ’ for their guests, and the 
Spaniards were immensely diverted, especially by 
an encounter between two of the warriors, armed 
with spears tipped with flint. These two fought so 
fiercely that both were severely wounded, and the 
blood streamed from gashes in their arms and legs. 

44 That is a very pretty fight,” remarked Colum- 
bus to one of his captains ; 4 4 but we have many men 
with us, think you not, who could vanquish any 
two of these Indians in single combat? ” 

4 4 1 misdoubt me, your Excellency, 5 ’ replied the 
captain, 4 4 for they fight fiercely and with a great 
deal of skill.” 

4 4 Pooh, pooh, Captain, it is not so ! Why, our 
young friend here, Don Adolfo, is a better swords- 
man, boy though he be, than any Indian here.” 

4 4 Mayhap, ’ ’ answered the captain cautiously. 4 4 1 
have heard how he vanquished Captain Martin Alonzo 
at small swords, before we started out, when in the 
convent of La Rabida ; but methinks these savages 
are of different metal. They think nothing of 
wounds that would kill one of our men, and they 
fight like tigers when their blood is up. ’ ’ 

Adolfo had overheard part of this conversation, 


192 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

and at once divining what was in the Admiral’s 
mind, exclaimed: 44 Your Excellency, I would like 
to measure weapons with one of those warriors, per- 
ad venture none other of our company cares to do so. 
May I have your permission? ” 

44 Ask the king what he thinks,” answered 
Columbus. 4 4 Ask him if he has a man amongst his 
warriors who dares meet a boy at a trial of skill.” 
"When the question was asked Guacanagari his face 
beamed with satisfaction, and he answered : 44 Truly, 
scores of men ; but I warn you that the sight of 
blood incites them to a fury I cannot restrain. 
Still, if the youth wishes to try his skill, I will call 
out the best and most renowned amongst my war- 
riors to oppose him.” This was the gist of his 
answer, as interpreted by the boys, and after 
Columbus had inquired anxiously if Adolfo was 
willing to engage with the savage on such condi- 
tions, and received an affirmative reply, he nodded 
for the battle to begin. 

The fight that ensued was one well worthy a 
Roman arena, and in some particulars it resembled 
the combats that once took place in the Eternal 
City, for it was one between a Christian and a say- 
age, the latter naked, big and burly; the former 
slight of build and armed only with a sword. 


I 


HOW COLUMBUS ASTONISHED THE NATIVES. 193 

€ 

‘ ‘ Have a care, Infante, ’ ’ whispered Columbus, 
“for thy life is most precious to me, understand.” 

“Fear not,” answered Adolfo, “ I have held a 
sword ever since I could bear its weight. Let me 
select a big one with keen blade, and I will soon 
compel that savage to beg for quarter.” With 
that, he marched forth to meet the Indian, who 
was armed with a ponderous spear, and who 
laughed loudly at the approach of the slender youth. 
He made a thrust at Adolfo, as if to put him out of 
the fight at one fell blow ; but the boy parried it, 
and bringing up his blade with a swift stroke, cut 
the spear staff in two, leaving only a short portion 
in the Indian’s hand. The latter gazed at his muti- 
lated weapon in amazement, then darted at the boy 
with the ragged staff, as if to bear him down by the 
force of his onset. But Adolfo met him with a 
swift upper cut that set the staff spinning into the 
trees, and then lowered the point so quickly that it 
penetrated the savage’s bare and brawny breast. 
Seeing his opponent badly wounded, with the crim- 
son blood spouting forth, Adolfo would have with- 
drawn the blade ; but the savage pressed forward 
with demoniac fury, striving to get at him, driving 
the sword yet deeper into the muscles of his 
breast. 


194 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

At word from the king, several Indians darted 
forward and seizing the infuriated barbarian from 
behind, threw him to the ground, where he lay 
panting, and Adolfo then withdrew the sword. 
Even then the savage tried to get on his feet and 
seize the youth, such was his rage at being beaten ; 
but both Columbus and the king forbade the contest 
to continue, having had enough. In truth, Adolfo 
did not desire to fight any further, having done 
more than he intended in drawing blood so copiously, 
through the Indian’s eagerness; but merely stood 
on the defensive until the savage was overpowered, 
when he lowered his weapon and returned to his 
place by the Admiral’s side. 

“ Thou hast done well, Infante; but I am as 
sorry as thou art that the savage hurt himself so 
sorely. ’ ’ 

“I did not intend it, your Excellency; but, as 
you saw, he would persist in the attack when I had 
him practically weaponless. I trust it is not a mor- 
tal wound, for he is a brave man and worthy a bet- 
ter fate.” He was interrupted by Guacanagari, 
who came and patted him on the shoulder, at the 
same time gingerly feeling the blade, all stained 
with blood, that had done the business for his best 
warrior. He expressed great admiration for Adolfo ’ s 


HOW COLUMBUS ASTONISHED THE NATIVES. 195 

skill, telling him as best he could that he had van- 
quished his most doughty fighter and that if he 
would accept the command of his army the position 
was his for the asking. In answer to Adolfo’s anx- 
ious questioning, he said that the man would soon get 
well of his wound, and that when his fury had 
cooled he would be the best friend he had, as he 
had met his match for the first time in his life as a 
warrior. 

“Now we will give them another exhibition,” 
said Columbus, and sending for an old Spaniard who 
had fought in the wars with the Moors, he told him 
to fill his quiver with arrows and prepare for a trial 
of skill with the native bowmen. The old man 
was a veteran crossbowman and hailed this occa- 
sion for exhibiting his proficiency with his favorite 
weapon with delight. A dozen Indians came for- 
ward with their primitive bows and arrows, and 
each one made most wonderful shots at the mark 
set up for them, striking close to the “bull’s-eye” 
every time. Then the old Spaniard let fly and 
shot right into the center, and while the murmur of 
applause was going around he sent another arrow 
from his bow-gun right into the nock of the first, 
splitting it in twain. Proficient as they were, none 
of the Indians could surpass this feat, neither could 


196 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

they shoot so far or so strongly as the veteran ; so 
a second time the Spaniards were victorious. 

44 We have beaten them at their own weapons, in a 
sense, ’ ’ said Columbus ; “now let us introduce some- 
thing they have never seen or heard of before. Ho 
there, send me three arquebusiers, and let them shoot 
at those great birds (pelicans) floating at a distance 
on the water.” The arquebusiers came as ordered 
and having prepared their pieces set them off, one 
after the other, amid a spouting of flame and smoke, 
to the great terror of the natives, many of whom 
fell to the ground in abject terror, at the noise, the 
smoke and the flame. And when some of the In- 
dians in their canoes went out and got the pelicans, 
dead and dabbled with blood, and which were shot 
without any missile being visible to them, there was 
no end to their amazement and awe. They all ex- 
amined the great birds, putting their fingers into 
the wounds, and then drew apart, whispering 
amongst themselves and casting glances of wonder 
at the Spaniards. 

44 1 thought that would amaze them,” said Co- 
lumbus gleefully ; 4 4 but we have still one more won- 
der in store for them, which I shall reserve until the 
king has dined on board the 4 Hina,’ which I am 
going to invite him to do now.” The captain of 


HOW COLUMBUS ASTONISHED THE NATIVES. 197 

the ‘ Nina ’ signaled that he was ready to receive 
his distinguished guests, and so Columbus led the 
way to the boats, the king following in a maze of 
wonderment, taking with him several of his sub- 
chiefs or little caciques. 

On board the caravel Guacanagari was served 
with the best the larder could afford,- not only with 
choice food, but Spanish wines, which he tasted 
daintily, and behaved with such decorum that his 
host was delighted. After the banquet was over 
Columbus ordered the ship’s cannon, the lombards, 
to be loaded, and asking the king to keep his eye 
fixed on a certain great tree ashore, had the gunners 
concentrate their fire upon it, with the effect that it 
was shivered to fragments and fell with a crash. 
The roar of the great guns and the crash of the fall- 
ing tree had such an effect upon the Indians that 
several of them jumped overboard and swam ashore, 
being frightened almost out of their wits ; but the 
king, though stupefied with fright, was too digni- 
fied to show it, and reproved his companions for 
their fears. 


CHAPTEK XVIII. 


THE TREASURE BROUGHT BY THE INDIANS. 

When the Indian king went aboard the caravel 
to dine with the Admiral, he wore a golden crown, 
and each one of his caciques or sub-chiefs wore 
another, though smaller than Guacanagari’s. When 
the Indians left the caravel neither of them wore his 
golden crown, but in the place of it a velvet cap, 
bestowed by Columbus in exchange, and in addition 
the king wore a cotton shirt and a pair of gloves, 
of which he was prouder than of his coronet. In 
his ignorance, seeing that Columbus and his men 
greatly desired all the gold they could get and set a 
great value on it, and having an abundance of the 
precious metal in his country, the king gladly ex- 
changed gold for gewgaws such as glass beads, 
hawk-bells, bits of iron and tin, and even rusty nails. 
Eor these things he and his Indians had never seen 
before, hence they attached a value to them beyond 

that which they placed on the gold. 

198 


THE TREASURE BROUGHT BY THE INDIANS. 199 

Being convinced that he had at last arrived at the 
country of gold, Cipango, mentioned by the learned 
Marco Polo in his book of travels, Columbus deter- 
mined to build a fort — as already mentioned — and 
leave here such of the men as he could not carry in 
the caravel. It happened that the name of the re- 
gion from which the gold was obtained was called 
44 Cibao,” and it so nearly resembled 44 Cipango ” 
that Columbus was easily deceived into believing he 
had found the veritable country so famed in history. 
It bears the same name, Cibao, to-day, and lies 
back of the river Yaqui in the island of Hispaniola. 
And, the writer may mention in passing, that he 
himself has found gold in the Cibao region, and has 
seen precious nuggets weighing an ounce apiece. 
The gold is there to-day, in the sands of the Yaqui 
and other rivers of Santo Domingo, but cannot be 
found now in sufficient quantities for profitable 
mining. However, when Columbus arrived off the 
north coast of Haiti and Santo Domingo — the is- 
land collectively known to Columbus as Hispaniola 
— the precious metal was exceedingly abundant, hav- 
ing been washed out of the 4 4 placers ’ ’ for ages into 
the streams, whence the Indians took it in great quan- 
tities. Being the first one to arrive in the land 
of gold who knew its real value, Columbus was the 


200 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

recipient of all the Indians had collected for genera- 
tions, and he did not believe himself using extrava- 
gant language when he said to Adolfo, in a burst of 
confidence: “ Infante mio (my dear Prince), if 
the men we shall leave here are industrious, I am 
sure I shall find at least a ton of gold accumulated 
when I return, as I shall next year, to make a settle- 
ment on this coast.” 

To which Adolfo replied, “Your Excellency, 
that will be glorious. And will you not allow me 
to remain here with the men and direct their opera- 
tions? I will surely attend to your interests, Senor, 
and faithfully serve his majesty, the King.” 

“ I do not doubt it, Infante, for I am now con- 
vinced of your integrity ; but no, it would not do 
to leave behind in this wilderness one so nearly re- 
lated to my sovereign’s royal rival. Even though 
you came without my knowledge and consent, com- 
plications might arise that would embroil our re- 
spective nations in war. No, no, no ! While I re- 
spect thy intentions, this thing cannot be. ’ ’ 

Adolfo was disappointed, for he had set his heart 
upon remaining with the men who were to be left 
behind as a garrison for the fort they were to 
build; but he concealed his feelings as best he 
could and said no more to Columbus on the sub- 


THE TREASURE BROUGHT BY THE INDIANS. 201 

ject. While this conversation was going on, the 
Indian king was preparing to go ashore, and taking 
a formal leave of the Admiral he and his caciques 
entered their canoes and were paddled to the beach. 
Meanwhile, there continued to arrive innumerable 
canoes, coming apparently from all parts of the coast, 
each canoe containing eager and excited Indians, 
who vrere anxious to barter what gold they had for 
the trifles the Spaniards were willing to give them. 
They paddled and swam around the caravel, hold- 
ing up their treasures and crying out 4 ‘ Chug, 
chug,” by which they meant that they wanted 
some of those tinkling hawk-bells in exchange ; and 
after they had departed there was a pile of nuggets 
and gold-dust so large that Columbus thought it 
possible he might obtain the ton of gold before he 
left for Spain, and delight his sovereigns with the 
sight of the country’s vast riches when he met them 
again at court. 

“ You would like a souvenir of the country, In- 
fante, would you not? ” asked Columbus of Adolfo. 
“Well, then, the next Indian who comes here 
bartering shall be yours to trade with ; and by the 
same token, the next shall belong to Pablo. Here 
comes one now, standing up in the prow of his canoe, 
and he holds up his hand, which seems full of some- 


202 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


thing, probably of gold-dust. Get out your hawk- 
bells and trade with him; but, son, do not give 
him too much for his gold, lest you should spoil our 
market. ’ ’ 

Pablo and Adolfo thanked the Admiral for his 
graciousness and went in search of the trinkets 
which they had provided against just such an occa- 
sion as this before they sailed from Palos. As they 
came again on deck there were two canoes on the 
port side of the caravel, in the foremost one the In- 
dian pointed out by Columbus, who at sight of the 
hawk- bell held up by Adolfo, leaped to the bulwark 
rail and thrusting into his hand all that his fist con- 
tained hastily seized the trinket and sprang over- 
board, swimming to the shore, with many a back- 
ward glance over his shoulder, as if fearful the boy 
would pursue him and take his bell away. 

“ Well, well,” laughed Columbus, “there is one 
fool in the world I had not known, it seemeth. 
Look at that Indian, having bartered his fistful of 
gold for a trinket worth a few centavos only, 
fearsome lest you shall take it away from him. 
Yerily, we have arrived at the trader’s paradise, as 
well as at the paradise of fools. Now it is thy 
turn, Pablo mio j and I trust thou wilt do as 
well as Adolfo.” 


THE TREASURE BROUGHT BY THE INDIANS. 203 

‘ ‘ I could not do better, ’ 5 answered Pablo, ‘ ‘ nor 
do I think it would be right to do so ; though I am 
glad Adolfo made such a good bargain.” 

‘ ‘ I did not make it, in sooth, ’ ’ said Adolfo with 
a happy laugh. 4 ‘ The Indian cheated himself, and 
as he has departed for the forest there is no redress. 
I only hope he will not find out his mistake and re- 
turn for the change, for of a truth every one of 
these glistening grains is worth a hundred casca- 
bels. What will my father say, when he looks 
upon this evidence of wealth in the country you 
have brought to light, your Excellency ? ’ ’ 

“ Of a truth, what will he not say ? ” answered 
Columbus, with a frown on his brow and a gleam 
of triumph in his eyes. “ Thou knowest, Infante, 
that he had the opportunity for outfitting my expe- 
dition in search of the New World even before the 
sovereigns of Spain ; and thou also knowest that he 
refused my offer, dost thou not ? ’ ’ 

“ Yes, your Excellency. But lay it not up 
against him, for he was indeed sore tempted, but 
at the time thought he could not spare the funds. 
Would to heaven he had accepted your terms, for 
to him, now, would belong the glory that is shared 
with you by the sovereigns of Spain.” And 
Adolfo sighed, while Pablo, to whom this conversa- 


204 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


tion was somewhat unintelligible, looked on in 
wonder. 

“Well, Pablo, there is thy Indian,’’ suggested 
Columbus, as the second canoe came to the side 
with its clamorous traders. ‘ ‘ His fist is not quite 
so well stored with gold as that of the first, but 
doubtless there is enough to repay thee for thy in- 
vestment. Surely, you boys were forehanded, in 
thus providing yourselves with trinkets for barter 
in advance. Who told you we should meet here 
people who would desire to exchange gold for 
trifles, youngsters ? ” 

“Nobody,” replied Adolfo, as Pablo was now 
engaged in bartering his bell for the Indian’s treas- 
ure. “Nobody; but I knew there might be an 
opportunity, provided we should find a country 
with inhabitants, and so I furnished the money 
while Pablo searched out the trinkets. It was 
while we were at La Kabida, you know, and time 
hung heavy on our hands.” 

“Ah, yes, I remember your advent at the 
monastery. But I came near refusing you pas- 
sage with me, after all, and if I had, your invest- 
ment would have been fruitless, my son, would it 
not ? ” 

“Oh, perhaps; but in that case I should have 


THE TREASURE BROUGHT BY THE INDIANS. 205 

given the things to some one of the sailors, so they 
would not have been wasted. ’ ’ 

“ Answered like a most generous prince,” re- 
joined Columbus; “and I doubt not you would 
have done so, my son: But, now to make a con- 
fession — I am most heartily rejoiced that I let thee 
and young Pablo come with me, for you both have 
served me better than any man aboard my vessels. 
Now, as a small token of my regard, I shall allow 
you both to barter to the extent of your possessions, 
and if so be thou gettest so much as might gladden 
the eyes of thy royal sire, do thou present them to 
him with the compliments of one who would have 
served him, had not Fortune ordered otherwise.” 

“ Thanks, your Excellency. And I trust Fortune 
may be kinder to you in the future than it has been 
in the past, and that you may not again go begging 
from court to court, with a world to offer for 
royalty to spurn. When I am king, — if ever that 
eventually come to pass, — I shall remember the les- 
son of your life and I trust be a better king than 
otherwise I might have been. ’ ’ 

“Would it had been my fortune to find one like 
thee upon the throne, ’ ’ rejoined Columbus with a sigh. 
“But I was in God’s hands; He hath done with 
me what was best in His eyes. What I have done 


206 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


was fore-ordered from the beginning of the world. 
It sufficeth me that I have done my best, always, 
having in view only what God would have me do. 
We mortals are but emanations of the Spirit; 
human pride and earthly vanity, — what are they? 
Yerily, naught in the sight of Him who hath sent 
me on this voyage and made me the instrument of 
His will. I have but one purpose in gaining such 
wealth as may accrue from this voyage, and may- 
hap from other voyages to the Hew World, and 
that is to accumulate enough to equip an army for 
the deliverance of the Holy Sepulcher of Christ, 
which is in Jerusalem, from the hands of the in- 
fidel Mohammedan. That fortune once acquired, 
and that purpose accomplished, it will appear to 
me that my work was well and truly done; not 
before. ’ ’ 

4 4 Perchance, ’ ’ suggested Adolfo timidly, 4 4 there 
may be a work of the kind to do here, for verily 
these people are pagans and have never yet heard 
the name of God or of the Son. They live in sin, 
as we regard their lives, and what could be better 
than their conversion to the true and only Faith? ” 

4 4 True, thou sayest well, ’ ’ answered the Admiral. 
44 And I have thought upon this, believe me. But 
as thou can see, my men are unruly and almost all 


THE TREASURE BROUGHT BY THE INDIANS. 20? 

licentious, evil-minded, looking only to the gratifica- 
tion of their lusts. And again, there is no holy 
man, no religious teacher amongst us, who can turn 
these people aright. On my next voyage, I shall 
insist upon a religious teacher accompanying me, 
that the Indians may be converted and their souls 
saved from perdition.” 

There is little doubt of the integrity of the Ad- 
miral’s intentions ; but History has shown that, if 
he later held to them, they were grossly perverted ; 
for within a few years after this first visit to His- 
paniola, nearly all the innocent Indians had been 
murdered, by Spaniards under the command of 
Columbus himself and those who followed in his 
track. Barbarities unspeakable were committed; 
this same generous king, Guacanagari, who had re- 
ceived the Spaniards with such hospitality, was slain, 
his village destroyed and his people massacred; 
and all for the love of, and in pursuit of, gold, the 
first grains of which he gave the Spaniards. 

But let us not anticipate events. Turn, rather, 
to the little group on the deck of the caravel, and 
witness the joy of Pablo, as, having bartered his 
hawk-bell for a handful of gold-dust, he found 
himself richer than ever he had thought to be in 
his life. 


208 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


“ Why, your Excellency,” he joyfully exclaimed, 
holding out his treasure for inspection, U I could 
live a year on just what that poor savage has 
given me in exchange for my cascabel. ’ ’ 

“God willing,” said Columbus, “thou shalt 
gain enough to keep thee in comfort all thy life. 
So husband thy resources, for thou hast my per- 
mission to traffic to their full extent. And that is 
more than I shall allow the rest to do; though 
as to that matter, they are almost beyond my con- 
trol at present. But we shall see, we shall see, 
when the sovereigns are informed of what has tran- 
spired hitherto.” 

This conversation took place on the “Nina,” 
from which nearly all the crew had departed, in 
order to join the Indians in their festivities on 
shore. They could be seen scattered about on the 
beach and in the forest, dancing with the Indian 
maidens and drinking deeply with the men. At 
sight of them thus engaged, Columbus shook his 
head sorrowfully and bit his lips, for he well knew 
they were getting beyond his control. 


CHAPTER XIX. 


THE BOYS HELP BUILD A FOKT. 

Notwithstanding the kindness of the Indian king 
and his efforts in the direction of making Columbus 
forget his troubles, the desperate situation in which 
the Spaniards found themselves could not be 
ignored. There they were, nearly three thousand 
miles from home, the chief vessel of their fleet a 
wreck, and only one small caravel in which to es- 
cape from this wild country. The little “Nina” 
had her full complement of crew before the wreck 
occurred, so it would be impossible to take many 
more aboard, even for a voyage of short duration ; 
but for the homeward voyage across the great 
ocean, there was no room for more. Fortunately 
for Columbus, most of the men chose to stay be- 
hind, rather than return to Spain, moved to this 
decision by the delights of the climate, the abun- 
dance of tropical fruits, and the prospect of living 

amongst a people so kind and free from care as 
14 209 


210 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

were these Indians of Hispaniola. Taking them 
for celestial visitors, the Indians gave the Spaniards 
freely all they possessed, deeming themselves highly 
honored by the attentions of the latter. If they 
had but known, that the most of these strangers 
were men of mean birth and inclinations, that they 
were the very off-scourings of their country and far 
removed from beings whose attributes the poor 
aborigines attributed to them, there would have 
been a prompt revulsion of feeling; but for the 
present the white men and the Indians fraternized 
and got along very well together. Every hut was 
open to the strangers, every attention showered upon 
them ; so when Columbus asked for volunteers to 
garrison the fort he intended to build, there were 
more men offered than he could accept. He chose 
forty of the most turbulent, deeming himself fortu- 
nate in getting rid of them, and then proceeded to 
the construction of the fort. 

“ Son Adolfo,” he said to the Prince, one morn- 
ing, 4 4 there are so many advantages here that, after 
all, the disaster was perhaps a most fortunate one ; 
for it is certain that had not the ship been lost, I 
should never have come here, since the place is a 
large bay and so beset with reefs of rocks. Now, 
if I had wished to leave the men in these parts, I 


THE BOYS HELP BUILD A FORT. 211 

should never have been able to find a place so desi- 
rable for them ; nor could I have left them so well 
supplied with ammunition or provisions, or the 
means for their protection. Many of the crew have 
been entreating me to leave them here, and I have 
therefore determined that a strong fort shall be con- 
structed for their protection. 

“ What sayest thou, Infante ? Thou wouldst like 
also to remain ? Nay, nay, my son ; thou knowest 
not what thou sayest. Although thou art a passen- 
ger with me without my voluntary consent, yet I am, 
as I have already said, responsible to thy sire for 
thy safety. Nay, neither shalt thou nor the boy % 
Pablo remain, for this is no place for innocent 
youth. Seest thou not what excesses the men have 
engaged in already ? There will be fights and 
bickerings, perchance orgies and drunkenness. 
Though I shall leave in command one whom I have 
reason to believe I can trust, yet I dare not believe 
but that, he will have trouble in controling these 
men, whose passions are so easily excited and whose 
tendency to evil is strong. 

“ I do not think a fort is absolutely necessary to 
protect the men from these people of the Indian 
king, but he has told me that his territory is subject 
to incursions from a terrible chieftain who lives in 


212 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

the mountains, one Caonabo, a Caraib, or cannibal, 
an eater of human flesh, who suddenly descends 
upon these unprotected people and captures many, 
some of whom he devours, and the others takes with 
him to his stronghold to a fate worse than death. 

So it is right that a fort should be constructed 
for their defense against the man-eaters, and I shall 
store it with provisions and wines for above a year, 
and with seeds also, so that they may plant. And 
the boat of the ship shall be left with them, with a 
calker, a carpenter, a gunner, a cooper, and trained 
bowmen and arquebusiers as many as desire to stay, 
peradventure there be not above forty all told, as 
that will leave us just enough to fill the “ Nina” to 
overflowing. This is reckoning upon our not finding 
the 4 4 Pinta, ’ ’ which should be awaiting us some- 
where further along the coast. 

At thought of the 4 4 Pinta 5 ’ and her recreant cap- 
tain, Columbus frowned and sighed deeply; but 
said nothing to indicate what he had in his mind. 
Only it must be remembered, when it shall be seen 
later on that he did not commend the Pinzons to the 
favor of King Ferdinand, that he had great pro- 
vocation to denounce them, for not standing by him 
through all his troubles in America. 

The ten days that remained before Columbus took 


- THE BOYS HELP BUILD A FORT. 213 

his departure from Guarico were busy ones indeed. 
Every person of his command was actively at work 
at the construction of the fort, the site for which 
was a small hill that overlooked the harbor. Upon 
the summit of this hill a circular castle or martello 
tower was erected, made from the wreckage of the 
“ Santa Maria,” every plank and nail from which 
had been preserved and brought ashore. Upon the 
platform within the crenelated battlements the big 
lombards were mounted, pointing not only seaward 
but landward, and there was a magazine in the 
lower part well stored with powder. A deep moat 
was dug around the fort, which was filled with water 
from the sea and crossed by a drawbridge wholly 
controlled from within the structure, so that no hos- 
tile Indians could get in if the garrison were alert 
and watchful. As provisions were provided for a 
year — at the end of which Columbus fully expected 
to return — there was no concern on that score ; and 
besides, the friendly Indians would probably pro- 
vide food enough to last, so long as the Spaniards 
treated them well. The sequel showed that the 
Spaniards were soon at odds with the natives, ow- 
ing to their overbearing manners, their drunken- 
ness and lusts, and that the provisions were wasted 
in a few weeks or months ; but that was not the 


214 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


fault of the Admiral, who provided for every con- 
tingency except the very one that happened — the 
dissoluteness and the cruelty of the garrison. An 
experienced commander was furnished in the person 
of Don Diego de Arana, with Pedro Gutierrez sec- 
ond in command and Kodrigo de Escobedo third. 
They were cautioned to keep their men well under 
control, not to offend the natives in any particular, 
and above all to always maintain an attitude of 
defense. Columbus well knew what the tendency 
would be, in that land of loose living and sensual 
pleasures, amid a people who were always kind and 
ever thoughtless of the morrow, and his heart mis- 
gave him at the thought of what might happen were 
the garrison to become derelict in its duty to him- 
self and their sovereigns. 

While the fort was being constructed the boys 
worked cheerily with the rest, helping to carry the 
material from the beach to the hill, driving nails 
and even digging in the ditch or moat. They 
viewed its completion with intense satisfaction, 
and their only regret was that they could not re- 
main to share in its defense. But the Admiral’s 
word with them was law, even if it was not with 
most of the others, so they reluctantly returned 
to the shore and the caravel every night, not daring 


* THE BOYS HELP BUILD A FORT. 215 

to trust themselves with the men who were to com- 
pose the garrison, for fear they might be over-per- 
suaded and desert their kind commander. When the 
tower was finished it was a sight worth looking at, 
of a truth, as Columbus told the boys, and he and 
they were proud of this first fort ever erected in the 
New World for the defense of white men against 
the aborigines. It was about thirty feet high, and 
with the cannon peeping from its ramparts made a 
very gallant show, exciting the admiration of the 
Spaniards as well as the awe and respect of the 
natives. Having worked upon it for nine days 
with the best of its builders, the two boys were 
especially proud of the fortress-tower, as the first 
structure of the kind they had ever engaged in 
erecting, and they suggested to Columbus that it 
should have a name bestowed upon it worthy 
of the fort and the event that had called it into 
being. 

“In sooth, my young friends,” responded the 
Admiral when this subject was broached, “I have 
already decided upon a name that is most fitting, 
and that is La JLavidad (The Nativity), because, 
as you know, our coming ashore at this place, after 
the loss of our gallant ship, was on the morn of the 
day in which the blessed Christ was born. It may 


216 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

seem ill to consort with the memories of that glorious 
day in which our Saviour first appeared on earth, to 
name after it a fort for defense ; but I trust this fort 
may prove a refuge for our people and but the be- 
ginning of a settlement in which the teachings of 
Christ shall be taught the heathen.” 

“ Yes, that is good,” said Adolfo and Pablo in a 
breath, and reverently uncovering themselves. “It 
is Christmas Fort, indeed,” added Adolfo, “and 
also it might be called New Year’s Fort, as well, 
since we have been engaged, this first week of the 
new year, 1493, in erecting this tower of refuge in 
this barbarian country.” 

‘ ‘ That is true, ’ ’ mused Columbus ‘ c very true, 
indeed. The advent of the new year has found us 
well engaged ; and perhaps this work of our hands 
may prove a portent of coming good fortune, and 
be the end of our disasters. At least, we will hope 
so, and to the end that our home voyage shall be 
prosperous let us pray also that our return hither 
shall be swift and propitious. 

‘ ‘ Now for another day of trading with the natives. 
Gather ye all the gold ye can, for this will be the 
last opportunity. King Guacanagari hath promised 
me a feast for the morrow, and hath summoned 
hither all his caciques from the interior, with in- 


v THE BOYS HELP BUILD A FORT. 21 7 

structions for them to bring with them what gold 
they have on hand.” 

The feast prepared by the king on the succeeding 
day was even more bountiful than that with which 
he had greeted them on Christmas, but of the same 
character so far as its fruits and viands went. The 
king himself could hardly contain himself for grief 
over their departure, and the tears frequently started 
from his eyes as he alluded to that event. The 
Admiral was likewise affected, and when Guacana- 
gari took his new coronet of gold from his head and 
placed it upon that of his chief guest, they both 
were overcome and fell upon each other’s shoulders, 
weeping copiously. Each of the caciques assembled 
followed the example set them by their royal master, 
and when the feast was over there were at least a 
dozen golden coronets on the ground for Columbus 
to take with him aboard the caravel. Then the 
common people had brought all they could find of 
golden grains, dust and nuggets, so that the aspect 
of the place was that of a great fair or market, in 
which there was an exchange of presents instead of 
barter. Even in the extremity of his emotions, 
however, Columbus was careful not to bestow too 
many of his baubles upon the confiding natives, and 
thus was able to leave a large quantity of beads 


218 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


and bells for the garrison to use, since they were 
expected to discover and work the mines while he 
was away. For he had ever in mind that ‘ ‘ ton of 
gold” he had in imagination promised his sov- 
ereigns, and that thought was always uppermost. 

At last came the time of departure. The 
“Nina” lay off shore with sails bent and anchor 
apeak, awaiting only the signal. The last boat was 
on the strand, near it the Admiral, the boys and 
a few officials, with the crew that was to com- 
prise the garrison crowding around them. Those 
who were to depart were more affected than those 
who were to remain, for the latter were carried 
away and buoyed up by the prospect of unlimited 
leisure in this land of delights, of explorations and 
golden discoveries in the mountains. Well for 
them, perhaps, that they could not forecast the 
events of the next few months; for, anticipating 
the return of Columbus, we shall see that not one 
of this devoted garrison survived to welcome him 
when, in less than a year, he again anchored in this 
bay of Guarico. He then returned with a great 
fleet, filled with soldiers, provisions and munitions 
of war, with all the material for the founding of a 
settlement here. But instead of finding his garrison 
to welcome him, he saw only the smoking ruins of 


THE BOYS HELP BUILD A FORT. 


219 


the fort, found only one soldier, and that a dead 
one, — merely a bloated corpse floating at the river 
mouth. 

But at the time he left, on the fourth of January, 
1493, there was no hint of this coming disaster, 
when the cannibal chief of the mountains descended 
like a thunderbolt upon the little fort and, finding 
its garrison dispersed about the settlement, wreaked 
his wrath upon the Spaniards without their being 
able to withstand him. 


CHAPTER XX. 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 

There was one among the Spanish garrison left 
behind in the fort whom the boys were by no means 
sorry to part from, and that one was the common 
sailor who had fought with Adolfo at Palos. He 
had shipped on board the caravel, the “Nina,” so 
was not brought much in contact with the boys on 
the voyage, though once in a while he showed his 
hatred of them by unmistakable signs. He tried to 
get at them on the first landing at Guanahani, and 
again in Cuba begged his captain to allow him to 
accompany the expedition into the island which was 
commanded by Adolfo. But on both occasions he 
was thwarted by Columbus, who had gained an 
inkling of the situation and stood between him and 
his young friends. 

Fate had strangely separated the boys from their 
enemy, when, for the third time, an opportunity 

for coming together might have been afforded at 
220 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 


221 


the time of the wreck, for the man was detained 
on board the caravel when the boat was sent to the 
rescue, and not allowed to land until after the whole 
party had arrived. His being one of those told off 
to compose the garrison was another reason why 
Columbus would not allow either of the boys to be- 
long to this little party left alone in the wilderness; 
and to his credit be it recorded, he stood manfully 
by them all through this critical period. But at 
last, just as the boats were about to push off for the 
u Nina,” after the farewells had been said and the 
shore party had fallen back, the sailor burst through 
all restraint, and unable to command himself any 
longer, pounced upon Adolfo, with a snarl of rage. 
He seized him by the throat, by the force of his 
onset carrying him to the ground, and the lad, 
taken unawares as he was, might have suffered 
severely, or have lost his life, had not succor been at 
hand. Pablo was standing near him, as he rarely 
left Adolfo’s side; but what was his strength as 
against that of the burly ruffian who had borne his 
friend to the ground ? Fortunately, two or three 
Indians were also near, and at the orders of the 
Admiral, shouted from the boat a little way from 
shore, they threw themselves upon the sailor and 
tore him away. Adolfo rose somewhat bewildered, 


222 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

white with rage and shaking in every limb from the 
sudden shock, but he would have cast himself upon 
the sailor had not the Admiral restrained him by a 
stern command. 

“ No, no, Infante,” he shouted; “ do not engage 
with that ruffian now; it is beneath thee, son. 
Get into the boat by thy side and haste to the cara- 
vel, for the wind is rising and we must be off. I 
will settle with the man when I return, so leave it 
to me.” 

Much against his will, Adolfo followed his com- 
mander’s advice, and in silence stepped aboard the 
remaining boat which was awaiting the remnants of 
the party. The others followed, and the craft was 
pushed off for the caravel. Then the Indians re- 
leased the man, who, at first speechless from rage, 
shouted after the departing boat, ‘ ‘ Go, go, ye cow- 
ards ; but remember I have comrades here, and if 
yon craven foreigner who has brought us to this 
state of misery ever does return, he will not find 
many friends awaiting him. Oh, yes, we will col- 
lect the ton of gold for our masters, but they shall 
never see it, mark my words, dog of a foreigner. ’ ’ 

“Hush, miscreant,” said Captain Diego de 
Arana, running up and striking him across the 
mouth. “ You know not what you say.” As for 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 223 

Columbus, on hearing these mutinous words he was 
at first for going back to bind the man and take 
him home in chains; but second thought showed 
him the peril of it, and so he continued for the cara- 
vel. Still, the rash words of the sailor showed him 
the mutinous spirit of the men he had left ashore to 
found the first settlement in America, for not one 
of the others there but had tacitly sanctioned the 
hasty speech. Only Diego de Arana, the com- 
mander, had resented them, and he, perhaps, more 
on account of his position than from any inclination 
to befriend Columbus. So it was in sadness and 
silence that the Admiral boarded the “ Nina,” and, 
after seeing that all those destined to return with 
him were there, gave the order to sail. 

The spirits of the party were somewhat restored 
when, as the 4 4 Nina ’ 5 slowly made her way out of the 
harbor, a lombard from the fort sent out a salute 
enveloping the tower in a volume of smoke, and 
showed that Commander Arana had the men under 
sufficient discipline to tender his superior the proper 
courtesies. The salute was answered by a discharge 
of cannon from the caravel, which awoke the echoes 
of the shore and carried terror to the savages lurk- 
ing in the forests back of Guarico. As the point 
was rounded which would conceal the Indian set- 


224 : 


A VOYAGE WITH COLTJMEtiS. 


tlement from sight, a last view was obtained of King 
Guacanagari and his retinue, still grouped on the 
beach and gazing after the caravel as if loath to 
lose her. 

The wind was baffling and the 4 4 Kina ’ ’ made little 
headway until the afternoon, by night arriving 
under the lee of a great, tent-shaped mountain, 
where, as the harbor was good, anchor was cast 
and everything made snug. Crowded as she was, 
with many more than the complement of her crew, 
the quarters aboard the caravel were far from com- 
fortable, and, as the wind drew ahead and prevented 
further passage around the mountain promontory, 
two days were spent in the harbor putting things 
to rights. The mountain, with its tent-shaped or 
triangular top, was called Monte Cristi by Colum- 
bus, and this name it still bears and may be identi- 
fied by it to-day on any map of Haiti and the 
north coast of Santo Domingo. On the third day, 
after rounding the promontory, a glad surprise was 
the reward of this devoted crew, for a sailor on 
watch at the mast-head proclaimed a vessel in the 
distance which he thought must be the 4 4 Pinta. ’ ’ 
And sure enough, so it proved to be, for that rec- 
reant vessel soon came bearing down upon the 
4 4 Kina” with all sails set and a fair, fresh breeze 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 225 

behind her. Then there were many and happy 
greetings exchanged between the two vessels when 
they approached near enough to hail each other ; 
but we may be sure that among them those between 
Columbus and Captain Martin Alonzo were none 
of the heartiest. The former recalled the circum- 
stances under which Captain Pinzon had deserted 
his fleet on the coast of Cuba, while the latter had 
good cause to believe he had committed the unpar- 
donable sin and would never be forgiven by his 
superior officer in command. And so it was, for 
while Columbus thought it expedient to temporize 
at that time, he cherished a grudge against Martin 
Alonzo Pinzon which was never effaced and which 
blighted his future fortunes. 

But, as Martin Alonzo was master of the ‘ ‘ Pinta ’ ’ 
and his brother Yicente captain of the “ Nina,” the 
only vessels remaining, in which the voyage back to 
Spain must be accomplished, the Admiral avoided 
a controversy off the coast of Hispaniola, and nursed 
his wrath until a more favorable moment should ar- 
rive for redress. Once again together, the two ves- 
sels kept company until separated by a storm off 
the coast of Spain or Portugal ; though the ‘ ‘ Pinta 5 ’ 
was the first to arrive at Palos with news of the 
discovery. 

J5 


226 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


Although Captain Martin Alonzo tried to make 
out that he was driven out of his course and away 
from the fleet by a storm, and could not regain it, 
Columbus shrewdly surmised that there were other 
reasons for his conduct, as there really were. In 
fact, the real reason for his departure was found in 
the information he had received from an Indian of 
Cuba of the region in which the gold was to be ob- 
tained, and he had set sail for it in advance of 
Columbus, hoping to enrich himself and his men 
before the Admiral should arrive. From the rev- 
elations of his crew, the people who had stayed with 
Columbus learned that every man of his company 
had a goodly quantity of the precious metal, the 
master himself having acquired as much, probably, 
as Columbus had been able to get, with all his ad- 
vantage in bartering with the king. 

It was while the 4 4 Nina ’ ’ was wind-bound at 
Monte Cristi, one day, as the men were filling their 
water casks at the mouth of a river near that where 
the Spaniards discovered the first signs of gold in 
its place of deposit. As they were rolling the casks 
out of the water they observed thousands of glitter- 
ing particles attached to the iron hoops, and follow- 
ing up this clew they found that the sands of the river 
were filled with gold. Then all the men were set 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 227 

at work washing the golden sands, with such suc- 
cess that Columbus was moved to call the stream the 
4 4 Rio del Oro ,” or the River of Gold, which name 
it retained for many years after. It is now known 
as the Yaqui, and is one of the most important 
streams in the island, the headwaters of which are 
still celebrated for their deposits of gold. The next 
year, after his return from Spain with a large fleet, 
Columbus sent an exploring party up the banks of 
the Yaqui, commanded by a celebrated Spanish 
cavalier, and containing mounted men. The horses 
these men rode were the first the natives of the New 
"World ever saw, and they were frightened nearly 
to death, falling down in terror and worshipping 
them as deities. 

The two days spent at the mouth of the golden 
river were delightful ones to all the men, as well as 
to the boys, for though the time was mainly spent 
in washing the sands and collecting its precious 
particles, there was leisure enough for recreation. 
They fished in the waters of the bay, they swam in 
the protected pools behind the coral reefs, and made 
short excursions into the woods that lined the shore. 
Finding an abandoned canoe floating at the river 
mouth, Pablo and Adolfo extemporized paddles from 
some driftwood on the beach and pushed up the 


228 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


stream among the reeds and rushes, where they 
saw much to astonish and attract them. As they 
were penetrating a veritable jungle of tall reeds and 
grasses, at some distance from the sea, they sud- 
denly saw rise before them a big round head with a 
face resembling (they thought) that of a human 
being. It had bright black eyes, a smooth and 
shining skin and yellow bristles or hairs around its 
mouth. 

Pablo saw it first, being in the prow parting the 
reeds that impeded their course. “ Oh, look, 
Adolfo! See that monster right ahead. Quick, 
back the canoe, or it may devour us ! ’ ’ 

Adolfo did as ordered, but not before he had 
gratified his curiosity by a long look at the animal, 
which reared its big head above the water and gazed 
at them as if quite as astonished at sight of them 
as they were at this wonderful apparition. 

“ What is it, Adolfo? Did you ever see its like 
before?” 

“ No, never. I don’t know. But we had better 
get back to the shore if it will let us, and ask the 
Admiral. He knows everything, and perhaps can 
tell us what it is. It must be one of the great sea 
monsters that the ancient books make mention of, 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 229 

and which are so terrible when aroused. I only 
hope it will not pursue us, Pablo.” 

The monster did not follow them, but soon sank 
beneath the water and disappeared. As the water 
was deep, though the channel was narrow, the boys 
were fearful that it might rise beneath the canoe 
and destroy it, so they made all haste for the river 
mouth, where, once arrived, they sought Columbus 
and told him of their adventure. 

44 What say you? ” he asked. 44 It had big eyes 
and a human face? Then surely it must be a mer- 
maid or a merman, of which I have read, and which 
I fully expected to find in this locality. Let me 
into the canoe, lads, and we will go in search of it, 
for verily I would like to see one of those creatures 
with my own eyes.” 

4 4 Hadn’t we better take an arquebuse or a har- 
poon?” asked Pablo. 4 4 It might attack us, you 
know, and as we are now we are defenseless.” 

44 Eight thou art, lad,” assented Columbus. 
44 Ho there, men, one of you bring me an arque- 
buse, and perchance there be one, also a lance or 
harpoon, with a long line attached. ’ ’ 

It took some time to find a lance and equip it as 
a harpoon by attaching a line to its staff ; but after a 


230 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

while all was ready and the trio set off up stream 
in the crazy canoe on their perilous errand. As the 
men saw them depart some of them shook their 
heads, and one exclaimed under his breath : 
“ Truly, the Admiral sometimes acts like a loco (a 
crazy man). Ah me, I only hope he will bring us 
safe home again ; but I have doubts ! ’ ’ 

“Aye, doubts many,” said another, rising from 
his bent posture over the dish in which he was 
washing out the gold; — “doubts many well we 
may have after what we have observed of his 
actions. But still, he has been fair with us, treat- 
ing nearly all alike. ’ ’ 

There was a chorus of dissent from the company ; 
but Columbus heard it not, for he was by this time 
far up the stream. Arrived at or near the spot 
where the monster had been first observed, the 
canoe was moved cautiously through the reeds, 
while three pairs of eyes searched the clear water 
for signs of the aquatic creature. 

“ There he is,” cried Adolfo, — “there, right 
ahead, down by that clump of water plants, which 
he seems to be tearing up by the roots! ” The 
Admiral grasped the arquebuse, while Pablo poised 
the lance, and Adolfo carefully paddled to a posi- 
tion nearly above the monster, which seemed to be 


ON THE RIVER OF GOLDEN SANDS. 


231 


about ten feet in length. ‘ 4 Look out ! He is com- 
ing up ! ” shouted Adolfo, who was keeping watch. 
He had no sooner said this, than up bobbed a round, 
shiny head, so close to the bow of the canoe that 
Columbus might have touched it. 


CHAPTER XXI. 


A 4 4 MONSTER OF THE DEEP. ’ 5 

The Admiral was so astonished at the sudden ap- 
pearance of the water animal that he fell back in 
the canoe, at the same time losing his grip on the 
arquebuse, which dropped into the water and was 
lost to sight. The canoe was nearly overturned, 
also, and the boys had all they could do to preserve 
its balance and prevent the water from coming over 
the rail. Soon as the disturbance had subsided, all 
eyes were turned in search of the object that had 
caused this consternation, and it was discovered 
that the creature had not been frightened, but was 
calmly grazing among the reeds, its smooth, round 
head being visible only a few feet away. It had 
probably never seen a white person before, if in- 
deed any human being, and so was not aware of 
the danger it ran in allowing a man so near. 

Whatever kind of monster it was, it was an in- 
offensive one, to all appearances, and the invaders 
232 


A “ MONSTER OF THE DEEP. 


233 


of its domain really had no excuse for attacking it ; 
but they were excited, and Pablo, who had pre- 
served his equanimity, as soon as he got a good 
sight of the head amongst the reeds, let drive the 
lance with a line attached to its haft, after the 
manner of a harpoon. He aimed at the neck, 
just back of the base of the head, and the lance 
went true to its mark, as was quickly proved by the 
great commotion that ensued. No sooner had the 
weapon struck the creature, than it made a plunge 
for the bottom of the river, carrying out the line 
at a rapid rate, then swam swiftly toward the sea. 
The iine was not long enough to give “play,” as 
is done in whaling, and the front end of the canoe 
was drawn under water, at times, so that it was 
with a perfect cataract playing over the bows that 
the little craft started off on its perilous voyage. 
Hollowed from a log hewn from some great tree 
of the forest, the canoe was not the stanchest of 
craft imaginable, and in point of fact was extreme- 
ly “cranky,” so it was with considerable diffi- 
culty that its passengers kept it from tipping over. 
They huddled together amidships — or Columbus 
and Pablo did — holding to the rail on either side, 
while Adolfo put forth his best efforts at steering 
with the paddle, himself crouched in the stern. 


234 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


This arrangement brought the bows higher up, out 
of the water ; but such was the great strength of 
the creature that was towing them, the canoe was 
nearly swamped by the waves that came in every 
now and then. 

Everything had transpired so suddenly that the 
affrighted occupants of the canoe had spoken not a 
word; but after they were well on their trip 
Columbus ventured to remark upon the vast size 
and strength of the animal, and expressed a fear 
that it might take them out to sea amongst the 
breakers on the reefs. 

“ And the line is so short,” wailed poor Pablo, 

‘ 4 that we cannot go much farther without being 
drawn under water. I pray the saints that we go 
not far.” 

“ Cut it! cut it!” exclaimed Adolfo. “Is 
there not a knife aboard ? ’ ’ 

“ A good suggestion,” said the Admiral approv- 
ingly ; ‘ ‘ but a quick search showed that there was 
no knife, sword, or cutting instrument of any sort 
on board the canoe.” 

“ Oh, if I had not allowed the sneers of the men 
to make me put off my good keen blade,” said 
Adolfo. “They said I always had it on my hip, 
you know, and appeared as if going about looking 


A “ MONSTER OF THE DEEP.” 235 

for a quarrel ; so I put it aside, and have left it on 
the caravel . 5 5 

“ And I, too,” muttered Columbus, “so much 
gave attention to the criticisms of my men as 
to the wearing of a sword continually that I did 
likewise. After this, God willing, I will do as I 
wist, and pay heed to no man’s remarks. But what 
we do must transpire quickly, for we are now 
drenched to the skin, and verily the speed of the 
monster has by no means abated. ’ ’ 

Fortunate, it seemed to the canoe’s frightened 
passengers, that the course taken by the creature 
led quite near to the river bank on which the men 
were engaged in washing out the gold, else there 
might have been a more disastrous ending to this 
extraordinary voyage. These men heard the shouts 
sent up from the canoe and were amazed to discover 
their Admiral and the two boys gliding swiftly 
past them in mid-stream, in that crazy old craft, 
hurried forward as if upon the top of a wave, and 
with no visible means of propulsion. 

6 ‘ Haste, my men, haste ! ’ ’ cried Columbus. 

‘ ‘ Put out the boat and head us off. Bring, too, 
some arquebuses and long ropes, for we are in the 
grasp of a monster of the deep, which is taking us 
to its lair. ’ ’ 


236 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


The astonished men ashore dropped their pans 
and hastened for a boat, which they launched with 
celerity and rowed with all speed seaward, so as to 
cut athwart the course taken by the canoe. But 
with all their efforts they could not attain the pace 
taken by the monster, and constantly fell behind. 
Seeing this, the Admiral shouted as if in a forlorn 
hope, “ Keep as close as you can, my men, perad- 
venture we be spilled into the sea you may pick 
us up before the sharks scent us as prospective 
prey.” 

“Aye, aye, sir, trust us to do our best,” 
shouted the captain of the boat, while the men at 
the oars strained every nerve. But, despite their 
utmost endeavors, they continued to fall back, un- 
til there was a great space between the boat and 
the canoe. 

They were now out in the open bay, and the 
reefs were not far away, over which rolled immense 
breakers tipped with foam. The roar of the 
breakers sounded in the ears of the helpless voy- 
agers, and, though they said nothing, each one 
knew the peril they were in. 

“ But look! ” shouted Adolfo, who had main- 
tained as well as he could his position as helmsman ; 
<£ Look, there is a canoe coming to our rescue. It 


A “MONSTER OF THE DEEP.” 23 ? 

is well ahead, and aims to cut us off before we 
reach the reefs.” 

“Which may the Almighty grant! ” murmured 
Columbus, crossing himself devoutly. 

“In it is an Indian,” exclaimed Pablo. “It 
is Juan, our friend from the Lucayos. See his 
mighty arms strain at the paddle ; see him bend to 
his work, with all the strength in his frame. At 
all events, we shall be saved, because even if we 
are stranded and cast into the breakers, he will at 
once be there to pick us up.” 

“For this deliverance, may the great God be 
praised! ” said Columbus, and the boys added a 
fervent 4 4 amen ! ’ ’ 

The Indian approached diagonally across their 
course, his canoe propelled by mighty sweeps of his 
paddle, and the foam flying like mist from its prow. 
A shout went up ab his approach, but he seemed to 
heed it not, every fiber of his body being taut and 
tense, the perspiration glittering in beady drops on 
his skin of golden bronze. 

44 Ah, but he is magnificent! ” exclaimed the 
Admiral in admiration. 44 Yerily, it is almost 
worth this experience to witness such an exhibition 
of skill, such a glorious sight.” 

The approaching canoe swept on, described a 


238 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


curve as it shot athwart their course, and bringing 
up against the bow of the captive canoe, at that in- 
stant a sinewy arm shot out and a glittering blade 
severed the line that connected with the monster. 
The canoes kept on a moment together, then were 
swerved shoreward by deft manipulation of the 
paddles, and were soon in calm water, safe from the 
breakers that howled and foamed on the reefs, 
scarce a hundred yards away. 

“ A gallant rescue,” exclaimed Columbus, as he 
was being assisted into the Indian’s canoe. “ Tell 
him, Infante,” he added, when he was seated, 

4 ‘ that I shall reward him richly when we return 
to Spain ; that my sovereigns will make him great 
and wealthy.” 

When this was interpreted to the Indian he spread 
out his hands deprecatingly and assured the youth 
that he desired no reward. ITe was glad he could 
have been of service to the great Admiral, whom he 
had grown to love as well as respect, having ob- 
served his consideration of King Guacanagari and 
his subjects, and his tender regard for his men. 

“ But what was this monster ? ” demanded Co- 
lumbus. “ Ask him, my son, what it was that 
towed us out to sea and showed such mighty strength. 
It must have been a mermaid or a merman ; per- 


A “MONSTER OF THE DEEP.” 239 

chance it was one of those great chimeras dire of 
which the ancients have left ns records, and if so we 
have indeed had a narrow escape from a most 
dreadful fate, for they inhabit in the deeps of the 
sea and drag men down to destruction, sometimes 
by alluring them thither with their siren songs.” 

The Indian laughed, when the Admiral’s observa- 
tion was explained to him. “No,” he said, “it 
was not a monster of the deep at all. It was a most 
harmless, inoffensive animal that inhabits the rivers 
of this coast, as well as the coast of Cuba. It is 
called the maniti , and is like a great man-fish, with 
mild eyes and breasts like those of a human being. 
It may be as long as this canoe, and its hide is 
tough like the leather of which you make the armor 
in which your soldiers are encased. ’ ’ 

“ Not a mermaid, nor a monster of the deep ? ” 
ejaculated Columbus, when the Indian’s description 
was given him. “ Well, but it was a creature new 
to us, and I do wish we had seen it.” 

Then the Indian told the boys, as they floated 
along together toward the shore, that the natives of 
this island sometimes tamed the manatis so that they 
came at call, and as a friendship was established be- 
tween them, and the creatures feared not man and 
never attacked human beings, being animals that 


240 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


fed on grasses and roots, though amphibious and 
rarely departing from the water. In a little 
pond ashore, he told them, he had been informed 
there was a manati so tame that it came at its 
master’s call and even allowed his children to float 
about on its back. But its strength is prodigious 
and when excited it had been known to smash ca- 
noes, but never to attack man, having a mouth fitted 
only for feeding as it did, and not for biting or 
destroying. 

At all this the Admiral wondered, and when he 
had regained the caravel he lost no time in putting 
it down in the journal he was writing for the King 
and Queen of Spain. 

At last the wind hauled around to a favorable 
point, and, the sands having been deprived so far as 
possible of their golden treasure, Columbus gave the 
order to hoist sail and continue on the cruise along 
the coast. The next day sighting the ‘ ‘ Pinta, ’ ’ and 
after a consultation keeping her company over a 
course she had somewhat explored, a country was 
descried so beautiful that the Admiral was enamored 
of it. They left the port of Monte Cristi at mid- 
night on the ninth of January, 1493, and went in 
search of c ‘ Babeque, ’ ’ the true land of gold ; or as 
Guacanagari had called it, “ Cibao,” which name is 


A “MONSTER OF THE DEEP.” 241 

still applied to the region interior from this coast. 
This name Columbus confounded with the “Cipan- 
go ” of Marco Polo, and really thought the two 
identical ; but in after years found it not so. 

“This country beyond Monte Cristi,” wrote Co- 
lumbus in his diary, 4 4 is level and beautiful, with tall 
mountains in the interior reminding me of the sier- 
ras of Cordova in Spain, and the whole aboundeth 
in streams and offereth views of such variety that 
the thousandth part cannot be described.” They 
crossed a deep bay, in the course of this cruise, 
which was destined to become historic, for it was 
on the shore of it, one year later, that Columbus 
founded the first European city in the New World, 
Isabella, the ruins of which are yet to be seen amid 
the tangle of tropic trees that has grown up 
around and covered it. The writer has spent a 
week on its site, searching for relics of that time so 
far distant in the past, and, like the two boys 
whose adventures we are following, he was charmed 
with its scenery. 

The Lucayan was drawn to Columbus, as we have 
seen, by his tender regard for the Indians whom he 
first met in America ; but if he had accompanied the 
Admiral on his second voyage, when he sent his 
captains into the country to subdue the natives, he 
16 


242 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

could not but have changed his opinion. For, after 
the site for Isabella was chosen in December, 1493, 
and after the buildings were under construction, 
Columbus despatched armed bodies of soldiers, in- 
fantry and cavalry, armed with arquebuses and clad 
in steel armor, to search out the land of gold and 
bring the natives under subjection. These captains 
were brave but cruel, and hesitated at no kind of 
torture by which to induce the poor Indians to give up 
their accumulations of gold. The natives were of 
the same sort as Guacanagari’s people, gentle, con- 
fiding, unused to war, and at first received the Span- 
iards with generous hospitality, but finally the 
cruelties of the invaders drove them to declare war 
against them, and then they mercilessly slaughtered 
them. They could make no stand against the mail- 
clad cavaliers comprising the commands of Colum- 
bus, for they were armed only with bows, arrows 
and spears, which were of no avail in opposition to 
arquebuses and cannon. As if it were not enough 
to mow down the naked Indians by means of steel 
and gunpowder, the Spaniards used packs of fierce 
bloodhounds, which sprang upon the poor wretches 
and tore them limb from limb. So it came to pass 
that the beautiful island which Columbus had dis- 
covered in peace and happiness, was in a short time 


A “ MONSTER OF THE DEEP.” 243 

converted into an inferno of slaughter and blood- 
shed, thousands of Indians being killed and their 
lands made desolate. These terrible deeds took 
place the year after the first voyage and in years 
succeeding ; but it was the first voyage, on which 
the boys sailed, that led up to it. 


CHAPTER XXII. 


FIRST FIGHT WITH THE CARIBS. 

Thus far, though there had been many private 
quarrels with the Indians, owing to the proneness of 
the Spanish sailors to indulge in the strong drinks 
of the country, not much blood had been shed, 
either of white man or of Indian. But the voyage 
was not to end without at least one sanguinary en- 
counter, and this took place but a few days before 
Columbus finally left the island and steered for 
Spain. Sailing leisurely along the north coast, 
tempted by its beauty to land at many points and 
explore the fascinating forests that lined the shores, 
yet feeling unprepared for such attempts, Columbus 
entered and investigated all the harbors that 
seemed to him likely to afford good sites for future 
settlements. Among these there was one of sur- 
passing loveliness, situated at the foot of a high 
mountain which, from its summit having a wreath 
of white clouds nearly always around it, he called 

m 


FIRST FIGHT WITH THE CARIBS. 245 

Puerto de Monte Plata, the Port of the Silver 
Mountain, now known as Puerto Plata, one of the 
finest settlements in Santo Domingo. He found 
here a good harbor with great depth of water, and 
was strongly inclined to leave some sailors as the- 
nucleus for a settlement ; but he resisted the incli- 
nation and sailed onward, passing a great promon- 
tory, which he named Enamorado, and which is 
now called Ballandra, or the Head of the Whale. 
It is a magnificent headland, scarped as though 
hewn out artificially, with projecting rocks behind 
which Columbus found shelter from a storm. 

Here was a bay of exceeding beauty, crescent- 
shaped, with beaches of silver sands o’ertopped by 
golden palms, and so inviting of aspect that the 
Admiral could not withstand the temptation to rest 
awhile and recuperate in preparation for the long 
voyage ahead of him. So he ordered the 4 4 Pinta ’ ’ 
to sail in company with the 44 Nina ” as closely as 
possible to the beach and cast anchor behind a 
group of islets that lay in the middle of the bay. 

Several days were passed here, during which the 
sailors were busy in mending the sails, filling the 
water casks, repairing the boats, and furbishing up 
their arms. Exploring parties were sent inland as 
far as they dare venture in search of provisions, 


246 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


for Columbus had found the native vegetables, like 
the yucca, Indian corn, aje, etc., to be agreeable 
substitutes for the dried meats, and secured all he 
could of them, wherever discovered. 

Adolfo was in command of one party and Yicente 
Yanez Pinzon, captain of the “Mna,” in com- 
mand of the other, and there was quite a spirit of 
rivalry between them as to which should show the 
better results of their foraging. While Pinzon was 
the better sailor, still he was more at home at sea 
than on land, and the young Prince was the more 
expert swordsman and adventurous leader, so he 
penetrated farther into the forest than the other 
and held his little band compactly together. Pin- 
zon, on the contrary, lingered near the shore, with 
an occasional foray into the forest ; but his men 
strayed about at their sweet will, and accomplished 
nothing more than the finding of a small collection 
of Indian huts, which they ravaged of their stores 
of fruits and vegetables, greatly to the indignation 
of their owners, who were incited thereby to re- 
venge. 

The men broke for the forest, and some of the 
women and children, though a few of the latter re- 
mained behind and were maltreated by the Span- 
iards, who reasoned rashly that they were soon to 


FIRST FIGHT WITH THE CARIBS. 247 

depart, never to return, and could safely commit 
such depredations as they pleased. This was a 
false assumption, of course, and directly contrary to 
the Admiral’s orders ; but little cared the rude sail- 
ors for that. 

One thing they neglected to note, and that was 
the difference between these people found here and 
those they had recently left at Guarico. The latter 
were gentle by nature and inoffensive, enduring 
great indignities rather than fight ; while these were 
of a fiercer aspect, stronger of build and better 
armed. JSTo sooner, in fact, did the cries of the 
wounded women and children reach the savages 
who had fled to the forest than they answered by a 
war-cry that sent a shiver of surprise, almost of ter- 
ror, through the brutal Spaniards. The cry was 
taken up throughout the forest and along the shore, 
until the air resounded with it, so that the Spaniards 
knew hardly what to do. In a short time, indeed, 
the savage warriors began to appear, at first in little 
detached groups of half a dozen or so, then in larger 
bands, until their number had swelled to more than 
a hundred and they showed an inclination for ag- 
gressive attack. They came on boldly, at last, led 
by a huge warrior of extremely savage aspect, 
flocking from all directions, until the Spaniards 


248 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

were entirely surrounded. Accustomed as the latter 
were to dealing with the inoffensive Indians of the 
other end of the island, they expected these to dis- 
perse at the first signs of attack, and so Captain 
Pinzon ordered two of his arquebusiers to fire off 
their guns. They did so, and the smoke and noise 
startled the savages visibly ; but beyond bolting in 
the direction of the forest a short distance they gave 
no other manifestation of alarm, returning directly 
the smoke had subsided and the echoes of the re- 
ports had ceased. It seemed, indeed, as though the 
reports of the guns had let loose a pack of demons, 
who sprang up on all sides as if from the earth, and 
advanced without fear to dislodge their enemies 
from their position. Their yells of fury resounded 
among the rocks and trees, and as they were en- 
tirely naked, with their bodies painted in various 
colors, they presented an aspect that might have 
daunted the bravest hearts, let alone the rascally 
sailors, timorous by nature and without any feeling 
of right to back them up. They were the aggres- 
sors and they knew it ; they had abused the hospi- 
tality of these people and had no claim upon their 
regard, so if the savages persisted in their hostility 
the fight must be to a finish, and victory belong to 
the bravest. 


FIRST FIGHT WITH THE CARIBS. 243 

The Spaniards had the advantage in point of 
arms, having their arquebuses and crossbows, 
swords and lances ; while the Indians were armed 
only with war-clubs, wooden swords, lancewood 
bows and arrows made of reeds. But the clubs 
were as hard as iron and the swords of iron wood 
almost as sharp as if they had been of steel. With 
one of the swords a savage more venturesome than 
the rest suddenly smote a Spaniard over his head 
and cleft his helmet through as if it had been paper, 
cutting his skull almost to the brains, and with one 
of the war-clubs another savage giant crushed a 
sailor to the ground. The weapons of the Span- 
iards may have been more terrible than those of the 
Indians, but the spirit of the latter was invincible. 
Though the Spaniards knew it not at first, they 
were then opposing the fierce Caribs, the cannibal 
man-eaters, of whom they had heard the Guarico 
Indians speak with awe and dread. They were 
comparatively new arrivals in Hispaniola, having 
come up from the Caribbee islands in their war 
canoes, being venturesome sailors as well as fight- 
ers. Finding the country to their liking, they had 
sent for their wives and children and had formed a 
settlement at this spot, from which they were 
gradually extending over the island. 


250 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

“ Verily, men,” spake np doughty Vicente Pin- 
zon, “ these bedevils let loose from hell, methinks; 
but devils or no, our only hope is to overcome them 
and beat a retreat to the ships. So charge your 
arquebuses, my arquebusiers ; let fly your arrows, 
gallant crossbowmen ; and ye swordsmen, give 
them a taste of your steel ! ” 

The firearms spake again, and this time with 
some effect; the crossbows shot their bolts into 
the serried ranks of the savages with yet better aim ; 
but the Indians still stood their ground, dauntless 
though amazed. They answered the reports of the 
guns and the twang of bowstrings with demoniac 
yells, the wounded tearing savagely at their wounds, 
only moved to increased fury, if possible, by the 
sight of blood. For indeed they were men used to 
bloodshed, reveling in it, living for little else than 
the gratifying of their instinct for carnage. They 
were willing to take as well as give ; but charge as 
they might against the Spanish phalanx, they could 
not find an opening for good work with their 
swords. 

Like the ancient Komans, their best work was at 
close quarters, and hitherto they had had their way 
with the un warlike Indians they had encountered. 
But these men, arrived as they believed from Heav- 


FIRST FIGHT WITH THE CARIBS. 251 

en by way of the sea, were beyond their compre- 
hension. Still, they were undaunted, believing as 
they did that death in battle was more glorious than 
a life of ease, and that they would be carried to para- 
dise directly from the field of strife. The chieftain 
of the band, a huge Carib over six feet tall, re- 
minded his men of this, promising them all sorts of 
celestial delights if they fell, and the booty of the 
enemy if they prevailed. He himself set the ex- 
ample, and seemed to have a charmed life, for he 
evaded the shots and blows that were aimed at him 
and almost reached the Spanish commander with his 
ponderous club. 

The day was hot and the Spaniards, little used to 
exertion of such violence, were beginning to waver ; 
while the enemy seemed to increase in number and 
to receive new vigor from their terrific onslaughts. 
Back to back, stubbornly contesting the Indian ad- 
vance, the Spaniards fought with all their might ; 
this must be said to their credit, though they fought 
in a losing cause. But they could not last long at 
this rate, and Commander Pinzon began to cast 
about for some way of retreat. He hoped, almost 
against hope, that the noise of the engagement 
might be heard at the bay and some reinforcements 
be sent him; but a steep hill intervened between 


£52 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

the scene of battle and the ships, so the sounds might 
be obstructed. 

There was one other chance for succor, however, 
which he had either overlooked or ignored, and that 
was from the other band led by Adolfo, which had 
gone he knew not whither. In point of fact, Cap- 
tain Pinzon did not share the Admiral’s belief in 
the Infante, and viewed his military acquirements 
with contempt. Columbus knew the stuff of which 
the boy was made and had every confidence in his 
ability ; a feeling he had arrived at much against 
his inclination — as we who have followed his career 
thus far know very well. But the stuff was in him 
of which heroes are made, and no sooner did he hear 
the sounds of battle, as he was leading his men 
through the forest on the further side of the hill, 
than he proposed to seek the scene of strife. 

‘ ‘ It may be nothing but a drunken frolic of the 
sailors,” he remarked to Pablo, who as usual was 
his lieutenant ; ‘ ‘ but if I mistake not, those savage 
yells portend something more than a mere drinking 
bout with the Indians. ’ ’ 

u So it seems to me,” answered the boy. “ At 
all events, we can go in that direction, for one way 
is good as another in this unknown wilderness, with- 
out roads or guides. ’ ’ Adolfo then put it to the 



Adolfo’s band opportunely appeared in the rear of the Indians and let 
fly a destructive discharge of crossbows and arquebuses.— Page 253. 

A Voyage with Columbus. 




FIRST FIGHT WITH THE CARIBS. 


253 


vote of the men, and they held with him that it 
might be well to investigate, so off they started in 
the direction of the noise. Gaining the crest of the 
hill, they were convinced, by the terrible tumult 
and uproar, that something more than ordinary was 
going on, and so were warned in advance. The 
forest was so dense, however, that they could see 
nothing of either Spaniards or Indians, so they felt 
their way foot by foot, until an opening presented 
through which a glimpse was obtained of the clear- 
ing in which stood the Indian huts. Then they saw 
what the matter was, and Adolfo formed his plans 
accordingly. He caused his men to make ready 
their arms, enjoining upon them the strictest caution 
and above all to keep silent until close upon and in 
the rear of the savages. 

Captain Pinzon’s command was well-nigh ex- 
hausted, and the story of this first fight with sav- 
ages in the Hew World might have had a different 
version, if Adolfo’s band had not so opportunely ap- 
peared in the rear of the Indians and let fly a de- 
structive discharge of crossbows and arquebuses. It 
ill accorded with Adolfo’s inclinations to thus attack 
a foe, without warning and by stealth; but he 
reasoned that his comrades were in peril, that they 
might succumb to the attack of the Indians without 


254 a Voyage with columbus. 

his aid, and this feeling overcame every other, with 
the result that the Spaniards were saved. For, at- 
tacked from behind, when they thought their only 
foe was in front, the Indians became panic-stricken 
and fled tumultuously. 

They left several wounded on the ground, who 
were cared for by Adolfo’s orders, and treated with 
such consideration that when let loose they hastened 
to their friends and told them of it. So the final 
result was the re-assembling of the Caribs, who, en- 
tertaining, as they did, a great respect for a worthy 
foe, soon came with signs of peace and offerings of 
amity. They even traded with the Spaniards the 
very bows, arrows and war-clubs with which a short 
time before they had so fiercely attacked them, and 
in the end there was peace and friendship between 
the erstwhile enemies. 

As for Captain Pinzon and his men : they could 
not at first believe they owed their rescue to the 
despised “ foreigner,” the youth with no appar- 
ent fortune but his sword ; but when they were con- 
vinced that such was the case, they experienced a 
complete revulsion of feelings and overwhelmed him 
with their protestations of gratitude. 


CHAPTER XXm. 


LOOKING FOE AMAZON ISLAND. 

On account of the many arrows found scattered 
over the ground after the encounter was over, Co- 
lumbus named the bay near which the fight took 
place, and in which his vessels lay all the time it 
was going on, la Bahiade las Flechas , or the Bay of 
Arrows. It may be located to-day, for it has ever 
since retained the name, on the west side of the 
great Gulf of Samana, which indents the north coast 
of Santo Domingo. This Gulf, or Bay, of Samana 
was at one time the subject of negotiation between 
the Dominicans and the Government of the United 
States, during the presidency of General Grant, and 
came very near becoming a possession of the great 
Republic founded so many years after Columbus 
showed the way to America. 

Samana is a magnificent body of water and its 
shores are very inviting, clad as they are in tropi- 
cal vegetation, ranks and rows of beautiful palm 
255 


256 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

trees standing guard over the fertile gardens of the 
natives. The peninsula of Samana is extremely at- 
tractive, from the diversity of its scenery, and its 
healthful location. The Indians of this region dis- 
appeared centuries ago, victims of the Spaniards’ 
cruelties, and now, strange to say, it is mainly oc- 
cupied by descendants of black people who were 
formerly slaves in the United States, liberated by 
philanthropists and colonized at Samana. 

The Spaniards hardly had time to gather up their 
wounded and collect their plunder, before the Caribs 
were again flocking around them; but this time 
with evident desire to greet them in a friendly spirit. 
The giant chief, who showed a severe wound in his 
right shoulder, strode ahead of his followers, bear- 
ing his ponderous war-club, his hair bedecked with 
parrot’s feathers of gaudy hue and his face painted 
with stripes of red and yellow. 

As he approached the Spaniards he placed his club 
on the ground, in token of his peaceful intentions, 
and all his men likewise laid down their arms, 
awaiting the decision of their former foes as to 
whether they would accept the proffers of peace. 

Pinzon and the Prince held a short consultation, 
the result of which was that they signified their 
permission for friendly intercourse, of which the 


LOOKING FOR AMAZON ISLAND. 257 

Caribs at once availed themselves. Then began 
the strangest kind of traffic, on the one side the 
savage Caribs, with the war-paint still fresh on their 
naked bodies, and on the other the mail-clad 
Spaniards. The Indians brought all the fruits and 
vegetables they could find in the half-wild gardens, 
and when these objects of barter ran short offered 
their bows and arrows, their spears and clubs — 
seeing that the strangers regarded them with evi- 
dent interest. So it happened that by the time the 
shore was reached, off which lay the vessels, the 
victors were laden with a great variety of weapons 
which they had not seen a few hours previously, 
and marched at the head of a long procession of 
naked savages bearing burdens of provisions. The 
Admiral was doubly glad at the return of his 
fighting men, having been extremely anxious on ac- 
count of the tumult in the forest, and welcoming 
the trophies of the conquest warmly. 

The provisions brought by the Caribs served 
to keep the Spaniards from starving on the home- 
ward voyage, and the strange weapons they yielded 
up afterward figured in the triumphal procession 
Columbus led across Spain after his arrival at Palos. 
Indeed, some of the Caribs themselves were among 
the trophies of Spanish valor shown to the wonder- 

l 7 


258 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


ing people of Spain, for several of the warriors in- 
sisted upon accompanying Columbus on the voyage 
and would not take no for an answer. For they 
were themselves adventurous sailors, making long 
water journeys in their frail canoes, and besides, 
they had a great admiration for a valiant foe and 
wished to see the country from which had come the 
only men who had ever defeated them in battle. 
They were more intelligent, as well as more war- 
like, than the Arawaks, the natives of Cuba and 
Hispaniola. Coming northward from their original 
home in South America, they had conquered the 
natives of all the islands as far north as Puerto Pico 
and Hispaniola, and if the Spaniards had not 
arrived when they did it is possible they would have 
eventually acquired possession of all the Greater 
Antilles. 

It was on account of the tales told by these Car- 
ibs, after the trading had been concluded, the water- 
casks filled and the vessels trimmed for departure, 
that Columbus started on the strangest quest that 
ever mortal man conceived : no less than the finding 
of an island inhabited solely by women, or Carib 
Amazons. Taking a great liking to Juan, the young 
Lucayan, one of the Caribs told him that if Colum- 
bus wished to find a foe worthy of his prowess he 


LOOKING FOR AMAZON ISLAND. 259 

should seek out the wonderful Amazons, the female 
warriors who lived on an island to the south, about 
two days’ sail in the great canoes with wings — as 
they termed the caravels. Juan repeated the sub- 
stance of this information to Pablo and he told the 
Admiral, whose imagination was at once inflamed 
at the prospect of finding such strange people ; for 
he had read of such in ancient books, and really ex- 
pected to discover them in his travels. 

“ Where does the island lie, son Pablo?” he 
asked the boy. ‘ ‘ Get exact details from the In- 
dian and we will go in search of it. ’ ’ Questioned 
closely, the Carib said it was, as he had already 
told the Lucayan, only two days’ distant, to the 
south of Hispaniola. He himself had never seen it, 
but his father had once visited it and had met with 
such a rough reception that neither he nor any 
other warrior of the tribe had ventured to land 
there again. “ Sometimes,” he said, “ the women 
warriors will permit young men or boys to land, of 
whom they make slaves, but treat with kindness ; 
but if an adult approaches the island he is warned 
to land at his peril.” 

“ And are there any islands which contain the 
dog-headed men, and the Cyclopes with one eye 
each and heads between their shoulders ?” asked 


260 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

Columbus. He had read also of these, and con- 
cluded that if there were women warriors, there 
might be likewise some other freaks of nature, as 
well, of whom he had information from the ancient 
books. 

Questioned as to these, the Carib shook his head. 
“Ho,” he answered, “ not in these seas; but in 
the great continent from which his ancestors had 
come (South America) the forests held both the dog- 
headed men and the giants with heads between 
their shoulders. This answer gave his information 
about the Amazons an air of verity, and so Colum- 
bus concluded to give over a few days to the search. 
If he could add a few of those wonderful Amazons 
to his collection of captives, he reasoned, they would 
form brilliant ornaments to the triumphal proces- 
sion he contemplated in Spain and cause his sover- 
eigns to regard him with greater favor than other- 
wise they might. As he was about to order the 
caravels to up anchor and away, a signal from 
shore informed him that another band of Indians 
was coming and he concluded to wait. This party 
was headed by the actual cacique of the tribe, a 
man of more pacific presence than the war chief, 
and evidently possessed of greater wealth, for he 
gave Columbus a coronet of gold, similar to the 


LOOKING FOR AMAZON ISLAND. 261 

one that Gnacanagari wore, and brought also cot- 
ton hammocks, parrots, and delicious fruits of the 
tropics. He made known to the Admiral that he 
was ruler of the great province of Ciguay, and 
was probably the same cacique Mayonabex who 
a few years later was murdered by the Spaniards. 
No premonition of this cruel fate, however, came 
to him then, and he treated Columbus with the 
greatest consideration. "When asked as to the island 
of the Amazons, he too pointed to the southward, 
and offered to send along four of his young men as 
pilots or guides. This offer was gratefully accepted 
by the Admiral, and after the cacique had left and 
the Caribs came aboard, the order was finally issued 
for making sail, and at last the coast where the first 
Indian blood was shed by white men was left be- 
hind. This Bay of Arrows was, in fact, the real 
point of departure for Spain when the homeward 
trip began, as no other landing was made ; and thus 
Samana is a place of great historic interest in a 
double sense. 

This story of the Amazons always haunted Colum- 
bus, who really believed it, and during all his voy- 
ages was always on the alert for a glimpse of those 
strange warriors. But he was disappointed, as he 
never saw them ; nor, it may be remarked in pass- 


262 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


ing, did any one else find substantial traces of them. 
When, years later, Orellana descended the river 
Amazon, he heard stories similar to those told the 
Admiral; and in fact the great river of South 
America received the name it bears on that account. 
The island which they inhabited in the Caribbean 
Sea is supposed to have been that now called Mont- 
serrat, and which was discovered by Columbus on 
his second voyage, in 1493. The Indians on board 
the two vessels, who now numbered about a dozen, 
were at variance among themselves as to the exact 
location of the Amazon’s island, at first saying it 
was in the southeast, then in the northeast, and 
again settling upon the southeast. Columbus 
changed the direction of sailing several times, after 
he had extricated his vessels from the Gulf of 
Samana, and at last bore southwardly, and easterly, 
in a direction that would have taken him at last to 
Puerto Rico. It was left for him to discover that 
island, however, on his next voyage, for seeing that 
his sailors did not apparently relish a continuance 
on a course that took them farther from Spain than 
ever, he sent for Adolfo and asked him to ascertain 
if possible what they wished. The weather was 
calm, so calm in fact that several of the Indians 
leaped overboard occasionally and swam like water 


LOOKING FOR AMAZON ISLAND. 263 

dogs about the caravels, so Adolfo took one of the 
small boats and went over to consult with the mas- 
ter of the 4 ‘ Pinta . 5 5 Captain Martin Alonzo had a 
feeling of great respect for the youth by this time, 
not only on account of his prowess with the sword, 
but also for his action at the Bay of Arrows, 
when he rescued his brother, Vicente Yanez, so he 
received him cordially and set out the best he had 
on board, insisting that he stay to dine. During 
the meal the two carefully canvassed the situation ; 
and it may be believed that Captain Pinzon did not 
make out the Admiral’s actions any better than 
they were. 

‘ ‘ What do I believe as to the isle of the Ama- 
zonas ? ” asked Captain Pinzon, bringing his fist 
down upon the table with a bang. ‘ ‘ Why, it is all 
of a piece with the rest of Don Cristobal Colon’s 
egregious mistakes and fanciful foibles. There may 
be an island where the women warriors dwell, and 
it may not be more than two days’ sail, as the red 
man has said ; but if so, what of it ? Do we wish 
to spill more Spanish blood in taking captive a few 
more savage Indians, be they male warriors or 
female warriors, merely that the vanity of Don 
Cristobal Colon be gratified at court by presenting 
them to our sovereigns ? We have had adventure 


264 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


enough, say I, and there is no man aboard my craft 
that wishes to risk any more or venture any more, 
to make war upon women. There is no credit in 
it, to my way of thinking. If they possessed mines 
of gold or precious stones, why, that would be an- 
other matter ; but so far as I can learn, they have 
neither one nor the other, and live like the rest of 
the savages, devoid of all civilized comforts and as 
poor as they were born. They have no liking for 
men, the Indians say, save to partake of their flesh, 
like the cannibals that they are ; and if that is their 
preference, I say let them live in it. I and my men 
desire to put about for Spain, and the sooner the 
better. Here we are, provisioned for the voyage ; 
but none too well, and every day but adds to the 
dangers from famine, peradventure we be delayed 
by storms or contrary winds. Then again, this old 
‘ Pinta ’ is far from seaworthy ; her foremast is 
sprung and I cannot carry more than half sail in an 
ordinary wind. What we shall do if a storm 
springs upon us, the good Lord only knows ! ” 

Just about this time, as if to emphasize the sailor’s 
remarks, the wind, which had been blowing from 
the northward, suddenly shifted and came in favor- 
ing gales from the southwest. This fact decided 
Columbus, when he learned of Captain Pinzon’s 


Looking for amazon island. 265 

declaration, to about ship and start on the home- 
ward voyage in good earnest, abandoning with re- 
gret the search for the island of Amazons. When 
the sailors heard the order and saw that indeed they 
were about taking the direct course for their native 
shores, they set up a loud cheer, getting at their 
work with alacrity, and on all faces except per- 
haps those of the Indians, there was an expression 
of joy and gladness. The dangers that had been 
encountered and the privations suffered were for the 
moment forgotten, as the vessels were brought upon 
the homeward course, with a favoring breeze be- 
hind them that filled every sail. 


CHAPTEK XXIV. 


THE TEMPESTUOUS HOMEWARD VOYAGE. 

As the sailors predicted when on the outward 
voyage, the gales that so persistently blew from the 
northeast and were so favorable for them when 
seeking the Xew World, were now an obstacle to 
their progress on the homeward trip. These so- 
called ‘ ‘ trade winds, ’ ’ which cool the tropics with 
their fresh breezes, soon asserted their power, and 
for many days the two vessels beat up against them, 
making very little progress toward the haven of the 
Admiral’s desires. 

At last, after more than two weeks of continual 
rebuffs, the northern verge of the tropic belt was 
reached and the ‘ 4 trades 5 ’ died away, giving place 
to more favorable winds. But with the cessation 
of the trade winds came extremely boisterous seas 
in place of the calm waters the voyagers had en- 
joyed in the southern ocean, and they almost longed 
for a change back again to the old conditions. In, 
266 


THE TEMPESTUOUS HOMEWARD VOYAGE. 267 

fact, they were never satisfied, those sailors who ac- 
companied Columbus on his first voyage to America, 
and though they had experienced every kind of 
weather and witnessed the most varied scenes in 
nature, they were still grumbling and discontented. 
They soon had good cause to repine, indeed, when, 
after sailing for nearly a month, a storm burst upon 
the crazy little craft that threatened to overwhelm 
and send them to the bottom of the sea. It was 
about the fourteenth of February that the wind, 
which had been constantly increasing in violence, 
finally reached the intensity of a tempest, the 
fury of which was such that all sail was taken in 
and the vessels sent spinning under bare poles be- 
fore the blasts. The waves were ‘ ‘ mountain high, ’ ’ 
and in the darkness of the succeeding night the 
“ Nina” and the “ Pinta ” parted company, never 
again being within sight of each other at sea. This 
time, indeed, Captain Pinzon had a good excuse for 
disobeying the Admiral’s orders to keep him com- 
pany, for it was impossible for him to see the signals 
set by Columbus to that effect, the seas were so vast 
and the wind blew the spray about with such vio- 
lence. Dawn of the fifteenth found the little 
“Nina,” that open boat into which were crowded 
nearly half a hundred men, adrift at the mercy of 


268 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

the wind and waves. Scant sail was set, just 
enough to keep her before the gale, and the despair- 
ing sailors abandoned themselves to their fate. 
Believing that their last moments would soon ar- 
rive, they cast lots as to which of the survivors, in 
case of shipwreck, and if there should be any, should 
make pilgrimages to holy shrines, and the lot fell to 
Columbus, twice out of three times drawing. The 
sequel showed that he faithfully performed his vow, 
and the first night after landing at Palos he spent 
silent before the altar in the church at Moguer. 

The storm still continuing, the Admiral made a 
last attempt to perpetuate the knowledge of his dis- 
coveries, in case the caravel should founder, by 
writing a short account of them on parchment and 
after enclosing the manuscript in a cake of wax, 
placing it in a water-tight cask, which he then 
threw overboard. Another account was also writ- 
ten and placed within another cask, which was kept 
on the poop of the caravel, where it might be 
washed overboard if the vessel went to pieces. 

“You are witnesses,” he said to Pablo and 
Adolfo, 4 4 of this act of mine by which I seek to 
perpetuate the knowledge of our doings in the New 
World. Death alone I fear not; but the thought 
that, after all that has been done by my sovereigns 


THE TEMPESTUOUS HOMEWARD VOYAGE. 269 

and myself, the shipwreck of our craft should con- 
sign our deeds to oblivion, gives me great sorrow. 
My heart is torn with anguish at the thought of my 
two sons, about your own ages, now at school at 
Cordova, and whom I may never see again; but 
despite this sad reflection, I would not fear to die, 
if I knew that the tidings of what has been accom- 
plished would sometime reach the coast of Spain. 
This parchment which I have enclosed in wax and 
placed in the cask is addressed to the Spanish sover- 
eigns, with a promised reward of a thousand ducats 
to whomsoever shall find and deliver it to them in- 
tact. God grant that this at least may survive, 
even if our ship and its company perish in the sea. ’ ’ 
No authenticated account of the discovery of this 
cask was ever given ; but many years ago a story 
was prevalent that it had been picked up by the 
captain of an American ship, off the northwest 
coast of Africa. He and his crew were taking in 
ballast at a beach, when one of the men found what 
appeared to be a gigantic piece of pumice all en- 
crusted over with barnacles. Breaking open this 
the outer crust, within was found a keg, in- 
side which was a cocoanut enveloped in a kind 
of gum or resinous substance containing a parch- 
ment covered with Spanish- Gothic characters. 


270 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


These characters were nearly illegible, but a 
learned Armenian who kept a bookshop in an 
old city near, succeeded in deciphering the inscrip- 
tion, which was translated into French and then 
into English. According to this man, it was a short 
but concise account of the discovery of Cathay or 
farther India, addressed to Ferdinand and Isabella 
of Spain, stating that the ships could not possibly 
survive the tempest another day, and that they were 
then between the Western Isles and Spain. This 
narrative, with another like it, was written and 
thrown into the sea, in the event that, should the 
caravel go to the bottom, some mariner might pick 
up one or the other, and send it to its destination. 
This account bore date 1493, was signed by Chris- 
topher Columbus, in a bold, dashing hand, and at 
the time of its discovery had been afloat three hun- 
dred and fifty years. The American captain who 
claimed to have found this precious document sent 
news of it from Gibraltar, whence he promised to 
take it to the United States ; but as nothing was 
ever heard of him afterward, it is supposed that his 
ship was lost at sea, and with it the Columbian 
treasure. 

Having done all he could to secure a memorial of 
his voyage, Columbus was somewhat easier in his 


THE TEMPESTUOUS HOMEWARD VOYAGE. <#1 

mind, but distressed still on account of the peril 
to which his friends were subjected. He was deep- 
ly attached to the boys, who reminded him of his 
own sons, whom he had left in Spain, Diego and 
Fernando, and confided to them many things which 
no one else on board the caravel ever learned. 

For example, on the morning of the second day 
of the storm, after he and the pilots had been con- 
sulting as to their situation, he said to Pablo and 
Adolfo, ‘ ‘ Those men think we are off the coast 
of Spain or Portugal, but, in confidence let me tell 
you, sons, we are much nearer to the Azores than to 
the mainland. But as those islands belong to Portu- 
gal, I would almost rather trust myself to the fury of 
the tempest than to the tender mercies of their 
governor, who is an old acquaintance, and also 
an enemy, of mine. Still, I am bearing up for the 
isles as well as possible, for we are nearly out of 
water and food, and perchance we escape shipwreck 
may yet perish of starvation. But what thinkest 
thou, son Adolfo, cannot you, as an Infante of 
Portugal, command the governor to treat us as we 
deserve and give us succor on royal account ? 99 

Adolfo looked distressed. “ Your Excellency,” 
he answered, u do not call me Infante, for I am 
not permitted to be known as a prince of the 




A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


blood-royal. I have some influence with the King, 
my sire, but ” 

“What?” demanded Columbus. “How is 
this ? Hot an Infante, and yet related to the 
King ? Explain thyself, my son. ’ 5 

4 4 1 cannot, ’ ’ faltered Adolfo. 4 4 At least, I do 
not wish to. But, do you forget that the King has 
no sons? That is, he has no acknowledged sons 
who will succeed him on the throne. ’ ’ 

44 My faith! that is so,” admitted Columbus. 
44 And I had not recalled that fact, all this time I 

have addressed you as a prince. But still ’ ’ 

44 Your Excellency,” rejoined Adolfo, looking up 
with great distress plainly visible in his face, yet 
boldly, as if he had concluded to settle the matter, 
once for all, 4 4 1 bear the same relation to the King 
that your son Fernando does to you. My mother, 
like his, was of humble birth, and has never been 

acknowledged as — as ” 

44 Ah, I see,” said Columbus, with a sigh. 
44 You bring home to me the great omission of my 
life. And yet Fernando is as dear to me as is 
Diego, my first-born, and I cannot conceive how 
the King should forsake thee because of thy mother’s 
humble birth. ’ ’ 

4 4 H either has he done so, ’ ’ answered Adolfo with 


THE TEMPESTUOUS HOMEWARD VOYAGE. 273 

spirit. 4 4 But do you not see, he would by no means 
acknowledge me as his heir. He is a great and gener- 
ous king ; but 5 ’ 

44 Yes, yes, I see. Pardon me, son Adolfo; thy 
distress adds poignancy to my grief on account of 
my son Fernando. I shall not allude to it again ; 
but, believe me, none the less do I honor thee.” 

44 It was not my fault, surely,” said Adolfo, bit- 
terly, 4 4 yet I have been made to suffer for it, as 
though it were my own. ’ 5 

44 Poor boy, thou hast said truly, it was no fault 
of thine. But let us change the subject and again 
recur to the possibility of making a landing in these 
isles, peradventure we may be so fortunate or un- 
fortunate, I know not which. Dost know the 
governor, and if so hast not some influence with 
him? ” 

4 4 Slightly, your Excellency, and he has cause to 
remember me, for I once saved his son from drown- 
ing, when bathing in the Tagus.” 

4 4 Ah then, no longer shall I hesitate to bear up 
for the isles. What ho, mariners ! Keep her up 
as much as possible, for I have reason to believe ’ ’ 

44 Land, land ahead! ” shouted the man on the 
lookout. 44 Land on the weather bow!” At this 
news all the sailors broke out into exclamations of 
18 


274 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

joy, their depression suddenly changed to rejoic- 
ing. 

Still, their troubles were by no means over, for 
though land lay right in sight, and they approached 
it within ten or fifteen miles, the wind suddenly 
veered directly ahead, and for two days the unfor- 
tunate sailors lay hovering about the island without 
being able to reach it. When finally they did reach 
a harbor, with all hands worn out from constant 
watching and labor, they had no sooner cast 
anchor than the cable parted and the caravel was 
driven out to sea again. The next morning the 
caravel crawled slowly back to harbor, and this 
time the cable held and a boat was finally sent 
ashore. Their place of refuge proved to be the is- 
land of Saint Mary’s, one of the Azores, and when 
Columbus learned this he hailed the fact as an 
auspicious omen, and commanded that half the crew 
should immediately land and perform their vows, 
as they had promised to do if they were saved, by 
walking in procession to the nearest shrine or church, 
barefoot and clad only in their shirts. After they 
had done their duty and refreshed themselves, they 
were to return to the caravel and the remaining 
members of the crew were to follow their ex- 
ample. 


THE TEMPESTUOUS HOMEWARD VOYAGE. 275 

But the Admiral’s devotion to his vows came 
near being the means of his undoing, for it turned 
out that the first men ashore were set upon by a 
mob and made prisoners. When they appealed to 
the governor he gave them no satisfaction, but in- 
stead kept them in jail until he should communicate 
with Columbus. The latter waited for hours, un- 
aware of what had happened until he changed the 
position of the caravel and saw the mob ashore, 
previously hidden by an intervening headland . Then 
he was very angry, and turning to Adolfo, who was 
ever at his side, he said, “Verily, son, those 
wretches ashore, even though they be subjects of 
thy king, are worse than the heathen savages whom 
we met in Guanahani, for they treated us like 
friends, while these have received my men, even 
though on a holy mission, like enemies. Go thou, 
Adolfo, in the small boat ashore and reason with 
this barbarous governor of the isle, telling him what 
thou likest, only make him release my men and pre- 
vail upon him to send us some water and provisions, 
ere we perish.” 

“ With pleasure, your Excellency,” answered 
Adolfo ; “ and may I take Pablo with me?” 

“ Of course, take him and two others; but be- 
ware lest thy tongue lead thee astray. Tell the 


276 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


governor just enough to whet his curiosity but not 
to gratify it, remember. I trust thee, Prince, need- 
less for me to say, and our fate is in thy hands . 5 ’ 

4 ‘ Rest assured, your Excellency, your confidence is 
not misplaced. My own father could not draw from 
me secrets you would have me keep. Methinks I 
can cause this man to change his attitude. ’ ’ 
u Go, then, and may thy mission prosper.” 
Taking the only remaining boat, Adolfo hastened 
ashore with Pablo and two men to row, and was 
soon holding an interview with the governor. 
Scarce had he reached the landing when a sudden 
tempest sprang up which caused Columbus to slip 
his cable and put out to sea, where for two days he 
remained, storm tossed and anxious, unable to re- 
gain the shore. 


CHAPTER XXY. 


A HOSTILE RECEPTION IN THE AZORES. 

Bewildered by the strange events of the few 
days past and brought almost to the verge of de- 
spair by the hostile reception of his men, Columbus 
knew not what to think of the situation. He im- 
agined that war must have been declared between 
Spain and Portugal, or that the king of the latter 
country, moved by jealousy of the former’s success 
in the first expedition to the New World, wished to 
forestall Ferdinand by seizing the person of his Ad- 
miral and detaining his vessels. It turned out that 
the latter surmise was correct, for King John of 
Portugal had indeed issued orders to the governors 
of all islands on the coast of Africa, at which it was 
possible Columbus might touch on his return, to do 
that very thing, which in itself might prove a cause 
of war between his kingdom and that of Spain. It 
did not matter to the King, so chagrined was he 
that one whom he once listened to and who had 

urged him to equip an expedition, should have 

277 


278 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


carried his proffers of services to Spain and won 
laurels for his deadly rival. 

Meanwhile, Columbus being a prey to doubt and 
perplexity at sea, and unable to afford assistance 
to his envoy, the latter was not having everything 
his own way on shore. He was allowed to land, 
and when he sent his name and credentials to the 
governor, that individual hastened to do him honor 
as a connection of the sovereign whom he served. 
He despatched a horse richly caparisoned to the 
quay, with attendants in livery, and thus Adolfo 
was taken into his presence without unnecessary 
delay. His modest yet dignified bearing proclaimed 
him a great hidalgo (a u son of somebody”) and 
irrespective of his personality, which was already 
favorably known to the governor, who had not for- 
gotten the service he had once rendered him in res- 
cuing his son from a watery grave. He was great- 
ly astonished, however, to find him in the company 
of a Spanish adventurer (as he regarded Columbus), 
and after the greetings had been passed he gave ex- 
pression to this astonishment. ‘ ‘ How is it, Prince 
Adolfo, that you come to find yourself engaged in 
the service of the Spanish government? Is it with 
the consent of your royal sire, or is this some ad- 
venture on your own account ? 5 ’ 


A HOSTILE RECEPTION IN THE AZORES. 279 

“ Both, your Excellency,” replied Adolfo, seat- 
ing himself at the governor’s table, after indicating 
to Pablo that he was also to remain, and sipping 
the generous wine of the Azores set before him. 

4 4 Both with the consent of my father, and also on 
my own account. That is, though it is true the 
King did not approve my coming, and would have 
interposed insuperable obstacles; yet I knew he 
would appreciate the information I might gain and 
would forgive me after my return. ’ ’ 

4 4 Ho, ho, then you ran away from court and es- 
sayed this venture all by yourself, incognito, as it 
were ? ’ ’ 

44 Yes, to put it that way, I ran away from Por- 
tugal, — or rather, left without informing any one of 
my intended journey, — and shipped with his Ex- 
cellency, the Admiral, without betraying my name 
or nativity.” 

44 His Excellency? The Admiral? What, do 
you mean that Genoese, or rather Spanish, adven- 
turer, Colon ? Since how long has he been an ad- 
miral, forsooth ? I recall that he was, not many 
months since, begging from door to door, as it 
were, for his daily bread.” 

44 True, so he was, in a sense; but by the 4 ca- 
pitulation ’ signed by Queen Isabella and King Fer- 


280 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


dinand, he is to be styled the Lord High Admiral 
of the Ocean Sea, and was commissioned viceroy 
over all the countries he might discover.” 

44 Ah yes, and this brings me back to the original 
question. What lands has he discovered, and how 
came he to reach them. In sooth, it seems passing 
strange that he should have discovered any countries 
not already appropriated by your royal sire. And 
let me tell you in strictest confidence, thy sire hath 
issued orders for me to detain this proud 4 Admiral 
of the Ocean Sea ’ until the matter shall be investi- 
gated. Rather, until an expedition shall have been 
despatched on the course he pursued and returned 
therefrom. So thou wilt make thyself at home in 
my palace until this shall have been accom- 
plished. ’ ’ 

4 4 Hay, nay, not so, your Excellency,” exclaimed 
Prince Adolfo. 4 4 The Admiral has landed half his 
crew here in performance of a vow, and after they 
shall have returned the other half will wish to come 
ashore for the same holy purpose. Then, after that 
has been accomplished, we intend to sail for home 
without delay ; tarrying only for the water and pro- 
visions which you will be gracious enough to sell us, 
taking therefor written orders on the Spanish 


crown. 


A HOSTILE RECEPTION IN THE AZORES. 281 

‘ ‘ Oh ho, I will do that, will 1 ? And what about 
the orders of thy sire for his detention ? They are 
peremptory, and I have no choice but to obey. To, 
disobey would mean the forfeit of my position.” 

‘ ‘ And to obey them will mean that, also, if my 
influence at court amounts to aught,” retorted 
Adolfo, rising as if to go. “ The King’s orders 
(and I say it with all due respect) were issued in 
ignorance of what has transpired and of the true na- 
ture of the voyage. Again, if carried out, they would 
be like to precipitate war between two kingdoms now 
at peace. As one very nearly concerned in the affair 
and more clearly cognizant of the import of the voy- 
age, I command you to at once release the poor 
sailors you have detained, to furnish us with needed 
provisions and then allow us to continue on our voy- 
age. Unless you do, I shall make such representa- 
tions at court as will lose you not only your posi- 
tion, but what you may value nearly as much, — your 
precious life itself. Now choose, as between the 
orders of a distant king and a present prince. I 
know this man, Columbus, and know him to be true 
and just. It is true that he at first took his plans to 
my father, who rejected them before they were ac- 
cepted by the sovereigns of Spain. If he has issued 


282 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


orders to detain him and rob him of his laurels, it 
was in a fit of pique, of which ere this he has re- 
pented. ’ ’ 

“Well, well, Prince Adolfo, thou speakest as 
with authority. I am not so much moved to grant 
thy request — or rather command — on account of thy 
position by right of birth as thy good services 
rendered me in rescuing my son. However, be the 
reason what it may, there are the royal orders. 
What shall I do with them? ” 

“Bring them to me. I will cancel them with 
my signature. Upon my own head I take all the 
blame, if there be any. Bring them hither? ” 

The governor sent for the parchments bearing the 
King’s signature and seal, and Adolfo, after atten- 
tively perusing the same, called for writing material 
and wrote across the document, “ Canceled by 
order of Adolfo, Infante (by courtesy) and the 
King’s representative. ’ ’ 

“It is well,” remarked the governor quietly. 
“ But had I not known thee previously I should not 
have allowed this interposition in official affairs. I 
trust, however, that all will be well when this trans- 
action is reported at court ? ’ ’ 

“It shall be,” rejoined Adolfo simply. “I 
shall make it my first concern to acquaint my father 


A HOSTILE RECEPTION IN THE AZORES. 283 

with what you have done and also with what I have 
assumed upon myself. ’ ’ 

The governor called an aide and despatched him 
to shore with orders to release the imprisoned sailors 
and to make all the amends in his power for their 
detention. Also to command his commander of 
commissariat to issue provisons for the caravel, when 
it should return to its anchorage. 44 Meanwhile, ’ ’ 
said the governor to Adolfo, 4 4 you will be my guest. 
Thy chamber is ready, and to it retire, thou and 
thy young friend, for you both must be weary with 
such long buffetings at sea. After a siesta , long 
or short, as pleaseth thee, rejoin me here and we 
will dine. ’ ’ 

4 4 Thanks, your Excellency, ’ 5 replied the Prince ; 
4 4 but I cannot rest while my noble Admiral is be- 
set by wind and wave out at sea ; and to partake of 
your hospitality, while my fellow sailors are perhaps 
famishing, would go against my feelings, I assure 
you. ’ 9 

4 4 Kest on that score, Prince, for while the storm 
lasts thou canst do nothing for the Admiral ; and as 
for the mariners : those ashore shall be fed most 
bountifully, my word for it, and those on shipboard 
filled with cheer at once they return.” 

4 4 Again, thanks. I knew you would treat them 


281 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

well, once you were acquainted with the true mo- 
tives for this voyage. ’ ’ 

“ Indeed, I had no other inclination, Prince; but 
the orders gave me no discretion. Now, if thou 
wilt not retire to rest, suppose thou relatest me some 
of the incidents of this wonderful voyage. A new 
world, sayest thou ? A new people, also, red of hue 
and savages ? I must see those aboard the caravel, 
for in sooth I am curious. ’ ’ 

Adolfo related the chief incidents of the voyage, 
taking care to confine his remarks to inconsequen- 
tial things and to betray nothing great that would 
give an inkling of the route thither and back. 

The governor was overcome with wonder and did 
not withhold his admiration at the great discretion 
of Columbus in dealing with his refractory mariners 
and with the people of the newly-discovered lands. 
When he learned that nearly forty men had been 
left to garrison a fort in the New World, he saw at 
once the futility of any scheme of the Portuguese 
for detaining the caravel or sending out another ex- 
pedition ; for the men left behind furnished proof 
positive of the great discovery, whether Columbus 
were detained and slain or allowed to complete his 
voyage. Then again, there was the 4 4 Pinta, ’ ’ which 
might have survived the tempest and, even in case 


A HOSTILE RECEPTION IN THE AZORES. 285 

the “Nina” were detained or destroyed, would 
carry the news of the discovery to Spain. 

‘ 4 Truly, Prince, thou wert right. Thy father is 
a man of uncommon sense, and he will see how fu- 
tile it were to molest or detain the Admiral, for his- 
tory like that you and he have made is not to be con- 
cealed. His error lay in allowing Colon to carry 
his schemes to Spain, and he cannot rectify it now 
by any untoward act. Still, I will have to in- 
sist upon the Admiral showing me his papers of 
commission bearing the royal signatures, perchance 
he have any, when he returns to port.” 

“ Oh, he has them, believe me, your Excellency. 
And when you meet him, peradventure he be not 
too indignant at the treatment he has received to 
land, you will be impressed with his dignity and 
nobility of mind. He is one man in a thousand ; 
yea, a man of a million, and perhaps the world has 
not his like to-day. ’ ’ 

‘ < Say you so ? Then I must surely see him and 
do all in my power to make amends for my seeming 
brutality. Go, now, and rest awhile. Just as soon 
as the caravel is reported I will inform thee, and we 
together will go to meet the Admiral at the mole.” 

It was towards the end of the second day after 
Adolfo’s arrival on shore that the storm-beaten 


236 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

craft crept slowly into harbor and cast anchor off 
shore. The governor lost no time in sending an in- 
vitation to Columbus to come and make the palace 
his abiding place so long as he should wish to do so ; 
but the Admiral sternly refused to accept of his 
hospitality. He felt it incumbent upon him to res- 
cue his men and also to land the second portion of 
the crew for the purpose of complying with their 
vows ; but further than this, and the acceptance of 
a few casks of water, he refused to go. When, in ac- 
cordance with his expressed intentions, the governor 
sent a priest and a notary on board the “ Nina” 
to examine the Admiral’s commission, the paper 
bearing the royal signatures was scornfully shown 
the Portuguese emissaries, whose bearing at once 
underwent a decided change. 

They also pressed Columbus to go ashore with 
them and partake of the governor’s bounty; but the 
Admiral refused, saying that he much mistrusted the 
good-will of one whose behavior had been so bad. 
For the courtesies which he had rendered at the 
eleventh hour, he, Columbus, tendered his thanks, 
in the name of his eminent sovereigns ; but he also 
should report the actions that had preceded them. 
If, then, they would convey his orders for his envoy 
and the sailors to return to the caravel, and allow 


A HOSTILE RECEPTION IN THE AZORES. 287 

the men aboard to perform their duty to their re- 
ligion, he would soon rid the island of his presence. 

Governor Castaneda was greatly chagrined at the 
refusal of the Admiral to accept his tardily-tendered 
favors, and asked Adolfo to go aboard and urge Co- 
lumbus to reconsider his determination to proceed 
without having paid him at least a visit of cer- 
emony. But, though impressed by the account 
Adolfo rendered of his reception, and glad to learn 
of the governor’s change of heart, Columbus stead- 
ily persisted in his refusal and finally sailed without 
having become indebted to the insular government 
for anything beyond what would have been be- 
stowed upon any mariners wrecked upon its shores. 

“As for the governor’s present inclination, let 
that go ; but as for the indignity offered me and my 
men, that must be settled between the respective 
crowns of Spain and Portugal,” he remarked to 
Adolfo, as the caravel left the hostile coast of Saint 
Mary’s behind. 


CHAPTER XXYI. 


COLUMBUS AT THE COURT OF PORTUGAL. 

The untoward events at Saint Mary’s had con- 
sumed ten precious days, and it was not until the 
twenty -fourth of February that the caravel finally 
set sail for Spain. The weary sailors were rewarded 
with three days of pleasant weather, but on the 
twenty-seventh rising seas betokened another 
storm, which actually burst upon them on the second 
of March. At midnight of that date, the frail ves- 
sel was struck by a squall which tore her sails to 
ribbons, and she was sent scudding before the blast 
under bare poles, as on a former occasion, the sec- 
ond time in this vexatious voyage. As all the signs 
indicated that the coast of the continent was near, — 
but whether that portion belonging to Spain or Por- 
tugal, they knew not, — the hapless mariners were 
fearful they would be wrecked, almost within sight 
of home. During two nights and a day, the cara- 
vel was driven before the storm, and when daylight 
288 


COLUMBUS AT THE COURT OF PORTUGAL. 289 

broke on the morning of the fourth of March, a 
rough and rocky shore was revealed. The more 
experienced of the sailors recognized a well-known 
landmark, in the rock of Cintra, off the mouth of 
the river Tagus, and when convinced of his land- 
fall Columbus knew not whether to rejoice or re- 
pine. For he was again in the grasp of his enemy, 
the King of Portugal, should he land; and the 
condition of the u Kina ” did not permit of contin- 
uing further without repairs, while the provisions 
were nearly gone. 

“ Frankly, now, Prince Adolfo,” he said to the 
youth, whom he had called for consultation, “ can I 
risk the results of this terrible voyage, after all we 
have been through to gain the treasures my small 
vessel bears, by sailing right into the lion’s 
mouth ? 5 ’ 

‘ ‘ If your Excellency means his Majesty the King 
of Portugal, and my respected parent,” answered 
Adolfo, “I will answer for your safety and the 
safety of the treasure with my life. King John is 
grasping and ambitious; but he also is just and 
prone to honesty, that is, when he is put to the 
test. I am sure he will not harm you, nor will he 
dare lay hands upon the fruits of this adventure.” 

^ Be it so, then, ’ ’ rejoined Columbus. ‘ ‘ Though I 
19 


290 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


do not share thy faith in his Majesty, yet I see no 
other course at present open. And, moreover, we 
are now right off the wretched settlement of Ras- 
tello, inhabited by wreckers, who will surely rob 
us, perhaps even commit murder, for the sake of 
the gold we have aboard. 5 ’ 

Making a virtue of dire necessity, then, the Ad- 
miral cast anchor off the piratical hamlet of Ras- 
tello; though he had no sooner done so than the 
caravel was surrounded by the wreckers in their 
boats, who had learned, from the few Portuguese 
sailors aboard, that the ‘ 1 Nina 5 ’ was laden with 
golden treasure. They also learned that the ves- 
sel had survived the most wonderful voyage in the 
world, and catching glimpses of the strange In- 
dians as they peered over the rail, they carried 
the news ashore, so that shortly the river was 
alive with craft of every description, containing 
not only the hardened wreckers with sinister in- 
tentions, but hundreds of Portuguese impelled 
merely by curiosity. 

It so happened that a large man-of-war was at 
anchor in the river, the commander of which, Don 
Alonzo de Acuna, a gallant officer in the Portuguese 
service, hearing of what Columbus had done, at 
once ordered him aboard his ship to report. He 


COLUMBUS AT THE COURT OF PORTUGAL. 291 

had never, perhaps, heard of a man named Colum- 
bus, and had but a hazy conception of the moment- 
ous possibilities of the voyage he had accomplished, 
and as to his rank, he knew nothing and probably 
cared less. But Columbus, well aware that he out- 
ranked the commander of the Portuguese ship, 
stood squarely on his dignity and refused to obey. 
4 4 What ? ’ ’ he exclaimed to Adolfo. 4 4 Does not 
that captain of a single ship know that I am an ad- 
miral, and entitled to command a fleet ? It is prob- 
ably through ignorance ; but know he must that I 
am Admiral of the Ocean Sea, by right of my ca- 
pitulation with the sovereigns of Spain, and if I am 
received at all, it must be with the honors due my 
rank and station. ’ ’ It was the first time that Co- 
lumbus had had the opportunity to insist upon the 
recognition of his title from the commander of a 
war- vessel, and he must be pardoned for indulging 
his vanity to this extent. And when the Portu- 
guese commander, informed of the facts by Adolfo, 
became aware of the high rank of the new arrival 
at the river Tagus, he made full amends, — to his 
credit be it said. He at once ordered his great 
boat to be launched, and himself went to visit the 
Admiral, accompanied by drummers, fifers and 
trumpeters, so that all the people in the harbor 


292 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


knew that some distinguished man had arrived in 
that insignificant little caravel, and not merely a 
common sailor without rank or distinction. 

Columbus was deeply touched by this manifesta- 
tion of approval, at this generous recognition of his 
position, after so many long months of unrequited 
effort, battling with stormy seas and treating with 
uncivilized savages. His heart swelled with emotion, 
and when an admiral’s salute thundered over the har- 
bor he could hardly restrain his tears. ‘ ‘ It augurs 
well,” he remarked to the Prince, “ that my first 
official reception should be so just and generous. 
Methinks this officer of thy navy must be a gentle- 
man born, he has such a correct conception of the 
honors due one of my rank. ’ ’ 

“All his Majesty’s officers are gentlemen, I 
trust,” said Adolfo simply; but he intended no re- 
buke to the Admiral. 

“Yea, verily,” rejoined Columbus hastily; “I 
meant not otherwise. But here he appears. Do 
thou, Prince, receive him at the taffrail and conduct 
him o’er the caravel, after we have passed the com- 
pliments of the occasion. ’ ’ 

The Admiral embraced his guest heartily, as he 
was presented by the Prince ; but the visitor was 
too astonished to return the greeting properly, see- 


COLUMBUS AT THE COURT OF PORTUGAL. 293 

ing who it was that introduced him. ‘ ‘ What ? An 
Infante of Portugal on this first adventure into the 
western ocean ? ” he exclaimed, gazing at Adolfo as 
though hardly believing his eyes. 

“ The same,” answered the Prince easily, “ and 
through the generosity of this great man, for whom 
I bespeak all the courtesies of the crown, for verily 
he is entitled to our gratitude.” 

Captain Acuna was more and more astounded as 
he was led over the vessel and saw what treasure it 
contained ; for Columbus withheld nothing from his 
view, having an ulterior purpose, as well as desire to 
gratify the curiosity of this, the first official in Por- 
tugal’s service to pay him a visit of his own accord. 
“ I shall despatch a courier at once to the King,” 
said Captain Acuna, informing him of your arrival 
and entreating his most gracious approval of your 
actions. The Prince, I am sure, will join with me 
in bespeaking for you a reception at court and per- 
mission to depart for Spain after necessary refresh- 
ment.” 

“I would be glad,” replied Adolfo, “to myself 
convey to the King the first tidings of the discovery ; ’ ’ 
but neither Columbus nor Acuna approved of this, 
and so a courier was sent to Valparaiso, where the 
court was then being held, several miles distant from 


294 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

Lisbon the capital. During the absence of the 
courier the harbor presented a festive appearance, 
it appearing as though all the people for a hundred 
miles around had gathered here to look upon the 
vessel and crew that had performed the most won- 
derful voyage that ever was recorded. Four days 
after the arrival of the “Kina” in the Tagus, the 
King’s messenger, one Don Martin de Norona, a 
cavalier of distinction, arrived with an invitation 
for Columbus to wait upon his Majesty at the court ; 
and though the Admiral had suspicions that some 
danger to himself lay in the journey, he made haste 
to comply with the royal commands. Adolfo accom- 
panied him, and also, at his earnest request, his 
friend Pablo, who had hung in the background 
during the past few days, feeling altogether out of 
his element. Pablo’s honest face was shining with 
excitement, his chubby figure was clad in rich rai- 
ment ; but if his own inclination had been consulted 
he would much rather have remained on shipboard. 
He knew, of course, that he was to lose his good 
friend Adolfo; for, now that his rank and birth 
were revealed to all, how could he continue with 
the caravel to Spain ? He had surmised, months 
before, that his chum was of no common lineage ; 
in fact, had overheard so much of the conversations 


COLUMBUS AT THE COURT OF PORTUGAL. 295 

between the Prince and Columbus that he could not 
but have held this opinion. But as Adolfo had not 
chosen to reveal himself in so many words, and in 
fact had always insisted that Pablo should treat him 
as a comrade, without regard to any possible differ- 
ence of rank, the latter had done so, keeping his 
own counsel, meanwhile, and in his heart wonder- 
ing at the many strange happenings in which he had 
taken part. 

So the boy went along ; though this fact is not re- 
corded in the journal of the Admiral. That does not 
matter, for the event has survived in the traditions 
of Palos, Pablo’s native place, and it is from them 
that his part in the great affair has been obtained. 
In view of their prospective separation, Adolfo and 
Pablo were even more attached to each other, seem- 
ingly, than before. They traveled close together, 
each being mounted on a gaily caparisoned donkey, 
while the Admiral rode a stately mule. As the 
weather was rainy and the roads in bad condition, 
the journey to court occupied the greater portion of 
two days, and it was not until the second night that 
the travelers arrived at Valparaiso. The name, Val 
Paraiso, Valley of Paradise, must have reminded 
them of that other place on the coast of Hispaniola, 
upon which Columbus had bestowed the same appel- 


296 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

lation, on account of its exceeding beauty ; but there 
were more points of contrast than of similarity in 
the two places. There, in the western world, the 
beauties were solely of Nature’s creation, and there 
were no stately palaces and magnificent structures 
of man’s making ; only huts of palm, inhabited by 
naked savages. 

If the King’s courier, Don Martin de Norona, had 
any suspicion that Adolfo was an illegitimate son of 
his sovereign, he gave no sign of the fact, except to 
treat him with distinguished courtesy ; and if King 
John were aware that the Infante was with Co- 
lumbus, he allowed no token of it to appear. The 
Admiral and his friends were received with cere- 
mony by cavaliers who rode forth to meet them, 
and after they had refreshed themselves were com- 
manded to appear before the King. Columbus and 
Adolfo had held no conversation on the subject, but 
it was tacitly understood between them that no 
reference whatever should be made to the latter’s 
existence, even; and that is probably the reason 
why his name does not appear in records of the 
voyage. When they arrived at the palace, the 
Admiral was taken to one apartment and the 
youths to another, and when Columbus was sum- 
moned before the King he looked in vain for his 


COLUMBUS AT THE COURT OF PORTUGAL. 297 

young associates. Adolfo had taken Pablo with 
him to his own rooms in a quarter of the palace un- 
visited by the public, and there he kept him con- 
cealed, while the historic interview took place be- 
tween Columbus and King John of Portugal. What 
transpired at that interview is a matter of history 
and can be learned by a perusal of the printed rec- 
ords; but what occurred between Prince Adolfo 
and his father after it was over has never been 
made public. 

It is narrated that King John bade the Admiral 
seat himself at his side, an honor granted only to 
his equals in royal rank, and gave outward mani- 
festations of the great esteem he held for Columbus. 
But it is also told that King John was secretly dis- 
turbed by the fact that Columbus had accomplished 
for the sovereigns of Spain the very expedition he 
himself once had the opportunity to send out, and 
he must have been more than mortal not to be dis- 
turbed by this reflection. In fact, it is no secret 
that he was urged by his counsellors to take revenge 
upon the man who had offered to discover for him a 
new world and who had taken his services to another 
crown, by having him assassinated. Whatever the 
truth, it is a part of the traditions to which refer- 
ence has been made, that only upon the intercession 


298 A VOYAGE WITH COLTiMBtfS. 

of Prince Adolfo was he induced to abandon this 
scheme and preserve his escutcheon from the stain 
it would otherwise have borne. When the Prince 
told him with what kindness he had been treated by 
Columbus (who, when he discovered his connection 
with the Portuguese Crown, might have served his 
own interests and those of his sovereigns better by 
despatching him than allowing him to continue with 
the expedition, but who never even harbored the 
thought), the King could not but show equal mag- 
nanimity to the Admiral. This is the reason, the 
traditions have it, for King John’s great considera- 
tion of Columbus at his court, when, if he had con- 
sulted inclination and interest, it might have been 
far otherwise. 


CHAPTEK XXVII. 


THE 4 4 NINA ’ ’ BEATS THE 4 4 PINTA ’ ’ INTO POET. 

Two days the King detained Columbus at his court, 
greedily absorbing all the information relating to 
the New World that his guest freely communicated 
in answer to his inquiries. Then, having acquired 
as much as possible relating to the country beyond 
the sea and the way thither, King John allowed 
Columbus to depart, fully resolved in his own mind 
to despatch an expedition immediately over the 
route described, and forestall so far as he could the 
glory coming to the Spanish crown. The extreme 
measure of making way with Columbus he dismissed 
as unworthy a generous monarch, moved thereto, it 
is said, by the entreaties of his son. Adolfo re- 
mained secluded in the palace, by the orders of 
King John, the latter hardly being willing to ac- 
knowledge his remote share in allowing him to ac- 
company, even clandestinely, the great discoverer 
on his voyage. So it was barely possible for the 


300 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


Prince to obtain one last interview with Columbus 
ere he took his departure; and as for Pablo, 
though Adolfo had begged his father to allow him 
to remain with him, at least for a while, the King 
would not hear of it. ‘ ‘ There is no knowing what 
the boy might reveal of your misadventures, ’ ’ said 
his royal sire; “and though you may be, as you 
claim, greatly attached to him, yet it is necessary, 
for reasons of state, that he should depart, not only 
for his own country, but from your remembrance. 
Forget him, then, and also forget that you ever 
took part in the expedition fitted out by my rivals 
the king and queen of Spain. ’ ’ 

Obliged to obey the royal mandate, his own posi- 
tion being far from secure, owing to his tenuous 
hold upon his father’s affections, Adolfo sadly com- 
plied, seeking but one last interview with his former 
commander and companion, just prior to their leav- 
ing court. He embraced Pablo again and again, 
telling him that he should never forget him, and 
assuring him that if ever he came to a position or 
influence in the land he would at once send for him. 
Pablo, on his side, promised to keep the contin- 
gency in mind, and finally took a tearful farewell 
of his friend, retaining his hand until about to 
mount his burro for departure. 


THE “NINA” BEATS THE “PINTA” INTO PORT. 301 

44 Your Excellency is now going to see the Queen, 
my father’s consort,” said Adolfo to Columbus, 
and you will doubtless be royally entertained by 
her and her women of honor ; but I cannot accom- 
pany you, owing to reasons which I have already 
explained. I am not a favorite with her Majesty ; 
but she is a good woman, your Excellency, and 
will treat you well. Farewell, now, my dear 
friend. Be good to Pablo, senor, for he is honest 
and faithful, and besides, he has no kin or comrades 
to aid him in time of trouble. ’ ’ 

4 4 1 promise, Prince, that the boy shall be looked 
after on our return to Spain. I intend to take him 
with me to court and present him to the King and 
Queen, soliciting their favor for him. Is there 
nothing else I can do for you ? You have served 
well the cause and hence have served well my sov- 
ereigns. Would it were possible for me to requite 
you as your deeds deserve.” 

4 4 There is nothing more, your Excellency. I 
shall always treasure this experience as the choicest 
of my life. More I cannot say, the commands of 
the King being upon me. So farewell, and God 
speed you both. ’ ’ 

Accompanied by a band of gay cavaliers, Co- 
lumbus, Pablo and the chief pilot set forth on 


302 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


their return to the caravel, on the way tarrying 
a while at the convent of San Antonio, where the 
Queen and her women were passing a period of 
seclusion. Her Majesty received the distinguished 
visitor with every attention ; but she could not 
drive away the feeling of sadness that oppressed 
him at the thought of parting with the Prince, nor 
bring even one smile to the face of the usually gay 
and cheerful Pablo. Sleeping that night at lodg- 
ings prepared by order of the King, the travelers 
next day continued their journey and at noon ar- 
rived at the harbor, from which, the caravel being 
ready to sail, a departure was taken for Palos, 
which they safely reached at sunrise of the fif- 
teenth of March. 

And what a reception awaited the weary voyag- 
ers, as their battered caravel gained the harbor in- 
side the bar of Saltes, which they had left nearly 
seven months and a half before ! A watchman in 
the mirador of La Pabida proclaimed the arrival of 
the long-expected vessel, and the bells of the mon- 
astery rang out joyously, carrying the news to the 
people of Palos, who thronged the shore, as willing 
now to extend a welcome to the successful dis- 
coverer, as they were a few months before to exe- 
crate his departure. Their joy at beholding the 


THE “NINA” BEATS THE “PINTA” INTO PORT. 303 

caravel was tempered by their distress at finding it 
alone, with no sign of the two vessels that had set 
forth with it more than seven months before, and 
containing less than one-third the total number of 
sailors that had departed in the fleet. Lamentation 
succeeded to rejoicings as the crowd pressed upon 
the “ Nina’s ” crew, demanding excitedly what had 
become of this one and that ; why any had been 
left, and whether any had been drowned or mur- 
dered by the savages in the far-distant country. 
Columbus could only tell them that about one-third 
the men had been left to garrison the fort, as many 
more had returned in the caravel; but of the 
‘ £ Pinta ’ ’ and her crew he knew absolutely nothing. 
It so happened, however, that on the evening of 
that very day the “ Pinta” came stealing in, as if 
desirous of attracting as little attention as possible. 
She cast anchor in the river and her commander, 
Captain Alonzo Pinzon, came ashore quietly and im- 
mediately sought the seclusion of his dwelling at 
Moguer. He had been driven by the storm into the 
turbulent Bay of Biscay and had made land at the 
port of Bayonne, whence he had despatched letters 
to the Spanish court informing his sovereigns that 
to the best of his belief Columbus was lost, and re- 
questing permission to visit them and present an 


304 : 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


account of his discoveries. Whatever the faults of 
Captain Martin Alonzo, he was honest and sincere, 
a man of generous nature, born to command and 
not fitted for the position of a subordinate. But he 
had committed the fault of sailing away from the 
fleet when off the coast of Cuba, contrary to the 
Admiral’s orders, and for this fault the Spanish 
crown reprimanded him after the report of Colum- 
bus had been received at court. Pierced to the 
heart by the treatment he received from his sover- 
eigns, whom he had so nobly served ; and from Co- 
lumbus, whose success was mainly owing to his 
invaluable assistance, Captain Pinzon fell sick and 
died, soon after his arrival home. The Admiral 
had studiously avoided him at Palos, apparently 
forgetting his great indebtedness to this noble mari- 
ner, and when the news of his death reached him 
at Seville he made no comment. But Captain 
Martin Alonzo had one sincere mourner outside his 
immediate family, and that one was Pablo, who 
gratefully remembered the many times he had be- 
friended him, and the bluff, hearty manner of the 
sailor, whose heart, as tender as it was great, burst 
with grief at the scorn and neglect of those he had 
served so loyally. 

Having no kindred at Palos, Pablo accepted the 


THE “NINA” BEATS THE “ BINT A” INTO PORT. 305 

Admiral’s invitation to accompany him to court, 
which was then being held at Barcelona, many days’ 
journey across the country from the port at which 
they had arrived. He could not understand the 
character of Columbus, any more than other of the 
Admiral’s friends : how a man of so many great 
and noble traits could entertain base suspicions and be 
capable of treating a generous man like Pinzon with 
such neglect. But the character of the Admiral, as 
history has informed us, was a puzzle to all, and 
probably even to himself. It shows merely how a 
man of great ambitions and high aspirations can be 
capable of actions susceptible of an accusation of 
meanness. The fact remains, after all, that Colum- 
bus was ungenerous to the Pinzons, as he afterwards 
was to others with whom he was associated and to 
whom he was also indebted. But to Pablo, who 
wonderingly viewed these questionable acts of his 
master, Columbus was true to his word, and seeing 
that the boy had no friends or near relatives in the 
village of his birth, he kept him near his person and 
watched over him with fatherly solicitude. Per- 
haps this was owing to the fact that he himself had 
a son about Pablo’s age, and he felt a tenderness for 
him on this account. Whatever the reason, he 
kept an oversight of the fatherless boy, and when he 
20 


306 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


went to Seville, preparatory to making the longer 
journey, he took him along. At Seville, that 
beautiful city on the noble Guadalquivir, and one of 
the chief ports of Spain in the time of her greatness, 
Columbus assembled his retinue for the triumphal 
journey to Barcelona. He had sent a letter to 
Ferdinand and Isabella from Palos, informing them 
of his great achievement and enclosing a copy of the 
journal which he had so painfully written, giving a 
detailed account of all the happenings during his 
absence from Spain. In it was narrated every trivial 
incident of the voyage ; the discovery of land, the 
arrival on Cuba’s coast, the treatment he received 
from the savages, the lamentable affair of the ship- 
wreck, Captain Pinzon’s defection, the wealth and 
generosity of Cacique Guacanagari, the gold that 
was given him and also that which was found in the 
Eio del Oro, the sail along the north coast of His- 
paniola, the first fight with the Caribs and the sub- 
sequent adventures, with an account of his hostile 
reception at Saint Mary’s, and finally his interview 
with the King of Portugal. After about a week at 
Seville a letter arrived from court, congratulating 
“ Our Admiral of the Ocean Sea, Yiceroy and 
Governor of the islands discovered in the Indies,” 
on his great and glorious achievements. Having 


THE “NINA” BEATS THE “PINT A” INTO PORT. 307 

been informed that the King of Portugal probably 
intended sending an expedition over his route, — as 
the Admiral had shrewdly surmised when he so 
closely questioned him, — the sovereigns urged 
Columbus to lose no time in preparing for still an- 
other voyage, in order to consummate the great 
work already so auspiciously begun. So Columbus 
passed the time (when he was not summoned to at- 
tend interviews by high officials or to accept the 
laudations of the multitudes who came to Seville 
for the express purpose of meeting him) in making 
preparations for a second expedition. His execu- 
tive ability is shown in the thoroughness of these 
preparations, at a time when worn with the fatigues 
of the first voyage and borne down by many labors. 
But he was then at the best period of his life, about 
fifty-seven or fifty -eight years of age, erect of car- 
riage, sinewy and stalwart; though his hair was 
gray and his aspect that of a man much older than 
he really was. Certainly, at that time Columbus 
was at the height of his glory, reveling in the 
adulations of the people who, but a few short months 
previously, had reviled him as a base adventurer. 
He magnanimously forgave all his enemies, as well 
he could afford to, made new and powerful friends 
among the nobility, inspired others with his own 


308 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


enthusiasm for adventure in the New World he had 
discovered, and set all Spain afire with a desire for 
further conquests. 

By the time the preparations were made for de- 
parture from Seville, everything was well advanced 
for the beginning of the second voyage : ships were 
engaged, sailors enlisted ; and there were so many 
applicants from cavaliers of high degree for permis- 
sion to accompany him that Columbus might have 
fitted out a fleet twice as large as he did, with set- 
tlers enough to colonize a province. 

Pablo, meanwhile, came in for a small share of 
the glory that surrounded the achievements of his 
great master, for few of the sailors of the fleet had 
come from Palos with Columbus, and the boy was 
kept quite busy answering the thousand questions 
that were put to him by the excited people. Co- 
lumbus himself was too much engaged with great 
affairs to attend to the commonalty, and was acces- 
sible only to the nobility and high officials of the 
Church ; so it fell to Pablo to act as “ master of cer- 
emonies ” at the many gatherings held for the grat- 
ification of the popular curiosity. He held the place 
of “ honorary custodian of the golden treasures,” 
and as showman-in-chief of the Indians, whom the 
Spaniards never tired of looking at, they were so 


THE “NINA” BEATS THE “PINTA” INTO PORT. 309 

different from any other people they had ever seen. 
Juan the Lucayan and his sister, little Julia, were 
the boy’s constant companions, and now that 
Adolfo was absent he was the only person who could 
converse with them in their own tongue, and hence 
an indispensable member of the community. 

Especially a favorite with the Admiral’s younger 
son, Ferdinand, who was about Fablo’s age, and 
who, with his brother, Don Diego, met Columbus at 
Seville, the boy became more than ever attached to 
the family. Like Diego and Ferdinand, he was 
motherless, and like them, also, he had hitherto 
been almost friendless ; so there was a double tie be- 
tween these youths, he and Ferdinand in after life 
becoming almost inseparable. 


CHAPTEE XXYIII. 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 

Impatient as Columbus must have been at the de- 
lays in setting out for Barcelona, where the court 
was held at the time, he was also greatly pleased 
that to reach it he had to cross the greater portion 
of Spain, as thereby he would enjoy a prolonged 
ovation. The receptions at Palos and Seville were 
only a foretaste of what was to follow in greater 
measure, — that Columbus knew full well, and so 
made his preparations accordingly. He had been 
beaten back for years in his endeavors to win the 
commanding position to which he knew he was en- 
titled ; but at last the supreme hour had come, and 
he was to reap his long-delayed reward! So he 
made the most of it; and who can blame him? 

‘ ‘ Son Pablo, ’ ’ said the Admiral on the morning 
of their departure from Seville, “ we are about to 
enjoy a protracted triumph, in our journey to the 

court at Barcelona. Unless the signs portend amiss, 
310 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 3H 

we are to receive such an ovation as never yet hath 
been accorded any man, or men. I say this, not 
in pride and boasting, but from the fulness of my 
heart ; for it is but the consummation of my plans, 
lo, these many years delayed and frustrated. What 
sayest thou, my boy, art thou elated at the forth- 
coming triumph? ” 

“ Your Excellency, I am but a boy of the peo- 
ple. I have done nothing of my own accord. 
What has come to me has been through your favor ; 
so why should I feel elated, Excellency? ” 

“True, why shouldst thou? And yet, there may 
be cause, my boy. There be many reasons why 
thou shouldst feel pride in thy position, elevated as 
thou hast been from the commonalty to sit with kings 
and consort with princes. And speaking of princes ; 
it only lacks the presence here of that amiable youth, 
Prince Adolfo, to make our triumph complete. 
But, to revert to thyself : Thou hast every reason 
to feel proud, for thou hast done thy duty, and that, 
son of my adoption, is more to thy credit than great 
attainments. Thou hast done thy duty, by me and 
by thy sovereigns, and verily thou shalt receive thy 
reward, my boy.” 

“ My reward is already greater than my de- 
serts,” rejoined Pablo modestly, and recalling his 


312 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


share in causing the wreck of the Santa Maria, the 
remembrance of which had been a thorn in his 
breast ever since it happened. 4 4 And, moreover, 
to be near your Excellency, in time of peril and in 
peace, is enough ; yes, more than enough, to satisfy 
me all my life long.” 

44 Well, well, thy modesty is refreshing, after the 
experience I have had with these empty-headed cav- 
aliers, who have come vaunting of achievements 
never known to man. Thy loyalty is another 
thing to thy credit, also, and the two traits go well 
together. But, are thy friends, the red Indians, ready 
for the journey ? Tell them to be prepared for the 
longest jaunt they ever took, and be forewarned 
that they will be gazed at by thousands of people, 
yea, perhaps by millions, ere the journey’s end be 
reached. See to it that they are well mounted, for 
I have ordered burros and mules enough for all the 
party, besides spare mounts in case of disaster. We 
left Hispaniola with a full dozen of the savages, but 
as four of them are ill, we shall take along with us 
only eight, including thy two intimates, Juan and 
Julia. Methinks these red barbarians will make a 
deep impression upon their majesties ; and as for 
the gold and the barbaric trinkets, the rude arms 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 31 £ 

and war-trophies, mind cannot conceive of how it 
will affect them.” 

All the world of the present day knows of that 
prolonged triumphal journey across the land then so 
recently won from the Moors by the prowess of the 
Spanish monarchs, and it will suffice for our purpose 
that we merely allude to it in general terms. At 
the head of the procession rode the Admiral, 
mounted on a stately mule so richly caparisoned that 
some of the people mistook its rider for royalty per- 
sonified. Sensible as he was to the high honors ac- 
corded him, Columbus yet maintained a grave and 
even humble demeanor that won the hearts of all 
who saw him then. He was preceded by a band 
of couriers clad in rich raiment, and surrounded by 
a group of cavaliers who added eclat to the oc- 
casion by their presence. Following after the Ad- 
miral and his attendants came the Indians, who, to 
tell the truth, attracted more attention than Co- 
lumbus himself. First of all, the people wished to 
see the man who had added a vast domain to the 
possessions of Spain ; then they desired to gaze up- 
on the natives of that country far beyond the vast 
ocean, who, decorated with paint and golden orna- 
ments and with bright parrots’ feathers in the 
raven tresses hanging down their backs, were in- 


314 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

deed well worth looking at. By this time the 
Indians had become used to being gazed on, and 
even pointed at and prodded with sticks and swords ; 
but they were confused by all this hubbub and com- 
motion caused by their presence in the procession 
and heartily wished themselves back in their native 
wilds. 

‘ ‘ Are we taken for wild beasts ? ’ 5 demanded 
Juan the Lucayan indignantly of Pablo, as the 
crowds pressed upon and nearly dismounted them, 
in their eagerness to get near the strange, copper- 
colored creatures from the W estern W orld. ‘ ‘ Why, 
my people in Guanahani, barbarians as you call 
them, were even more polite than these. See, 
they have nearly pressed my sister from her sad- 
dle.” 

“It is only curiosity, Juan,” answered Pablo, 

‘ ‘ but vulgar curiosity, I must admit. Suppose you 
let out a war-whoop, Juan, just for fun.” 

The Lucayan accepted the suggestion eagerly and 
placing his hand to his mouth emitted a shrill, ter- 
rible cry, such as the Caribs used when they de- 
scended upon the inoffensive islanders. As this 
fierce cry rent the air the effect was magical, the 
crowd about the procession dissolving as if it had 
been melted away by a blast from a fiery furnace, 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 315 

men and boys, girls and women, falling over each, 
other in their terror. 

The commotion extended to the head of the caval- 
cade, and a courier came galloping back with a de- 
mand from Columbus as to the cause of the disturb- 
ance. Juan and Pablo, as well as their companions, 
were so convulsed with laughter that they could not 
at first answer the courier’s demand for informa- 
tion; but when they did he also joined with them, 
and having reported to the Admiral, soon returned 
with permission for Juan to “ whoop it up ” when- 
ever the crowd became too importunate. 

And thus the triumphal procession passed through 
Spain, everywhere exciting the greatest curiosity, 
everywhere received with eclat and hospitality, 
until at last the walls of Barcelona appeared before 
the travelers, and their journey came to an end, 
after a brilliant street parade in the city of the 
royal court. Not only the streets of the city, but 
the plazas, the windows, the balconies and even the 
roof-tops of the houses, were alive with spectators, 
thousands upon thousands, gathered to welcome 
home the great discoverer of America. Kealizing 
that the press of people would be too great to allow 
of the Admiral and his cavalcade being received 
within doors, the Spanish monarchs had ordered a 


316 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


grand pavilion erected in the chief plaza, where, 
underneath a gorgeous canopy and surrounded by 
the nobility of the land, they received their Ad- 
miral of the Ocean Sea and accorded him the honors 
that were his due. 

¥e know, for it has been on record for more 
than four hundred years, that after Columbus had 
dismounted and had been conducted into the royal 
presence, he knelt before Ferdinand and Isabella, 
and kissed their hands as an act of homage due the 
sovereigns he had so faithfully and gloriously served. 
They on their part treated him with great conde- 
cension, and after he had made his obeisance or- 
dered him to sit between the thrones they occupied, 
while they listened to his story of the discovery. 
Ranged in a semicircle in front of the royal pair 
were the Indians, resplendent in gorgeous colors 
and golden ornaments, forming such a strange spec- 
tacle that the King and Queen could hardly refrain 
from gazing at them continually. They paid the 
most profound attention to Columbus, losing not a 
word of his wonderful narrative; but they were 
also attracted by the visible tokens of his discovery, 
the copper-colored natives of the New World, the 
golden treasure, the rare birds and plants, outspread 
before them. Their hearts were filled to overflow- 



✓ 


Ferdinand and Isabella listening to Columbus as be tells the story of the discovery of America.— Page 316. 

A Voyage with Columbus, 









THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 317 

ing with gratitude to God for so conspicuously re- 
warding their venture upon the unknown seas, and 
after the Admiral had concluded his discourse the 
devout monarchs fell upon their knees and gave 
thanks to the Almighty for His gifts and manifold 
mercies. The deep hush that followed this devout 
ceremony was broken by the royal choir, assembled 
in the background, chanting to the accompaniment 
of instrumental music that noble and ancient an- 
them, Te Deum laudamus , — u We praise Thee, O 
God,” — and for the first time in their lives the bar- 
barians from America looked upon the splendors of 
a royal court and witnessed the Christian sover- 
eigns’ acknowledgment of dependence upon the 
Most High. 

After this was concluded the King and Queen un- 
bent still further and held an informal reception, at 
which the different members of the expedition were 
presented by Columbus. Foremost among them, of 
course, were the eight Indians, who were entreated 
to converse in their own tongue, in order that the 
sovereigns might hear its liquid syllables. As there 
was no one but Pablo who could translate their speech 
to make it intelligible to the royal ear, the boy was 
really the most conspicuous personage present, 
as well as the only indispensable one. Despite his 


318 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


own declaration, when in Guanahani, that he never 
could learn another language than his own, he had 
really become quite proficient in the Indian speech, 
having applied himself diligently to its acquisition, 
in order to win favor with his great friend, the 
Admiral. So now, when the Indians haltingly pro- 
nounced a speech filled with expressions of loyalty 
and homage to the Spanish monarchs, through Juan 
the Lucayan as their mouthpiece, Pablo translated 
it into elegant Castilian, which also he had acquired 
through indefatigable application and observation of 
the speech of those higher in the social scale than 
himself. The monarchs were delighted, and King 
Ferdinand said to Columbus, “ Who is the mod- 
est-looking youth who so ably interprets the 
Indian language? Yerily, my Admiral, it seems to 
me he must be an indispensable member of your 
company. ’ 5 

“ And that he is, your Majesty,” replied Colum- 
bus, glad of an opportunity for bringing Pablo for- 
ward at this time ; though he had determined to 
introduce him later on. “ He is a boy of Palos, 
your Majesty, who accompanied the expedition much 
against my better judgment, but who soon became 
of greatest service to me, and also to your Majesty’s 
cause. He and another, almost solely, acquired 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 319 

sufficient acquaintance with the aboriginal speech 
to interpret for us by the time we arrived at 
Hispaniola; and, moreover, he, boy though he be, 
has been my stanchest friend and welcome com- 
panion.” 

4 4 And is his moral worth equal to his intelligence, 
Admiral? Perad venture he be dependable and also 
possessed of high character, it might be to our ad- 
vantage to attach him to the court. It is our royal 
purpose to seek out and secure the youth of the land 
pre- eminent for worth and loyalty, in order to have 
around us the promise for future servitors. This 
yout£, too, is about the age of Prince Juan, our 
son and probable successor, who is in sore need 
of a companion who can be trusted, stanch and 
dependable. ” 

“ Sire, your Majesty can receive my assurance 
without distrust, that this youth is all you might 
desire. I will answer for his conduct with my life. 
Indeed, I perhaps owe my life to his watchfulness 
when on the voyage, when he frustrated a villains’ 
plot to murder me, — he and Prince — ; I mean a 
companion. If your Majesty will accept my cre- 
dentials for him, you will never have cause to re- 
gret attaching him to your sacred person. But, at 
the same time, your Majesty, I shall be depriving 


320 A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 

myself of a faithful servitor, for I had reckoned 
upon taking Pablo with me on the coming expedi- 
tion to the New-found World. Still, as it is your 
cause I serve, and both of us hold no higher purpose 
than to forward it, I relinquish all claims in def- 
erence to your expressed desire. ’ ’ 

“ My Admiral, I would not deprive you of so 
valuable an assistant ; but let that matter rest in 
abeyance. When opportunity offers, I will have 
my notary inscribe him on the royal rolls as an at- 
tendant at court with a salary of ten thousand mar- 
avedis. Then, perad venture it seem best to allow 
him to go with you again, we will decide according 
to the exigency of the moment. Meanwhile, this 
youth and one of your own sons shall be retained 
as pages at our court and as companions for Prince 
Juan.” 

“ Your Majesty, I thank you for this expression 
of favor. I had told the boy he should be re- 
warded ; but this exceeds all I had hoped for him, 
as well as for my son.” 

u It is well, especially as the Queen has seemingly 
taken a fancy for the youth. See, she is conversing 
with him, and I mistake greatly if she be not im- 
pressed by his modesty and manliness. My consort 
is o’erborne by the pressing cares of state, and sel- 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 321 

dom do we see her smile ; but verily, she is now 
laughing with approval at his remarks. My Ad- 
miral, now that the Queen hath discovered virtue 
in the boy, his fortune is assured, for her judgment 
is inerrant; — and as well, her desire, or rather her 
command, is not to be gainsaid.” 

King Ferdinand spoke feelingly this latter sen- 
tence, and let it drop with a sigh, for, unless his- 
tory has been at fault, he had frequent cause to 
know that the Queen’s commands must be obeyed, 
even by no less a personage than her royal con- 
sort himself. 

It was as the King had said : Queen Isabella had 
taken a great fancy to Pablo, and as well to the 
little Indian girl, J ulia, whose name she proposed 
to change in honor of her own. 

‘ 4 My lord, ’ ’ she said imperiously to the King, 
‘ ‘ come see this quaint specimen from America. 
Doth she not wear a most engaging expression on 
her face? I have concluded to adopt her, and also 
— whether or not it may receive your sanction — 
this youth who hath so ably rendered her speech 
into our own Castilian. ’ 5 

‘ ‘ Is not thy motive open to a question of haste, 
dear Consort ? ” asked King Ferdinand, then say- 
ing to Columbus: “ If I should too hastily assent 
21 


322 


A VOYAGE WITH COLUMBUS. 


to her proposition all might go awry. The only 
way to manage a woman of imperious will is to 
pretend an opposition one may not really mean, my 
Admiral. ’ ’ 

“ Taste or not, the fiat hath gone forth, Consort,” 
rejoined the Queen with offended dignity. “ I 
have discovered in this youth qualities that appear 
to fit him eminently for a companion to the Prince. 
Let that suffice, for it is my will that he be at- 
tached to the court. ’ ’ 

“ Ahem!” said the King. “ If it be thy will, 
let that suffice, as thou hast said.” And he turned 
aside to hide a smile, while the grave Columbus, 
who was seldom moved to mirth, had also to hide 
his face, seeing that the Queen was of a mind to do 
as he and the King had decided in advance. 

Thus it came about, more quickly than had been 
anticipated, that Pablo’s reward reached him at 
court. The march of events had swiftly rescued 
this homeless boy from obscurity and shaped his fu- 
ture. The waif of Palos gained friends and influ- 
ence by loyally doing his duty on that first voyage 
of Columbus to America, and drifted subsequently 
into comparative renown. He rose to eminence at 
the court of Isabella and Ferdinand ; but in his old 
age retired to the obscurity of his native Palos, 


THE BOY OF PALOS WINS ROYAL FAVOR. 323 

around which still thickly cluster the traditions from 
which the writer has drawn this narrative of his 
adventures. 


THE END. 


// 










\ 


















































































































* 


i 




















. • 


































A* L. Burt’s Catalogue of Books for 
Young People by Popular Writers, 52- 
58 Duane Street, New York ^ ^ ns 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

Joe’s Luck: A Boy’s Adventures in California. By 

Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

The story is chock full of stirring incidents, while the amusing situ- 
ations are furnished by Joshua Bickford, from Pumpkin Hollow, and the 
fellow who modestly styles himself the “Rip-tail Roarer, from Pike Co., 
Missouri.” Mr. Alger never writes a poor book, and “Joe’s Luck” is cer- 
tainly one of his best. 

Tom the Bootblack; or, The Road to Success. By 

Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

A bright, enterprising lad was Tom the Bootblack. He was not at all 
ashamed of his humble calling, though always on the lookout to better 
himself. The lad started for Cincinnati to look up his heritage. Mr. 
Grey, the uncle, did not hesitate to employ a ruffian to kill the lad. The 
plan failed, and Gilbert Grey, once Tom the bootblack, came into a com- 
fortable fortune. This is one of Mr. Alger’s best stories. 

Ban the Newsboy. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, 

cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Dan Mordaunt and his mother live in a poor tenement, and the lad is 
pluckily trying to make ends meet by selling papers in the streets of New 
York. A little heiress of six years is confided to the care of the Mor- 
daunts. The child is kidnapped and Dan tracks the child to the house 
where she is hidden, and rescues her. The wealthy aunt of the little 
heiress is so delighted with Dan’s courage and many good qualities 
that she adopts him as her heir. 

Tony the Hero: A Brave Boy’s Adventure with a 

Tramp. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 
Tony, a sturdy bright-eyed boy of fourteen, is under the control of 
Rudolph Rugg, a thorough rascal. After much abuse Tony runs away 
and gets a job as stable boy in a country hotel. Tony is heir to a 
large estate. Rudolph for a consideration hunts up Tony and throws 
him down a deep well. Of course Tony escapes from the fate provided 
for him, and by a brave act, a rich friend secures his rights and Tony 
is prosperous. A very entertaining book. 

The Errand Boy; or, How Phil Brent Won Success. 

By Horatio At.ger, Jr. 12mo, cloth illustrated, price $1.00. 

The career of “The Errand Boy” embraces the city adventures of a 
•mart country lad. Philip was brought up by a kind-hearted innkeeper 
named Brent. The death of Mrs. Brent paved the way for the hero’s 
subsequent troubles. A retired merchant in New York secures him the 
situation of errand boy, and thereafter stands as his friend. 

Tom Temple’s Career. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, 

cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Tom Temple is a bright, self-reliant lad. He leaves Plympton village 
to seek work in New York, whence he undertakes an important mission 
to California. Some of his adventures in the far west are so startling that 
the reader will scarcely close the book until the last page shall have been 
reached. The tale is written in Mr. Alger’s most fascinating style. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the 
publisher, A, L, BURT, 52-58 Duane Street, New York. 


2 A. L. BURT'S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE, 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

Frank Fowler, the Cash Boy. By Horatio Alger, Jb. 

12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Frank Fowler, a poor boy, bravely determines to make a living for 
himself and bis foster-sister Grace. Going to New York he obtains a 
situation as cash boy in a dry goods store. He renders a service to a 
wealthy old gentleman who takes a fancy to the lad, and thereafter 
helps the lad to gain success and fortune. 

Tom Thatcher’s Fortune. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 

12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Tom Thatcher is a brave, ambitious, unselfish boy. He supports his 
mother and sister on meagre wages earned as a shoe-pegger in John 
Simpson’s factory. Tom is discharged from the factory and starts over- 
land for California. He meets with many adventures. The story is told 
in a way which has made Mr. Alger’s name a household word in so many 
homes. 

The Train Boy. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, 

cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Paul Palmer was a wide-awake boy of sixteen who supported his mother 
and sister by selling books and papers on the Chicago and Milwaukee 
Railroad. He detects a young man in the act of picking the pocket of a 
young lady. In a railway accident many passengers are killed, but Paul 
is fortunate enough to assist a Chicago merchant, who out of gratitude 
takes him into his employ. Paul succeeds with t*ct and judgment and 
is well started on the road to business prominence. 

Mark Mason’s Victory. The Trials and Triumphs of 

a Telegraph Boy. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price 

$ 1 . 00 . 

Mark Mason, the telegraph boy, was a sturdy, honest lad, who pluckily 
won his way to success by his honest manly efforts under many diffi- 
culties. This story will please the very large class of boys who regard 
Mr. Alger as a favorite author. 

A Debt of Honor. The Story of Gerald Lane's Success 

in the Far West. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price 

$ 1 . 00 . 

The story of Gerald Lane and the account of the many trials and dis- 
appointments which he passed through befor^ he attained success, will 
interest all boys who have read the previous stories of this delightful 
author. 

Ben Bruce. Scenes in the Life of a Bowery Newsboy. 

By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Ben Bruce was a brave, manly, generous boy. The story of his efforts, 
and many seeming failures and disappointments, and his final success, are 
most interesting to all readers. The tale is written in Mr. Alger’s 
most fascinating style. 

The Castaways; or, On the Florida Beefs. By James 

Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

This tale smacks of the salt sea. From the moment that the Sea 
Queen leaves low r er New York bay till the breeze leaves her becalmed off 
the coast of Florida, one can almost hear the whistle of the wind 
through her rigging, the creak of her straining cordage as she heels to 
the leeward. The adventures of Ben Clark, the hero of the story and 
Jake the cook, cannot fail to charm the reader. As a writer for young 
people Mr. Otis is a prime favorite. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the 
publisher, A. L. BURT, 53-58 Duane Street, New York. 


A. L. BURT*S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE. 3 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

Wrecked on Spider Island; or, How Ned Rogers Found 

the Treasure. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Ned Rogers, a “down-east” plucky lad ships as cabin boy to earn 
a livelihood. Ned is marooned on Spider Island, and while there dis- 
covers a wreck submerged in the sand, and finds a considerable amount 
of treasure. The capture of the treasure and the incidents of the 
voyage serve to make as entertaining a story of sea-life as the most 
captious boy could desire. 

The Search for the Silver City : A Tale of Adventure in 

Yucatan. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Two lads, Teddy Wright and Neal Emery, embark on the steam 
yacht Day Dream for a cruise to the tropics. The yacht is destroyed 
by fire, and then the boat is cast upon the coast of Yucatan. They 
hear of the wonderful Silver City, of the Chan Santa Cruz Indians, 
and with the help of a faithful Indian ally carry off a number of the 
golden images from the temples. Pursued with relentless vigor at last 
their escape is effected in an astonishing manner. The story is so 
full of exciting incidents that the reader is quite carried away with 
the novelty and realism of the narrative. 

A Runaway Brig; or. An Accidental Cruise. By 

James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

This is a sea tale, and the reader can look out upon the wide shimmer- 
ing sea as it flashes back the sunlight, and imagine himself afloat with 
Harry Vandyne, Walter Morse, Jim Libby and that old shell-back, Bob 
Brace, on the brig Bonita. The boys discover a mysterious document 
which enables them to find a buried treasure. They are stranded on 
an island and at last are rescued with the treasure. The boys are sure 
to be fascinated with this entertaining story. 

The Treasure Finders : A Boy’s Adventures in 

Nicaragua. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

Roy and Dean Coloney, with their guide Tongla, leave their father’s 
Indigo plantation to visit the wonderful ruins of an ancient city. The 
boys eagerly explore the temples of an extinct race and discover three 
golden images cunningly hidden away. They escape with the greatest 
difficulty. Eventually they reach safety with their golden prizes. We 
doubt if there ever was written a more entertaining story than “The 
Treasure Finders.” 

Jack, the Hunchback. A Story of the Coast of Maine, 

By James Otis. Price $1.00. 

This is the story of a little hunchback who lived on Cape Elizabeth, 
on the coast of Maine. His trials and successes are most interesting. 
From first to last nothing stays the interest of the narrative. It bears us 
along as on a stream whose current varies in direction, but never loses 
its force. 

With Washington at Monmouth: A Story of Three 

Philadelphia Boys. By James Otis. 12mo, ornamental cloth, olivine 

edges, illustrated, price $1.50. 

Three Philadelphia lads assist the American spies and make regular 
and frequent visits to Valley Forge in the Winter while the British 
occupied the city. The story abounds with pictures of Colonial life 
skillfully drawn, and the glimpses of Washington’s soldiers which are 
given shown that the work has not been hastily done, or without con- 
siderable study. The story is wholesome and patriotic in tone, as are 
all of Mr. Otis’ works. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the 
publisher, A, l>. BUST, 52-58 Duane Street, New York. 


4 A. L. BURT*S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE, 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

With Lafayette at Yorktown: A Story of How Two 

Boys Joined the Continental Army. By James Otis. 12mo, ornamental 
cloth, olivine edges, illustrated, price $1.50. 

Two lads from Portmouth, N. H., attempt to enlist In the Colonial 
Army, and are given employment as spies. There is no lack of exciting 
incidents which the youthful reader craves, but it is healthful excite- 
ment brimming with facts which every boy should be familiar with, 
and while the reader is following the adventures of Ben Jaffrays and 
Ned Allen he is acquiring a fund of historical lore which will remain 
in his memory long after that which he has memorized from text- 
books has been forgotten. 

At the Siege of Havana. Being the Experiences of 

Three Boys Serving under Israel Putnam in 1762. By James Otis. 12mo, 
ornamental cloth, olivine edges, illustrated, price $1.50. 

“At the Siege of Havana” deals with that portion of the island’s 
history when the English king captured the capital, thanks to the 
assistance given by the troops from New England, led in part by Col. 
Israel Putnam. 

The principal characters are Darius Lunt, the lad who, represented as 
telling the story, and his comrades, Robert Clement and Nicholas 
Vallet. Colonel Putnam also figures to considerable extent, necessarily. 
In the tale, and the whole forms one of the most readable stories founded on 
historical facts. 

The Defense of Fort Henry. A Story of Wheeling 

Creek in 1777. By James Otis. 12mo, ornamental cloth, olivine edges, 
illustrated, price $1.50. 

Nowhere in the history of our country can be found more heroic or 
thrilling incidents than in the story of those brave men and women 
who founded the settlement of Wheeling in the Colony of Virginia. The 
recital of what Elizabeth Zane did is in itself as heroic a story as can 
be imagined. The wondrous bravery displayed by Major McCulloch 
and his gallant comrades, the sufferings of the colonists and their sacrifice 
of blood and life, stir the blood of old as well as young readers. 

The Capture of the Laughing Mary. A Story of Three 

New York Boys in 1776. By James Otis. 12mo, ornamental cloth, olivine 
edges, price $1.50. 

“During the British occupancy of New York, at the outbreak of the 
Revolution, a Yankee lad hears of the plot to take General Washington’s 
person, and calls in two companions to assist the patriot cause. They 
do some astonishing things, and, incidentally, lay the way for an 
American navy later, by the exploit which gives its name to the 
work. Mr. Otis’ books are too well known to require any particular 
commendation to the young.” — Evening Post. 

With Warren at Bunker Hill. A Story of the Siege of 

Boston. By James Otis. 12mo, ornametnal cloth, olivine edges, illus- 
trated, price $1.50. 

“This is a tale of the siege of Boston, which opens on the day after 
the doings at Lexington and Concord, with a description of home life 
in Boston, introduces the reader to the British camp at Charlestown, 
shows Gen. Warren at home, describes what a boy thought of the 
battle of Bunker Hill, and closes with the raising of the siege. The 
three heroes, George Wentworth, Ben Scarlett and an old ropemaker, 
incur the enmity of a young Tory, who causes them many adventures 
the boys will like to read.” — Detroit Free Press. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the 
publisher, A. L, BUST, 52-58 Duane Street, New York. 


A. L. BURT^S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE. 5 

■ — — ■— -■ ■ — ■ - - ■ — . -t— , 

BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

With the Swamp Fox. The Story of General Marion’s 

Spies. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

This story deals with General Francis Marion’s heroic struggle in the 
Carolinas. General Marion’s arrival to take command of these brave 
men and rough riders is pictured as a boy might have seen it, and 
although the story is devoted to what the lads did, the Swamp Fox 
is ever present in the mind of the reader. 

On the Kentucky Frontier. A Story of the Fighting 

Pioneers of the West. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1. 
In the history of our country there is no more thrilling story than 
that of the work done on the Mississippi river by a handful of frontiers- 
men. Mr. Otis takes the reader on that famous expedition from the 
arrival of Major Clarke’s force at Corn Island, until Kaskaskia was 
captured. He relates that part of Simon Kenton’s life history which 
is not usually touched upon either by the historian or the story teller. 
This is on& of the most entertaining books for young people which has 
been published. 

Sarah Dillard’s Ride. A Story of South Carolina in 

in 1780. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

“This book deals with the Carolinas in 1780, giving a wealth of detail of 
the Mountain Men who struggled so valiantly against the king’s troops. 
Major Ferguson is the prominent British officer of the story, which is 
told as though coming from a youth who experienced these adventures. 
In this way the famous ride of Sarah Dillard is brought out as an 
incident-of the plot.” — Boston Journal. 

A Tory Flot. A Story of the Attempt to Kill General 

Washington. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

“ ‘A Tory Plot’ is the story of two lads who overhear something 
of the plot originated during the Revolution by Gov. Tryon to capture 
or murder Washington. They communicate their knowledge to Gen. 
Putnam and are commissioned by him to play the role of detectives 
in the matter. They do so, and meet with many adventures and hair- 
breadth escapes. The boys are, of course, mythical, but they serve to en- 
able the author to put into very attractive shape much valuable knowledge 
concerning one phase of the Revolution.” — Pittsburgh Times. 

A Traitor’s Escape. A Story of the Attempt to Seize 

Benedict Arnold. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 
“This is a tale with stirring scenes depicted in each chapter, bringing 
clearly before the mind the glorious deeds of the early settlers in this 
country. In an historical work dealing with this country’s past, no 
plot can hold the attention closer than this one, which describes the 
attempt and partial success of Benedict Arnold’s escape to New York, 
where he remained as the guest of Sir Henry Clinton. All those who 
actually figured in the arrest of the traitor, as well as Gen. Washing- 
ton, are included as characters.” — Albany Union. 

A Cruise with Paul Jones. A Story of Naval Warfare 

in 1776. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

“This story takes up that portion of Paul Jones’ adventurous life 
when he was hovering off the British coast, watching for an oppor- 
tunity to strike the enemy a blow. It deals more particularly with 
bis descent upon Whitehaven, the seizure of Lady Selkirk’s plate, and 
the famous battle with the Drake. The boy who figures in the tale 
Is one who was taken from a derelict by Paul Jones shortly after this 
particular cruise was begun.” — Chicago Inter-Ooean. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price By the 
publisher, A. L. BURT, 52-58 Duane Street, New York. 


6 A. L. BURT'S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE, 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 


Corporal Lige’s Recruit. A Story of Crown Point and 

Ticonderoga. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1,00. 

“In ‘Corporal Lige’s Recruit,’ Mr. Otis tells the amusing story of an 
old soldier, proud of his record, who had served the king in ’58, and who 
takes the lad, Isaac Rice, as his ‘personal recruit.’ The lad acquits 
himself superbly. Col. Ethan Allen ‘in the name of God and the con- 
tinental congress,’ infuses much martial spirit into the narrative, which 
will arouse the keenest interest as it proceeds. Crown Point, Ticon- 
deroga, Benedict Arnold and numerous other famous historical names 
appear in this dramatic tale.’’ — Boston Globe. 

Morgan, the Jersey Spy. A Story of the Siege of York- 

town in 1781. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

“The two lads who are utilized by the author to emphasize the details 
of the work done during that memorable time were real boys who lived 
on the banks of the York river, and who aided the Jersey spy in his 
dangerous occupation. In the guise of fishermen the lads visit York- 
town, are suspected of being spies, and put under arrest. Morgan risks 
his life to save them. The final escape, the thrilling encounter with a 
squad of red coats, when they are exposed equally to the bullets of 
friends and foes, told in a masterly fashion, makes of this volume one 
of the most entertaining books of the year.” — Inter-Ocean. 


The Young Scout: The Story of a West Point Lieu- 

tenant. By Edward S. Ellis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

The crafty Apache chief Geronimo but a few years ago was the 

most terrible scourge of the southwest border. The author has woven, 
in a tale of thrilling interest, all the incidents of Geronimo’s last raid. 
The hero is Lieutenant James Decker, a recent graduate of West Point. 
Ambitious to distinguish himself the young man takes many a desperate 
chance against the enemy and on more than one occasion narrowly 
escapes with his life. In our opinion Mr. Ellis is the best writer of 
Indian stories now before the public. 

Adrift in the Wilds: The Adventures of Two Ship- 
wrecked Boys. By Edward S. Ellis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 
Elwood Brandon and Howard Lawrence are en route for San Fran- 
cisco. Off the coast of California the steamer takes fire. The two boys 

reach the shore with several of the passengers. Young Brandon be- 
comes separated from his party and is captured by hostile Indians, 

but is afterwards rescued. This is a very entertaining narrative of 
Southern California. 


A Young Hero; or, Fighting to Win. By Edward S. 

Ellis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

This story tells how a valuable solid silver service was stolen from 
the Misses Perkinpine, two very old and simple minded ladies. Fred 
Sheldon, the hero of this story, undertakes to discover the thieves and 
have them arrested. After much time spent in detective work, he 
succeeds in discovering the silver plate and winning the reward. The 
story is told in Mr. Ellis’ most fascinating style. Every boy will be 
glad to read this delightful book. 

Lost in the Rockies. A Story of Adventure in the 

Rocky Mountains. By Edward S. Ellis. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1. 

Incident succeeds incident, and adventure is piled upon adventure, 
and at the end the reader, be he boy or man, will have experienced 
breathless enjoyment in this romantic story describing many adventures in 
the Rockies and among the Indians. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent 

publisher, A. L. BURT, 52-58 Duane 


postpaid on receipt of price by the 
Street, New York, 


A. L. BURT^S BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE. 7, 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

A Jaunt Through Java: The Story of a Journey to 

the Sacred Mountain. By Edward S. Elus, 12mo, cloth, illustrated, 
price $1.00. 

The interest of this story is found in the thrilling adventures of 
two cousins, Hermon and Eustace Hadley, on their trip acrosss the island 
of Java, from Samarang to the Sacred Mountain. In a land where the 
Royal Bengal tiger, the rhinoceros, and other fierce beasts are to be 
met with, it is but natural that the heroes of this book should have a 
lively experience. There is not a dull page in the book. 

The Boy Patriot. A Story of Jack, the Young Friend 

of Washington. By Edward S. Ellis. 12ino, cloth, olivine edges, illus- 
trated, price $1.50. 

“There are adventures of all kinds for the hero and his friends, whose 
pluck and ingenuity in extricating themselves from awkward fixes are 
always equal to the occasion. It is an excellent story full of honest, 
manly, patriotic efforts on the part of the hero. A very vivid description 
of the battle of Trenton is also found in this story.” — Journal of 
Education. 

A Yankee Lad’s Pluck. How Bert Larkin Saved his 

Father’s Ranch in Porto Rico. By Wm. P. Chipman. 12mo, cloth, illus- 
trated, price $1.00. 

“Bert Larkin, the hero of the story, early excites our admiration, 
and is altogether a fine character such as boys will delight in, whilst 
the story of his numerous adventures is very graphically told. This 
will, we think, prove one of the most popular boys’ books this season.” — 
Gazetted 

A Brave Defense. A Story of the Massacre at Fort 

Griswold in 1781. By William P. Chipman. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price 

$ 1 . 00 . 

Perhaps no more gallant fight against fearful odds took place during 
the Revolutionary War than that at Fort Griswold, Groton Heights, Conn., 
in 1781. The boys are real boys who were actually on the muster rolls, 
either at Fort Trumbull on the New London side, or of Fort Griswold on 
the Groton side of the Thames. The youthful reader who follows Halsey 
Sanford and Levi Dart and Tom Malleson, and their equally brave com- 
rades, through their thrilling adventures will be learning something more 
than historical facts: they will be imbibing lessons of fidelity, of bravery, 
of heroism, and of manliness, which must prove serviceable in the arena 
of life. 

The Young Minuteman. A Story of the Capture of 

General Prescott in 1777. By William P. Chipman. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, 
price $1.00. 

This story is based upon actual events which occurred during the British 
occupation of the waters of Narragansett Bay. Darius Wale and William 
Northrop belong tQ “the coast patrol.” The story Is a strong one, dealing 
only with actual events. There is, however, no lack of thrilling adventure, , 
and every lad who is fortunate enough to obtain the book will find not 
only that his historical knowledge is increased, but that his own patriotism 
and love of country are deepened. 

For the Temple: A Tale of the Fall of Jerusalem. 

By G. A. Henty. With illustrations by S. J. Solomon. 12mo, cloth, olivine 
edges, price $1.00. 

“Mr. Henty’s graphic prose picture of the hopeless Jewish resistance 
to Roman sway adds another leaf to his record of the famous wars of 
the world. The book is one of Mr. Henty’s cleverest efforts.” — Graphio. 

For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the 
publisher, A.' L. BURT, 52-58 Duane Street, New York. 


8 A. L. BURIES BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE, 


BOOKS FOR BOYS. 

Roy Gilbert’s Search : A Tale of the Great Lakes. By 

Wm. P. Ohipman. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

A deep mystery hangs over the parentage of Roy Gilbert. He arranges 
with two schoolmates to make a tour of the Great Lakes on a steam 
launch. The three boys visit many points of interest on the lakes. 
Afterwards the lads rescue an elderly gentleman and a lady from a sink- 
ing yacht. Later on the boys narrowly escape with their lives. The 
hero is a manly, self-reliant boy, whose adventures will be followed 
with interest. 

The Slate Picker: The Story of a Boy’s Life in the 

Coal Mines. By Harry Prentice. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price Si. 00. 
This is a story of a boy’s life in the coal mines of Pennsylvania. 
Ben Burton, the hero, had a hard road to travel, but by grit and energy 
he advanced step by step until he found himself called upon to fill the 
position of chief engineer of the Kohinoor Coal Company. This is a 
book of extreme interest to every boy reader. 

The Boy Cruisers; or. Paddling in Florida. By St. 

George Rathborne. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00 
Andrew George and Rowland Carter start on a canoe trip along the 
Gulf coast, from Key West to Tampa, Florida. Their first adventure 
is with a pair of rascals who steal their boats. Next they run into 
a gale in the Gulf. After that they have a lively time with alli- 
gators and Andrew gets into trouble with a band of Seminole Indians. 
Mr. Rathborne knows just how to interest the boys, and lads who are 
in search of a rare treat will do well to read this entertaining story. 

Captured by Zulus: A Story of Trapping in Africa. 

By Harry Prentice. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

This story details the adventures of two lads, Dick Elsworth and Bob 
Harvey, in the wilds of South Africa. By stratagem the Zulus capture 
Dick and Bob and take them to their principal kraal or village. The 
lads escape death by dig ing their w T ay out of the prison hut by night. 
They are pursued, but the Zulus finally give up pursuit. Mr. Prentice 
tells exactly how wild-beast collectors secure specimens on their native 
stamping grounds, and these descriptions make very entertaining reading. 

Tom the Ready; or, Up from the Lowest. By Ran- 

dolph Hill. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, price $1.00. 

This is a dramatic narrative of the unaided rise of a fearless, ambi- 
tious boy from the lowest round of fortune’s ladder to wealth and the 
governorship of his native State. Tom Seacomb begins life with a pur- 
pose, and eventually overcomes those who oppose him. How he manages 
to win the battle is told by Mr. Hill in a masterful way that thrills 
the reader and holds his attention and sympathy to the end. 

Captain Kidd’s Gold: The True Story of an Adven- 
turous Sailor Boy. By James Franklin Fitts. 12mo, cloth, illustrated, 
price $1.00. 

There is something fascinating to the average youth in the very idea 
of buried treasure. A vision arises before his eyes of swarthy Portu- 
guese and Spanish rascals, with black beards and gleaming eyes. There 
were many famous sea rovers, but none more celebrated than Capt. Kidd. 
Paul Jones Garry inherits a document which locates a considerable 
treasure buried by two of Kidd’s crew. The hero of this book is an 
ambitious, persevering lad, of salt-water New England ancestry, and his 
efforts to reach the island and secure the money form one of the most 
absorbing tales for our youth that has come from the press. 

For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the 
publisher, A, L, BURT, 52-68 Duane Street, New York, 


















I 






















t 









- 

































' ‘ A 












. 

. 




- 

. 




















* 














- 

i .MHUnKMSUr 4 K w • M * # 




























, V 






































W 
















■ 

i, ■ 




































\ 













% 




. • 




• t 
















* 









' 
























- 

. 



















•V 






■J 












































